29 State Agency, political sub-divi sion, or other governments to sh are joint authority (authority possessed by both parties) are author ized by A.R.S. 11-951 through 11-952.

In the event that a governmental agreement scope of work would include environmentally related measurements or data generation, the ADEQ QA/QC Steering Committee’s role would be substantially the same as it is for the General La boratory Services Contra ct. Procurement’s role

would include coordination with the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Manager or his or her designee, the ADEQ Project/Case Manager, and the outside politic al subdivision, and then final negotiation of the governmental agreement.

4.5.1 ADHS and State Laborat ory Services (SLS)

The ADHS provides support for ADEQ as neces sary for laboratory services, method development, risk assessments, development of some regulatory limits, and expert testimony.30 

## CHAPTER 5 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS

MANAGEMENT

Maintaining important quality assurance (QA) doc uments and records is a continuous process at ADEQ. This process serves as a vehicle for id entifying quality-related documents and records requiring management control. Moreover, this pr ocess serves to assure that QA documents and records are accessible, and prot ected from damage and deterior ation during storage. Finally, ADEQ’s Records Management Process ensures co mpliance with all statutory and contractual requirements for records involving environmen tal Programs. ADEQ Records Management System also provides adequate preservation of key records necessary to support the mission of ADEQ.

5.1 DEFINITION OF PUBLIC RECORDS

"Records" as defined in ARS § 41-1350, “means all books, papers, maps, photographs or other documentary materials, regardless of physical form or characteristics, incl uding prints or copies of such items produced or reproduced on film or electronic media, made or received by any governmental agency in pursuance of law or in connection with the tr ansaction of public business and preserved or appropriate for preser vation by the agency or its legitimate successor as evidence of the organization, functions, policies, decisions, pr ocedures, operations or other activities of the government, or because of the inform ational and historical value of data contained therein. Library or museum material made or acquired solely for reference or exhibition purposes, extra copies of documents pr eserved only for convenience of reference and stocks of publications or documents intended for sa le or distribution to in terested persons are not

included within the definition of re cords as used in this chapter.”

5.2 EXCLUSIONS FROM THE DEFINITION OF PUBLIC RECORDS

ARS § 49-205 indicates that:

A. Any records, reports or information obtaine d from any person under th is chapter, including records, reports or information obtained or prepared by the Direct or or a department employee, shall be available to the public, except that:

1. Income tax returns are confidential;

2. Drinking water system security vulnerabili ty assessments that are submitted to the

United States Environmental Protection Agency, pursuant to Public Law 107-188, are exempt from disclosure under this chapter and Title 39, Chapter 1;

3. Other information, or a particular part of the information, shall be considered

confidential on either:

(a) A showing, satisfactory to the Director, by an y person that the information, or a particular part of the information, if made public, woul d divulge the trade secrets of the person.31 (b) A determination by the Attorney General that disclosure of the information or a particular part of the information would be detrimental to an ongoing criminal investigation or to an ongoing or contemplated civil enforcement actio n under this chapter in superior court.

B. Notwithstanding subsection A of this section, th e following information shall be available to the public:

1. The name and address of any permit applicant or permittee;

2. The chemical constituents, concentrations and amounts of any pollutant discharge;

3. The existence or level of a concentration of a pollutant in drinking water or in the

environment.

C. Notwithstanding subsection A of this section, and in addition to the information prescribed by subsection B of this section, the following information that is obtained by the department and that relates to discharges au thorized by a permit issued under the Program adopted pursuant to section 49-203, subsection A, paragraph 2 shal l be made available to the public by the department:

1. Information required to be submitted in a permit application;

2. The frequency of the discharge;

3. The temperature and pH level of the discharge;

4. Other water quality charact eristics that are required to be reported under the permit.

D. Notwithstanding subsection A of this section, th e Director may disclose any records, reports or information obtained from any person under th is chapter, including records, reports or information obtained by the Director or department employees, to:

1. Other state employees concerned with admini stering this chapter or if the records, reports or information is relevant to any administrative or judicial proceeding under this chapter;

2. Employees of the United States Envi ronmental Protection Agency if such information is necessary or required to ad minister and implement or comply with the Clean Water Act, the Safe Drinking Water Act, Comprehensive Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act ( CERCLA) or provisions and regulations relating to those acts.32 Materials excluded from the defini tion of public records include reference material, extra copies of articles, periodicals, reports, documents, blank forms, extra copies of documents preserved for convenience of reference, studies , vendor catalogs, and similar ma terials that are needed for convenience or reference, but are no t part of the official file. Su ch items should be destroyed as soon as they are no longer needed and accord ing to an approved retention schedule. Other materials excluded from the definition of p ublic records, but maintained in confidential files, include draft documents, such as electronic and marked up copy drafts.

5.3 CONFIDENTIAL DOCUMENTS

Some documents collected, received, or genera ted may, by nature and content, be documents which require special handling procedures. Do cuments of this category may be, but are not limited to, enforcement sensitive/enforcement c onfidential, attorney client, or confidential business information (CBI). Confidential documen ts are handled in accordance with state law and ADEQ policy. Only ADEQ staff are allowed to see documents classified as enforcement

confidential. Confidential documents shall be maintained separately from other QA documents. Only those ADEQ staff, and others , who have been trained and aut horized can access CBI files.

In most cases criminal sanctions exist for una uthorized disclosure of CBI. Nothing in the requirements put forward in this QMP shall be construed to supers ede any existing requirements for handling enforcement sensi tive or confidential documents.

5.4 ROUTINE QUALITY ASSURANC E AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT

The ADEQ Records Management Process addres ses the system employed by the Agency for handling documents. This plan outlines the role s and responsibilities fo r management and staff concerning chain of custody proced ures and records management.

ADEQ document control procedures require that documents generated, or obtained, by Agency personnel be accounted for when a project is co mpleted. ADEQ’s Records Management System dictates the procedures for checking-in and check ing-out files for ADEQ sta ff, external clients, and the public.

For reasons of file integrity, th e files must be reviewed in th e presence of the Custodian of Records or his or her designee. No file can be certified as an original co py if it is reviewed by anyone without a staff member fr om the Custodian of Records be ing present. The chain of custody for all Agency files must be carefully gu arded in order to have the greatest degree of integrity regarding Agency files.

ADEQ creates and maintains a unique identificati on code for each investigation or project. ADEQ Records Center is able to use the iden tification codes, and th eir cross referencing capabilities, to identify the cont ents and location of the investig ation/project files. All custody tags, custody records, field notes, or analyt ical records are labeled with ADEQ generated identification codes. Each file is required to have an identification code, date, the Agency Project/Case Manager’s initials or signature, a nd where appropriate the ADEQ Index and PCA to

indicate the source of th e funding for the project. Data pack ages generated by laboratories which33 are requested by Project/Case Managers, and submitted to the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor, will be maintained by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit.

The QA/QC Unit is responsible for maintaining a directory of QA/QC documents within the Agency, this includes the QMP

, QAPrPs

, QAPjPs , FSPs, SAPs, SOPs , and other related QA/QC documents. Duplicates of many of these documen ts are stored electronically within the QA/QC Unit. Original QA documents are organized by pr oject or site. These documents, along with other records generated, are stor ed in the applicable Program offices within ADEQ or in the Central Records Management Office. The records will be centrally managed via the records management system, but physically may reside in th e Program files, project file, or in the records review area. Regardless of phys ical location of a file, records and documents associated with a given project are the responsibility of the Division Program that has primary responsibility for that project. Hard copies of s ite or project specific information su ch as sample field sheets, chain of custody records, laboratory no tes, and instrument/equipment r eadings shall be maintained in the official project file. Th e ADEQ Project/Case Manager is re sponsible for assuring that all field and analytical identification codes referencing the project are maintained in the project file. Correspondence that is material to the project a nd is generated on the network shall be printed and maintained in the app licable project file.

The ADEQ Director represents the final custodian of that information. Projects involving the generation of environmental data shall include, at a minimum, the Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPjPs) and final labor atory reports. For projects not funded by EPA some project planning documents other than a QAPjP may be acceptable providing that the objectives are clear and the documentation is likely to produce data of known quality and appropriate for its intended use. QAPjPs submitted to ADEQ are peer reviewed by the respective Project/Case Manager, and approved by desi gnated Program staff. The ap proval process is based upon guidelines set forth by the QA Steer ing Committee. The process for QAPjP review is spelled out in corresponding QA Program Plans. Approved c opies, with the approving signatures, are retained by the Program’s Project/Case Manage r and the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor, or his or her designee. The QAPjP and the final analytical reports will be stored together, thereby allowing a subsequent analyzer (the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Superv isor or designated Program staff), or investigator, to unde rstand the full context of the data produced and the conclusions

reached.

The ADEQ QA/QC Steering Committee, in conjunc tion with EPA Region IX where appropriate, ensures that all Quality Management Plans and Quality Assurance Project Plans are current.

Should one of these documents become outda ted, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor and EPA Region IX, in conjunction with the ADEQ Projec t/Case Manager, shall de termine the status of the plan and initiate appropriate action. The Division Program and the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor shall be responsible for maintaini ng copies of ADEQ revised/approved QAPrPs and QAPjPs for five years after completion of the project.

ADEQ management will assure that the objectives of the Records Management Process are achieved. These objectives include the following:



##  Prevent the creation of unnecessa ry records in any media;34 

##  Promote the continuous development of f iling systems and structures that allow for the efficient organization, maintena nce, and retrieval of records;



##  Ensure that records of continuing value are preserved, but that valueless or noncurrent information is disposed of or tr ansferred to storage in a timely manner in accordance with ADEQ and/or ADHS r ecords retention requirements;



##  Ensure that the acquisition and use of a ll direct paper to microform systems and equipment, or electronic digital imaging, are technically feasib le, cost-effective, and most importantly, satisfy Program needs;



##  Preserve and protect information that is vital to the essentia l functions or mission of the organization. Preserve and protect in formation that is e ssential to the legal rights and interests of indivi dual citizens and the government.

5.5 IN-HOUSE QUALITY ASSU RANCE GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS

Quality guidance documents developed in-house are peer reviewed by ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit and the appropriate Divisional Program. Most of the in-house quality guidance documents are formatted as SOPs covering specific environmenta l monitoring activities such as field inspection, sample collection/handling, analytical protocols, and data evaluation as mentioned in section 2.2.6. Also, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit maintains on ADE Q’s website, SOPs for the collection of water samples from Arizona public water syst ems that will be submitted to ADHS certified laboratories for analysis of volatile organi c compounds (VOCs), synthetic organic compounds (SOCs), and inorganic compounds (IOCs). These SOPs have been peer reviewed and approved by EPA, and the ADHS State Laboratory, for ADEQ use.

Other in-house quality assurance guidance doc uments include policies. The ADEQ QA/QC Steering Committee drafts quality assurance and analytical polic ies to express the Agency’s position when interpreting analytical data gene rated by laboratories using EPA methods which may have multiple procedural interpretations. One such Agency wide policy is ADEQ Policy # 0154.000 Addressing Spikes and matrix effects.

5.5.1 Requirements for Field Documentation

Documentation of field activities establishes pro cedures, identifies written records, enhances and facilitates sample tracking, standardizes data entries, and identifies and establishes authenticity of the sample data collected. Proper documentation helps to ensure that all essential and required information is consistently acquired and preserved. Timely, correct, and complete documentation establishes the chain-of-custody, a requirement for data intended to provide evidence in court proceedings. Ex act procedures vary from Program to Program and are detailed within individual Program documents.

Field records shall be generated and stored as specified in project sp ecific QAPjPs, SOPs, or guidance for handling field records.

5.6 MAINTAINING DOCUMENT INTEGRITY35 Following all required ADEQ documented policie s and actions regarding Records Management, the file clerk, and all other ADEQ staff, with access to potentially sensitive documents and records (i.e., audit reports and performance eval uation reports) will take special care to preserve the integrity of these doc uments. If sensitive documents are to be used at a work station, due care will be used in order to maintain the integrity of the data.36 

## CHAPTER 6 INFORMATION TEC HNOLOGY (IT) AND DATA

MANAGEMENT

Data management serves a critical function in both preserving information and making that information available. Data management necessa rily encompasses a variety of activities related to planning environmental monitoring, collecting samples from different media, laboratory and in-situ analysis of samples, organizing and stor ing resulting data, analyz ing and interpreting data, disseminating data, and communicating the m onitoring results and knowledge gained. The way ADEQ manages data has evolved substa ntially in the past decade primarily due to Internet availability (e.g., opportunities in electronic government), increased emphasis on enterprise architecture, and the need for better security of e nvironmental data. Also, ADEQ strives to comply with all EPA standards and re gulations, as appropriate, pertaining to hardware, software, database system deve lopment, and data reporting.

This section summarizes the department’s in formation management practices and related information technology topics. Additional aspect s of project management, such as planning, data gathering, and evaluation by ADEQ Programs, are addressed in the QAPrPs or other project planning documents as appropriate.

6.1 MANAGEMENT PRACTICES FO R ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

An important Agency goal is to continue to improve the way data are generated, compiled, stored, and disseminated across each of the ADEQ Divisions (Air, Waste, Water, and Administrative Services). The manner data are managed is governed by the Agency mission, Program business needs (e.g., permitting, compliance, assessments), and specific data collection project/Program objectives. Additional activities that influence data management approaches include EPA reporting requirements, quality assurance, cost control, and security. Information management systems are typically evaluated for return on investment, risk management, and total cost of ownership. This has led ADEQ to adopt an Oracle-based enterprise architecture that offers common services and c onsolidated purchases as a foundation for all our major database applications that include, but are not limited to, AZURITE (the Agency’s enterprise database application fo r managing data related to the functions of licensing/permitting, inspections, compliance, and remediation), Air Assessment Ambient Database ( AAAD),Water Quality Database , Safe Drinking Water Information System (SDWIS), Surface Water Quality System, Groundwater Qual ity System, Drywell System, Water Permits and Certifications System, Engineering Review System, and Global Positioning System Data Post-processing.

6.1.1 Database Development:

Data models are employed when developing database systems to serve as a bridge between those collecting the data and the information processing systems that support those using the data. Data models are basically conceptual schemas that map data relationships, focusing on those

relations that matter most to the business. ADEQ utilizes a standard System Development Lifecycle Methodology for information projects, a nd a rapid application development method, as37 appropriate. Generally, the methods used incl ude an analysis and documentation of user requirements, followed by system design specifica tions. ADEQ uses the Oracle Designer tool to document requirements and system design. ADEQ coding standards are published and implemented, ensuring consistency and maintainabil ity of source code. A project team approach is utilized, which includes end user involve ment throughout the proj ect lifecycle. User documentation, including on-line help, is provided with each database system as resources permit.

6.1.1.2 Systems development planning

The State of Arizona utilizes a standard In formation Technology (IT) project planning and justification process. The G overnment Information Technology Agency (GITA) reviews and approves Project Investment Justif ications (PIJs) for IT projects with a combined developmental and infrastructure cost great er than $25,000. PIJ approval must be received before budget monies can be allocated to an IT project. The central IT organization wo rks in unison with the Program IT specialists to plan, prioritize, and implement Agency IT projects.

6.1.2 Data Quality and Data Integrity:

Data integrity and data quality are related in the fact that both are needed to ensure that the data are sufficient for their intended use. For the purpose of this document data quality relates to the process used to collect, analyze, verify, and validate environmental results. Data integrity relates to the input, storage, maintenance, and retrieval of those results.

6.1.2.1 Data Quality:

Before environmental data are entered into a ny database, and released for production, producers of the data shall use a standard Quality Assura nce procedure to verify that they meet the requirements of their intended use. QAPrPs will de scribe the level of QA/QC necessary for their Programs and should include references to how data quality is determin ed with regards to precision, accuracy, representa tiveness, comparability, comp leteness and sensitivity.

Regardless of the data entry method, manual entry or electronic file transfer, data entry personnel should verify that the data meet the above criteria prior to input into the database. Questionable data may be entered and maintained in a da tabase if they are a ppropriately documented, qualified, or flagged.

6.1.2.2 Data Integrity:

The data integrity process begins once the data are ready for input into the databases. Data integrity addresses the vulnerability of the sy stem to unauthorized access, data manipulation, theft, and environmental damage.

These threats are mitigated by implementing a strong internal database QA/QC process. This includes a security process, further detailed in Section 6.8, that re cognizes database users through logons and assigned database roles. The pro cess begins through ADEQ’s AZURITE database that maintains ADEQ’s centralized core data such as:38 

##  PERSON (Individual users of the database, including tracking information);



##  PLACE (The sites and facilities that ADEQ regulates or tracks);



##  CUSTOMER (individuals, or ganizations, and businesses that ADEQ regulates or interacts with);



##  LTF (Licensing Time Frames).

Daily verification is performed on PLACE, CUSTOM ER, and LTF core data to assure that data entry standards are followed, that location info rmation is provided, and that a duplicate record does not exist before validating a new record as pa rt of ADEQ core data. Any record that is not complete, or does not meet data entry standards, will be returned to the originating Program for correction, and the use of that data will be restricted until corrected.

Presenting data in an understand able and useful format is a key component in ensuring data integrity. Agency projects will be presented in a way that is suitable for the intended audience. The following guidelines are implemented by ADEQ, to the extent applicable, useful, and possible in designing effective a pproaches to Agency projects:

1. Establish a context for presenting data using one or many of the following techniques: displaying data in a geogra phic context, combining the new data source with existing collections of mon itored data, or aggregating the data collected to demonstrate a trend or ongoi ng view of the environmental conditions. ADEQ will present the data in ways that make that data relevant and useful;

2. Format data for easy interpretation so data are portrayed with the intended message and not misused. ADEQ will make every effort to ensure that data will always be presented in a format that is easy to understand and not subject to misinterpretation. This includes no t separating data from corresponding documentation, qualifiers, or flags that may indicate the usability of the data;

3. Be responsive to the users of the data by staying abreast of ch anging user needs, Agency IT projects are designed to include ways for users to provide feedback on the projects.

Metadata are additional information related to the primary results that are being presented, commonly known as data about the data. This supporting information ca n significantly impact the usability of the primary data and should always be considere d. Specifically, metadata include positional/location data, field measurements, temperatures, quality control data, data qualifiers, meteorological data, facility inform ation, and site conditions. The st orage of metadata is specific to each of the databases maintained at ADEQ. E ach database, and the Programs associated with the database, are delineated in relevant Program documents and detailed in the Program’s QAPrP. It is important to note that metadata often provide substantial information relating to

environmental results and should not be separated from those resu lts if it changes the meaning, or usability, of the data in any way.39 Audits and Testing are required for all databa ses and systems. A ll IT projects involving development of systems for tracki ng of environmental data will be thoroughly tested to ensure that they meet the requirements in the written f unctional specifications. Independent audits of these systems will be conducted by the QA/QC Unit. The central IT organization has a test server environment that is in place, and is utilized regularly to te st Agency applications prior to being released into production.

6.1.3 Establishing back up and archiving procedures :

Department Programs will coordinate with the O ffice of Information and Technology to establish standard procedures for data b ackup and archiving, system failure, and recovery. Data sets will be archived to provide a histor ical record of data over the lif etime of the project. Current procedures involve daily full or incremental backups of all critical Agency data that are stored on site at ADEQ. Weekly and monthly back up of all critical data are kept in perpetuity and stored off site at ADEQ’s Disaster Recovery location in Tucson. Should a catastrophic event occur that renders our Phoenix computer equipment unusab le; ADEQ will be able to operate using the equipment and data located in Tucson.

6.2 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT PLAN

ADEQ has an information management plan that documents its approach to data collection, storage, retrieval, delivery, and communication. ADEQ also has procedur es for data quality control and security, which may be inco rporated, as appropriate, into QAPrPs. The information management plan includes the following elements:



##  Data Owners Data are owned by the Programs . This information plan provides the primary contact information of the individual and Program that has overall information management respons ibility and authority for Agency IT projects;



##  Description of the Data Flow Process The plan explains the key points in the information data flow and collection proce ss. This can be il lustrated by a flow chart, or diagram, depicting key information components;



##  Description of the Data Collection Methods The plan summarizes data

measurement and collection methods. It also describes any emerging measurement technologies used, and/or how existing systems of environmental monitoring will be augmented/up-graded to provide the proposed data;



##  Description of the Data St orage and Retrieval System ADEQ’s standard relational database platform is Oracle. ADEQ utilizes Oracle tools, including Designer and Developer, for application development. ADEQ also uses Microsoft Project for planning and tracki ng projects to completion. The plan

describes the hardware and software t echnologies that will be used for data management and processing systems. It specifies the componen ts of the project

architecture and also describes the arch ival components or st orage requirements. The plan addresses data management responsibilities among stakeholders and40 contractors to ensure data documen tation and data standardization.

6.3 ELECTRONIC DATA INTERCHANGE (EDI) AND NODE

Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) collects and manages compliance, measurement, and statistical data for a number of environmental Program s within the State of Arizona. The data are managed and reported both internally and external ly to other state and federal agencies. Typically, the electronic data interchange (EDI) is performed using rigid data

formats that are difficult to ma intain and managed using propriet ary methods. The rigidity and closed nature of the interchange make it very difficult to add new data formats, communicate with new data partners, or improve the overall process. The purpose of ADEQ’s Node is to eliminate the proprietary exchange formats a nd more easily facilitate the exchange of

information between the Environmental Protec tion Agency (EPA), and other participating organizations, by developing a Web Service base d gateway that supports the EPA XML message formats. ADEQ currently has a fully comp liant production Node, and has successfully exchanged data with EPA's Facility Registry System. Additional data flows are planned to exchange data with EPA's RCRA Info and AQS sy stems. In addition, the Node can be used internally and for non-EPA partner exchanges.

6.4 LEVELS OF DOCUMENTATION FO R ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECTS

Documentation is important because it helps users make informed decisions regarding the use of environmental data, provides consistency and IT project memory over time, and allows the data to be shared and used for a variety of purposes and in a variety of computing environments. ADEQ has developed the following four kinds of documentation requirements for environmental IT project data systems:

1. Data System Documentation : Documents critical information about the IT project, including project purpose and scope, user requirements, IT PIJ, and the IT project plan;

2. Data Set Documentation : Provides clear informati on about what data are collected and how to access and use them;

3. Data Element Documentation : Provides full definitions and specifications for

each element collected and ma intained in a data set;

4. Database System Documentation : Describes electronic and hard copy documentation of system design and implementation.

6.5 COMPUTER HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

ADEQ managers and staff will comply with all ADEQ hardware and software standards, which are maintained by the Office of Informati on and Technology. These standards address compatibility, hardware, operating systems, co mmunication, database management, user and printer interface, application development, and applications.41 ADEQ will procure hardware and software that c onforms to Agency wide and EPA information management architecture. In some cases, ADEQ will procure and configure hardware, or develop application software thr ough vendors that are not on the statewide contract. All such purchases will be evaluated to ensure that they comply with ADEQ standards as outlined in the Agency’s software and hardware standards. Prior to any purchases, ADEQ’s Chief Information Officer, or designee, will evaluate software and hardware to determine their performance capabilities, impact of implementation upon ADE Q, and its compatibility with EPA reporting requirements.

6.6 SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT

All ADEQ system development, enhancement, and modernization efforts will comply with Agency standards. The standards include a sy stematic and comprehensive dialogue between the data providers, data/system users, and system de velopers. The majority of the dialogue occurs prior to the design of the system in order to ensure extensive and successful user participation, and a systematic approach to the design. Syst ems will be designed and built to integrate with core Agency data in such a manner that re-use of code, and its associat ed cost savings, is

maximized.

All software systems shall be operated and mainta ined in accordance with written specifications and/or the owner’s manual. All software system s will be subjected to acceptance testing by end users prior to being placed in to a production environment.

For the proper implementation and maintenance of the technology infrastructure, ADEQ’s Office of Information and Technology:



##  Maintains an inventory of the computer system(s) hardware and written operating procedures for routine maintenance operations;



##  Documents data management systems in use, including functional and design specifications and requirements;



##  Maintains Standard Operating Procedur es which describe routine operation, maintenance, and testing to ensure that both the hardware and software in use are accurately performing their intended functions.

These documents will be readily available in the areas where these procedures will be performed. Changes in any part of the operating procedures shall be properly authorized, reviewed, and accepted in writing by the designated responsible person.

6.7 DATA STANDARDS

To take full advantage of both ADEQ’s and EP A’s growing technology, data standards, and resources, there must be an increased empha sis on improving the compatibility of data among computer systems. In addition to the policies a nd standards contained in the CFR, federal data policies and standards that are currently followed, including those which ADEQ is attempting to implement, include:42 

##  Chemical Abstract Service Registry Number Data Sta ndard, EPA Order 2180.1,
June 26, 1987;



##  Data Standards for the Electronic Transmission of Laboratory Measurement Results, EPA Order 2180.2, December 10, 1987;



##  The Minimum Set of Data Elements for Ground Water Quality, Policy Order 74500.IA, September 11, 1989;



##  Facility Identification Data Standard, U.S. EPA Office of Administration and Resources Management, Information Manage ment and Services Division, April 9,

1990.



##  Policy on Electronic Reporting, U.S. EPA Office of Ad ministration and Resources Management, July 30, 1990;



##  Site Location Identification Policy a nd Responsibilities, Region III, Order 5361.5, September 14, 1988;



##  ADEQ Locational Data Polic y, 0034.001 (see Appendix J);



##  Locational Data Policy, IRM Policy Manual, Chapter 13, April 1991; and



##  Locational Data Policy Implementation Gu idance- Guide to the Policy, U.S. EPA Office of Information and Resources Management, March, 1992.



##  Cross Media Electronic Reporting, Final Rule, October 13, 2005.

6.8 INFORMATION SECURITY

It is important that ADEQ information resource s are protected from pot ential loss and misuse from a variety of accidental and deliberate causes. Failure to adequately protect database systems can affect the integrity of data, privacy of data sources, availability of data for use (e.g., for legal and enforcement purposes), and the very existence of data. ADEQ utilizes the following security procedures and protocols:



##  Network Operating Systems use log-in and password controls;



##  Internal rights to Agency data are granted by local management for their employees;



##  Maintaining a “chain-of-custody” for any data value created or changed in a database;



##  A firewall security system for Internet usage;



##  Remote access controls for employees and third parties include the use of log-in and password protection;



##  All UNIX, NetWare, and Remote Access Operating Systems comply with DOD C2 security standards;



##  The main computer room is physically secured to limit access to only critical IT personnel.43 

## CHAPTER 7 PLANNING

A primary goal of ADEQ’s Quality Management Sy stem is to promote effective planning for the collection, analyses, and processing of environmenta l data. Quality planning must occur at three levels to ensure that such data meet ADEQ’s programmatic quality goals. The three levels are:



##  Agency wide Requirements;



##  Program Specific Requirements;



##  Project Level Requirements.

7.1 AGENCYWIDE PLANNING

7.1.1 Internal Strategic Planning

The ADEQ Strategic Plan is the foundation upon which all Programmatic priorities, and corresponding environmentally rela ted data collection and use activ ities, are based. Using the projected annual budget for ADEQ from the vari ous funding sources including EPA and the State of Arizona, ADEQ’s Director and senior mana gers meet each fiscal year to discuss and set ADEQ priorities. These priorities are then re flected in ADEQ’s Strate gic Planning process, which establishes overall goals, direction, resource utilization, policies, and budget allocations. Yearly action plans, developed by each ADEQ Di vision, are tied to ADEQ’ s Strategic Plan and budget allocation process. Action plans further speci fy the types of environmentally-related data generation activities that will occur. The yearly action plans also delineate what decisions they are designed to support and the corresponding requi rements for quality assurance and quality control procedures.

7.1.2 Eternal Strategic Planning

Close coordination and planning ac ross organizations is essential to ensure that data are of sufficient quality to support decisi on-makers, or otherwise meet thei r intended use. Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) and other planning tools can be shared across Programs sites and governmental agencies, and private organizations, where appropriate.

7.1.3 External Data Coordination

Once the data have been collected, ADEQ must also coordinate the use of environmentally related data across numerous government agenci es, academic, and private organizations. ADEQ encourages data sharing whenever possible. However, data shar ing is only done when adequate data quality indicators (DQIs) ar e available so that the quality of data is sufficiently known to support the applicable decision(s).44 7.2 PROGRAM-SPECIFIC PLANNING

ADEQ Programs are functional areas of work authorized by Stat utory reference (e.g., National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS)or Dri nking Water Program) or by Agency direction (e.g. the Voluntary Remediation Program). A ny of ADEQ’s environmental Programs which generate environmental data are covered by the QMP , though it is acknowledged that not every Program or project requires the same level of quality assurance. Generally, Program managers (their grades and titles vary by Division) are responsible for Program level planning, which includes the responsibility to ensure that there is agreement between the customer and the data supplier as to expected data quality.

Establishing Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) wh en initiating a new proj ect, or incorporating major statutory changes, is a mandatory component of the ADEQ Quality Management System. The EPA Quality Assurance Division guidance document, Guidance for the Data Quality Objectives Process, EPA QA/G-4 is available to assist user s in developing these objectives, as are other resources within the ADEQ QA/QC Unit when the formal DQO processes is necessary. Predetermined DQO’s based on regula tory criteria and act ion levels within similar Programs are often available, and thus a formal DQO process is not necessary. DQOs at the project level may address sources of error (i.e., sampling design and s ite variability) that will accumulate and affect the interpretation of data for st atus and trends. Program-level DQOs have the ability to meet Division Program objectives. Data Quality Objectiv es are also used as performance criteria for assessments of data quality for their ade quacy in determining status and trends.

It is critical to consider th e QMP during the planning proce ss when modifying existing, or designing new, Programs. Although the QMP outlines the minimum QA requirements for ADEQ, it is likely that most of the Programs covered by the QMP will need more QA specificity when implementing their Programs. In these cases, supplemen tal QA components and procedures are developed and described by th e Program. If requested, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit

will serve as technical advisors in the devel opment of these components and procedures. All Programs covered by the QMP should review th eir programmatic requirements each year to determine if the QMP adequately covers their QA needs, and if not, incorporate supplemental procedures into the Program Plans

7.3 PROJECT-LEVEL PLANNING

A project is an organized set of activities within a Program. The Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPjP) is the primary vehicle for ensuring that ther e is adequate data quality at the project level (see Chapter 2, Section 2.2 for a more comple te discussion of the QAPjP development and review process.) The ADEQ QMP refers to QA activities as a well-defined component of any project plan involving th e collection or use of environmental data.

The key to good quality planning at this level is to link the data collectio n, or analyses, to be performed directly to the environmental decision to be made. This is essential so that ADEQ

does not collect mounds of data for which there is no purpose. Achievin g this key component requires dialogue between the decisi on maker, contractor, and the data supplier. Again, the EPA45 Quality Assurance Division (QAD) document EPA QA/G-4, Guidance for the Data Quality Objective Process March, 2006 , as well as resources within the ADEQ QA/QC Unit, can be invaluable in establishing the desired data cert ainty requirements based on the decision to be made. The use of statistical methods to qua ntify data acceptability measures is highly recommended. Members of the QA Team in EP A Region IX can provide assistance with statistical applications. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit can assist ADEQ Programs by providing the appropriate references.

Planning documentation identifies ADEQ’s pe rsonnel responsible for ensuring that all components of a QAPjP are addressed appropriate ly. Project/Case Managers will normally be responsible for the development of these QA com ponents, which will adhere to the requirements of EPA QA/R-5, EPA Requirements for QA Project Plans. March, 2001 . QAPjPs are reviewed to ensure that all the required EPA and ADEQ el ements are appropriately addressed. The review process is conducted by the Division QA Representa tive, or appropriate de signee, and must be approved by appropriate delega ted autonomous Division personnel or by the QA/QC Unit.

When initiating a site-specific project, a preliminary plan is developed for accomplishing the required work. Through this process, specific individuals are made accountable for different aspects of the investigation.

The ADEQ planning process considerations include:



##  Identifying the regulations involved;



##  Defining the forensic requirements of the regulations;



##  Defining DQOs



##  Defining MQOs



##  Structuring communication between all th e parties involved in the project;



##  Defining the scope of the project to meet enforcement objectives;



##  Identifying and scheduling activities;



##  Identifying resources needed;



##  Identifying health and safety issues;



##  Questioning the validity of scientific models and methods proposed for use.

7.3.1 On-Site Monitoring

The determination to use on-site monitoring, and the specific type of monitoring to be conducted, is based upon the project objectives as defi ned by the QAPjP. Field screening information, combined with statistics, can be used to define the number and type of samples needed to meet the project objectives.

Monitoring for personal protection may include usi ng a specific instrument to screen the work area to determine the appropriate level of pers onal protection needed. These instruments can also be used for continuous monitoring while work is being performed.46 Quality control indicators used in on-site monitoring depend on the applicable regulations, the type of equipment, the nature of the material s monitored, and the monitoring objectives. Quality control parameters such as blanks, blank spikes , matrix spikes, field duplicates, surrogates, and calibration curve data (all QC parameters as they apply) shall be documented.

7.3.2 Sampling Events

The sampling activity shall be focused toward me eting the regulatory, technical, and analytical requirements defined during the planning phase . ADEQ sample collection activities are designed to answer questions such as:



##  How do the media compare to a regulatory threshold?



##  How do the media compare to other site media?



##  Is a specific component or condition present?



##  Are there trends or hot spots?

The sampling activity requires:



##  Coordinating field activities with laboratory activities;



##  Maintaining sample integrity;



##  Focusing on regulatory and Agency de fined data quality requirements.

7.3.2.1 Sample Scheduling

Communication with the laboratory prior to sampli ng is critical in achieving the stated Data Quality Objectives. Some sample events ar e unique and one time events, while others are routine and ongoing. Regardless, all laboratory sample scheduling ev ents need to be coordinated with the laboratories, at a minimum, several days prior to sampling. Communications should include, time frames, methods, matr ix types, required detection limits, and where appropriate, the purpose for testing to ensure the requirements of Federal or State stat utes under which ADEQ intends to regulate are fulfilled. The QA/QC Unit can facilitate finding appropriate laboratories, ensuring that DQOs and MQOs can be met, a nd that the laboratory meet minimum ADEQ Quality Control requirements.

7.4 ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS

Analysis involves the characteri zation of samples based on chemical and/or physical properties. Analyses result in generating raw data from either instrumental analysis, chemical analysis, or physical testing. The analytical methods used will be specific, sensi tive enough to answer the question posed by the Program objectives, and meet the data quality goals associated with those objectives.47 Measurement Quality Objectives (MQOs) are the project or program QC criteria defined for various Data Quality Indicators (DQIs). During the planning phase, these set pre-determined limits on the acceptability of the data in regard s to accuracy /bias, and precision, completeness and sensitivity.

ADEQ Project/Case Managers may consult with the ADEQ QA/QC Un it, or research a variety of published or written materials, to aid th em in selecting or developing measurement technologies. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit shall maintain a file of in-house procedures and practices used in the measurement process. Data Qu ality Objectives (DQOs), and ADEQ QA/QC Unit’s professional knowledge, are used to identif y appropriate analytical procedures.

DQI’s, as defined by EPA involve precision, acc uracy, representativeness, completeness, comparability, and sensitivity, also known as “PAR CC” parameters. It is expected that these indicators be used in data evaluation, but in ge neral, the criteria by which DQIs are evaluated are based on project data quality needs, ie, the MQOs.. The extent to which theses indicators will be utilized should be provided in a Program’s QAP rP. The extent to which program or project QC results meets MQOs determines whether data are acceptable for the intended use.

7.5 DATA TRANSLATION

Data translation involves transl ating raw data into useable information which can include qualitative identifications, quantitative determina tions, and/or statements of condition. This process can include arithmetic calculations, and/or statistical evaluations, of results from a sample or collection of samples.

7.6 DATA INTERPRETATION

The ADEQ Project/Case Manager will attempt to us e sample data to form an opinion about the characteristics of a data set. The ADEQ Pr oject/Case Manager will use quality control information to support conclusions or to iden tify limitations of the data. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit will be available to assist the ADEQ Proj ect/Case Manager in assessing QC data when actions have regulatory implications . For compliance testing, the acc eptable data (ie, data that meets the MQOs) will define the characteristics of the data set that will then be compared to regulatory requirements to determine compliance.

7.7 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Health and safety are an integral part of the ADEQ Quality Management System, because the management philosophy is that a safe workplace is essential for the long term success of the Quality Management System. ADEQ Management, with the assistance of the ADEQ Health and Safety Committee, has developed policies and procedures focused toward a safe working environment, and developed a Program that is ade quate to protect the health and safety of ADEQ staff. The ADEQ Health and Safety procedures implement applicable EPA and Office of Safety and Health Administration regula tions. The ADEQ Safety Committee conducts or contracts for specialized training Programs to meet the sa fety needs of ADEQ measurement activities.48 The ADEQ Health and Safety Environmental Management Program is the mechanism which ensures that appropriate issues are considered pr ior to the initiation of measurement activities. The ADEQ Health and Safety Environmental Ma nagement Program includes the following three key elements: 1. Training - Includes field a nd laboratory safety, first aid and CPR, supervisory safety, hazardous waste, a nd other pertinent training;

2. Audits, Inspections, Investigations, and Hazard Control - Includes planning reviews, associated reporting, and record keeping to identif y, prevent, and/or abate health and safety problems;

3. Occupational Medical Monitoring - Incl udes medical monitoring of staff who may be exposed to chemical, biological, ra diological, or other agents, or who may experience physical stress during their work.49 

## CHAPTER 8 IMPLEMENTATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE

WORK PROCESSES

This Chapter of the QMP describes the processes used at ADEQ for facilitating the effective implementation of QA plans and procedures wh ich comprise ADEQ’s Quality System. Any changes to the QMP will be documented in revisions and will receive, at least, Agency Director level approval. As with the QA planning de scribed in Chapter 7, implementation of QA procedures takes place at the Agency, Program, and project levels.

8.1 AGENCYWIDE IMPLEMENTATION

ADEQ utilizes a tiered approach to ensure that environmental data are of sufficient quantity, and quality, for their intended purpose. Any revision s to the QMP will be processed in the same manner as was the original document. QMP revisions will be drafted by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit, and submitted to the QA/QC Steering Co mmittee for comment, with final approval by ADEQ’s Leadership Team. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor, teamed with the QA/QC Steering Committee, will provide general over sight of implementation of the ADEQ Quality Management System and identify needs for revisions to the QMP. The ADEQ Programs will provide technical oversight for implementi ng environmental data operations through the development of Quality Assurance Program Plans (QAPrPs).

8.1.1 Divisional Quality Assurance Program Plans

QAPrPs will be developed within the individu al Programs. When requested, ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit will assist in development and implementa tion of environmental data operations according to approved planning documents. Additionall y, each QAPrP needs to identify those specific activities that will ensure the generation of quality data by:



##  Defining commonalities in operations, methods, and procedures used throughout the Program;



##  Covering elements of Program manage ment, data generation and acquisition, assessment and oversight, and da ta validation and usability;



##  Describing the level or degree of the Pr ogram quality system, and the different types of QA documents used by the Progr am, focusing on those elements that are not time or site specific;



##  Identifying those responsible and desc ribing the procedures for Program QA document preparation, review, and approval;



##  Discussing data quality objectives includi ng the identification of Program wide technical or regul atory criteria;



##  Attaching reference and supporting document s used throughout the Program, such as SOPs and regulatory lists.

Each ADEQ QAPrP should be reviewed on an annua l basis, and at minimu m, revised every five years or when significant changes in the busine ss operation occur, to en sure that the plans50 accurately reflect how business within the Prog ram is conducted. It is essential that the workflow outlined in the QAPrP is consistent with actual business conducted. The Programs will provide a copy of their QAPrP to the QA/ QC Unit and also to EPA Region IX for EPA Funded programs, for approval, general oversight, and management of the Agency wide Quality System.

8.2 PROGRAM LEVEL IMPLEMENTATION

8.2.1 Operating Policies and Procedures

Any ADEQ Program which generates, or uses, environmental data will document its QA policies and procedures, and will develop and/or use ap propriate policy and procedure manuals for its Programs. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit will provide suppor t and oversight in the generation of such documents. The EPA Quality Staff issues doc uments to provide information on satisfying Federal Regulations, for example, Guidance for Preparing Standard Operating Procedures,
March, 2001 (QA-G6), this document should be referenced by ADEQ Programs when developing procedure manuals for administrativ e and technical QA operations. Implementation of these procedures will enable Program personnel to gain and document procedural knowledge about their operations, and will also serve as a training guide for new staff members.

The ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor will work with the ADEQ Programs to ensure that operational QA policies and procedures develope d by the Programs are consistent with the ADEQ QMP . This responsibility includes defining procedures for appropriate routine, standardized, special, or critical operations, including the policies and procedures that address,

but are not limited to:



##  The identification of operations needing standardized procedures;



##  The process for preparation of pro cedures, including form, content, and applicability;



##  Determination of SOP adequacy, and consequent review and approval.

Any QA procedure manuals developed by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit will be made available to all personnel involved in Program implementation. If implementation of the Program is delegated or outsourced, these QA procedural manuals will be referenced in the Task/Work Assignment, Task/Delivery Order, or similar document consis tent with the ADEQ Procurement process. A Program using data generated by external source s must develop criteria and a process by which to evaluate the acceptability of the data supplied. The data quality assessment process described in Chapter 9.4 can be useful here.

8.3 PROJECT LEVEL IMPLEMENTATION

8.3.1 Quality Assurance Project Plan Implementation

All environmental data operations will be implem ented in accordance with an approved QAPjP or QAPrP. The ADEQ Project/Case Manager shoul d include identifiable QA milestones, and51 target dates, in the project timeline so that progress and completion of QA and QC activities can be effectively tracked. Any changes to the QAP jP will be documented as soon as possible in writing with an amendment to th e QAPjP. Amendments will be reviewed and approved by the ADEQ Project/Case Manager. It is critical to have a quick and efficient system for any QAPjP changes so the plan can be accurately used for its intended purpose, as a reference and guide throughout the project.

8.3.2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)

Many repetitive procedures that are routinely used can be standardized and documented in writing as SOPs. SOPs can be prepared for r outinely conducted sampling, analytical, and quality control procedures. Once established, the SOPs can be cited in the QAPjPs, contract proposals, grant agreements, and other similar documents, t hus saving time and paper by avoiding the need to write out the specific pro cedures in each document. ADEQ SOPs relating to QA shall be maintained by the appropriate Program office with technical support provided by the QA/QC Unit, as appropriate. SOPs common to Programs can be found as attachments with URLs to their corresponding QAPrP. Tasks or functions that may be effectively addressed within a SOP

include:



##  Sampling network design;



##  Sampling site selection;



##  Sampling and analytical procedures;



##  Sample collection methods and devices, c ontainers, preservatives, holding times, handling and transportation methods;



##  Documentation and chain-of -custody procedures;



##  Calibration and maintenance of instruments and equipment;



##  Quality control procedures;



##  Data review, reduction, and validation;



##  Safety procedures;



##  Inspection and audit procedures.

ADEQ has established the following policies, pro cedures, and/or guidance for sample collection and analytical techniques. Thes e procedures, where relevant, appl y to all analytical data being generated for use by ADEQ. These procedures should be followed unless special exceptions have been requested and approve d, and/or deviations are outlined in a Program’s QAPrP. These
documents can be found in their entir ety as attachments to this QMP.



##  ADEQ Temperature/Preser vation Guidance Policy;



##  Substantive Policy 0154 Addressing Spike And Surrogate Recovery As They Relate To Matrix Effects In Water, Air, Sludge And Soil Matrices Policy ;



##  Substantive Policy 0170 Implementation Of EPA Met hod 5035 - Soil Preparation For EPA Method 8015B, 8021B and 8260B ;52 

##  Arizona Data Qualifiers.

The Arizona Data Qualifiers are revised peri odically with the consensus of the Arizona Environmental Laboratory Adviso ry Committee (ELAC). The most up to date version should be used when applying qualifiers to data a nd can be found on the ADHS and ADEQ websites.53 

## CHAPTER 9 QUALITY ASSESSMENT AND RESPONSE

This Chapter of the QMP describes how ADEQ will assess the effectiveness of its Quality Management System. ADEQ will use a variety of internal management and technical reviews, performance evaluations, and QA audits to ensu re that the procedur es in this QMP are implemented successfully. ADEQ will also utilize, as needed, independent reviews of the systems and procedures described in ADEQ’ s QMP by personnel from the EPA Region IX Quality Assurance Office. This chapter will al so describe ADEQ’s commitment to using the results of these evaluations to make any necessary operational adjustments to ADEQ’s data collection and analytical procedures, as well as to other aspects of the Quality Management System.

9.1 ANNUAL REVIEW OF THE QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN

The QA practices and procedures described in th e QMP will be assessed annually, and revised or updated by October 1 of each year by the ADEQ QA St eering Committee. As an integral part of the QA Steering Committee, ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit S upervisor is responsible for coordinating this assessment, arranging meetings of the QA St eering Committee to assist with the review, and for incorporating any recommended changes in to the QMP. Minor changes in the QMP proposed by the ADEQ Programs should be su bmitted in writing to the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor by June 30th of each year. Afte r approval by the QA/QC Steering committee, the QMP will be turned over to the Leadership Te am for updated signatures. A copy, for record keeping, will be sent to EPA Region IX. A major rewrite will take place every five y ears with approvals needed by ADEQ’s QA/QC Steering Committee, ADEQ’s Leadership Team , and final approval by EPA Region IX.

9.2 QUALITY AUDITS

ADEQ employs several QA assessment tools designe d to provide a better understanding of the components of, and basis for improving, the ADEQ Quality Management System. Internal (programmatic) and External QA audits are one of the principal tools for determining the effectiveness of the ADEQ QA/QC components. QA audit frequency and scheduling will vary with the type of review conducted. Specifics of frequency and type of review will be outlined in the individual Program QAPrPs. The following is a description of some of the evaluation tools:

9.2.1 Management System Reviews (MSRs)

An MSR is an independent assessment of a Program’s QA management practices and data collection procedures, and is generally perf ormed by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit with oversight privileges from the QA Steering Committee. The MSR will qualitatively assess a Program to determine if the ADEQ Quality Management System is adequate to ensure the quality of the Program’s data. MSRs address the effectivenes s of management controls in achieving and assuring data quality, the adequacy of resour ces and personnel devoted to QA functions, the effectiveness of training and assessments, and the applicability of data quality requirements.54 While MSRs can identify significant QA concerns and areas of needed improvement, they also point out noteworthy accomplishments.

ADEQ Program MSRs are generally conducted by an external party (typically the ADEQ QA/QC Unit) and focus on the Program's adherence to the approved Agency QMP, its Quality Assurance Program Plan, as well as the implemen tation of QA practices w ithin a single Program area. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit will attempt to c onduct an MSR for every major Agency Program (including the Northern and S outhern Regional Offices) once ev ery four years. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit’s MSRs focus on the overall struct ure and procedures for accomplishing the QA Program.

Most MSRs will examine the following elements:



##  An assessment of the overall effectiven ess of the QA management system, as measured by its adherence to the approved QMP;



##  Procedures for developing Data Quality Objectives (DQOs);



##  Procedures for developing and approving QAPrPs and QAPjPs;



##  The effectiveness of existing QAPrP guidance and QAPjPs;



##  Procedures for developing and approving SOPs;



##  Procedures, criteria, and schedul es for conducting QA audits;



##  Tracking systems for assuring that the QA Program is operating effectively, and

that corrective actions disclosed by QA audits have been taken;



##  Responsibilities and authorities of vari ous line managers, and QA personnel, for implementing the QA Program;



##  The degree of management support;



##  The level of financial and other reso urces committed to implementing the QA Program.

MSRs performed or arranged by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit will be conducted in accordance with

the Guidance on Assessing Quality Systems, March, 2003 , EPA QA/G-3. ADEQ may also make occasional use of independent, outside reviews of its quality assurance pr actices. When electing to use an outside source, the ADEQ QA/QC Un it Supervisor, in consultation with the QA Steering Committee and Division Director, will make arrangements for such a review by selecting an appropriate team of qualified reviewers (e.g. EP A Region IX). The goals and objectives of this type of review will be the sa me as if the assessment were conducted internally.

EPA QA Office has the authority and may, from time to time, audit ADEQ’s Quality System as part of its oversigh t responsibilities.

All MSRs will result in the producti on of a written report. A draft of this report is due within 30 days of the completion of the observation phase of the audit. The draft will be sent for comments to the Program’s senior management. Comments must be supplied by the Program’s55 senior management within 30 days of the receipt of the draft. Final reports are to be completed within 30 days of receipt of comments by the Program’s senior management

9.2.1.1 Review ADEQ Quality Assurance Programs

ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit, with oversight privileges from the QA Steering Committee, will conduct internal assessments of the individual ADEQ Qu ality Assurance Programs as described in the Agency QMP. All major data generating Progra ms within ADEQ will be reviewed every four years. These Programs include those listed in Chapter 1 of this document. These reviews will be authorized by the ADEQ Director and the result s of the evaluations will be transmitted to the ADEQ Division Director, in a wr itten memorandum, from the ADEQ QA Steering Committee. The reviews are intended to accomplish the following objectives:



##  Identify any data quality problems;



##  Identify benchmark practices that coul d be used in other Agency Programs;



##  Propose recommendations for resolving quality problems;



##  Confirm implementation and effectiveness of any recommended corrective

actions.

The reviewed Program will have 30 days to prepare a written response to the reviewer’s memorandum. If the evaluation report recomme nds corrective actions, the reviewed Program

should address these recommendations and incl ude a schedule for making any appropriate changes in its quality assurance procedures . These reviews will be used by the ADEQ Leadership team to gauge the effectiveness of the Agency QMP and of the Programs’ approaches to data quality management.

9.2.2 Technical Systems Audits (TSAs)

A Technical Systems Audit is conducted to assess the sampling and analytical quality control procedures used to generate environmenta l data. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit with oversight privileges from the QA Steering Committee will use TSAs to ev aluate laboratory and field procedures used by EPA, state pe rsonnel, and contractors. TSAs entail a comprehensive, on-site evaluation of the field equipment; sampling a nd analyses procedures ; documentation; data validation; and training procedures for coll ecting or processing environmental data. TSAs may be routinely planned by ADEQ’s QA/ QC Unit, specifically requested by ADEQ’s Project/Case Manager, or result from the findings of another audit or review. ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit Supervisor is responsible for assembling th e audit team. Results will be reported to the audited organization in the form of a written repo rt within 14 calendar days of the completion of the audit, or a mutually agr eed upon alternative. Written co mments by ADEQ’s Project/Case Manager must be supplied to ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit within 14 calendar days of receipt of the audit findings, or a mutually ag reed upon alternative. Copies of the TSA Audit Final Report will be stored in the project file and also with the ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit. Additional copies will be distributed as appropriate.

Both laboratory and field TSAs may be performed.56 9.2.2.1 Laboratory TSAs

TSAs will be conducted on the Arizona Department of Health Services State Laboratory, ADEQ contract laboratories, and cont ract laboratories of consulta nts and contractors who submit analytical data to ADEQ. TSAs may be conduc ted on other Federal agency laboratories that perform sample analysis under Interagency Agre ements with ADEQ. The primary goals of TSAs will be to review the laboratory organi zation, operation, and capabilities; determine the reliability of data; and note corrective action for any apparent deficiencies. Auditors for TSAs will be selected by the ADEQ QA Steering Committ ee based on their technical proficiency in the subject area. The designated auditors will be responsible for planning and conducting the audit, and reporting the findings to th e laboratory manager and to the ADEQ QA Steering Committee.

9.2.2.2 Field TSAs

Oversight of field operations is an important part of the quality assurance process, and the ADEQ QA/QC Unit, with oversight privileges fr om the QA Steering Committee, will conduct QA audits of field sampling activities, both for its own field operations, and on those contractors and other federal agencies that collect samples fo r Programs sponsored by EPA. ADEQ will specify frequency and procedures for conducting field TS As within specific Program areas. When QAPjPs are reviewed, and also during any MSRs or other QA audits, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor will determine the necessity of field TSAs.

9.3 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

Performance Evaluations (PEs) Samples are used to assess the ability of a laboratory, or field measurement system, to provide reliable data. PEs samples will be considered for laboratories providing analytical services, directly or indi rectly, for ADEQ and will be traceable, whenever possible, through the National Institute of St andards and Technology (NIST). The evaluation consists of providing a reference, "blind" or “double blind” sample , to the laboratory for analysis. A PE sample contains known concentrations of ch emical constituents, or pollutants, of interest and will normally be in the appropriate media (e .g., soil, water, air). The analytical results obtained by the laboratory are compared to the known concentrations of the chemical constituents contained in the PE sample(s), as a means of determin ing if the laboratory demonstrated its ability to properly identify, and quantify, pollutants w ithin established, or calculated, control limits.

PE samples will be scheduled at a frequency sp ecified by Program requirements, or on an asneeded basis depending on the laboratory and Pr ogram involved. Some national Programs, such as the Public Water Supply Supe rvision (PWSS) and National Po llutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Programs, have regularly-sche duled PE studies in which participation is mandatory for designated laboratories. For the PWSS Program, PE evaluations are required twice a year for all laboratories w ho wish to be certified for drinking water analysis. In addition, PE samples of specific parameters may be obtaine d from the appropriate EPA Office of Research Development laboratory or prepared commercially.57 All PE studies performed for ADEQ, whether re quired on a regular basis or performed on a one time basis, will be coordinated through or reque sted from the ADEQ QA/QC Unit or designee. For external projects requiring PEs, the Task/W ork Assignment, Task/Delivery Order, or similar document needs to outline the specific details of the Performance Evaluation so the associated

costs can be included in the c ontractor proposal. The result s of PEs provide a means for assessing overall data integrity, and may be used as criteria fo r selecting candidates for on-site

evaluations.

9.4 DATA QUALITY EVALUATIONS

Data quality requirements and evaluation methods are addressed in the ADEQ QMP and also in specific QAPjPs. The QMP describes the met hods by which data quality evaluations will be conducted and utilized, and how these evaluatio ns relate to Data Quality Objectives.

9.4.1 Data Quality Assessments (DQAs)

A Data Quality Assessment (DQA) refers to the pr ocess used to determine whether the quality of a given data set is adequate fo r its intended use. DQAs can be performed on all, or selected projects and/or data generation pr ocesses. The purpose of this t ype of evaluation is to determine whether the data collected are acceptable to the decision-maker or end user. Assessments generally take place at one of two points in the data generation process. First, as data are generated, aspects of the project such as su rveillance of field and laboratory operations, consistency of the data with MQOs, successful ly completing performance evaluation sample studies, and so forth, can be used to arrive as an assessment of whether the data are valid and acceptable. Rejected or questionable data cannot be used by ADEQ in its decision making, except in limited circumstances, su ch as a rough site screening.

Once data have been examined and assessed, an d they are found to be of known and acceptable quality, then the results can be evaluated in the context of the Data Quality Objectives for the project. In some, but all, cases, this may invol ve a statistical evaluati on such as null hypothesis testing. In others in may invol ve a comparison to regulatory acti on levels. An assessment must

also be made as to whether there is a sufficien t quantity of data to s upport program or project decisions, and whether the original sampling desi gn was appropriate. In some cases, the data may suggest that additional data are required to achieve a higher statistical confidence level. This could be because too many data points were invalidated, that samples were not collected over a long enough time period, or that a vital sampling area not prev iously considered important, was missed. In other cases, an assessmen t might show that data of a different type are required, or that the sensitivity of the instrument used in the measurement was not adequate to meet project objectives. Thus, both types of asse ssments are vital to the successful completion of a project.

If necessary, ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit can review da ta generated by the ADHS State Laboratory, and by contract laboratories, for the various ADE Q Programs. These data review activities use checklists, standard operating pro cedures, and standardized qualif ication codes to indicate data quality. The use of checklists and SOPs help st andardize the data review process. The extent58 and level of verification for indi vidual data sets should clearl y be defined in the Program’s QAPrP and/or QAPjP.

9.4.2 Data Quality Audits

A related evaluation tool involving data review and assessment is th e data quality audit which is

used to evaluate the documentati on of the quality of data genera ted for a given project. This assessment primarily involves an evaluation of th e completeness of the documentation of field and analytical procedures and qua lity control results, and usually involves tracing the paper trail accompanying the data from sample collection and custody to analytical results and entry into a database. This technique is commonly used to verify the process i nvolved in entering data residing in large re gulatory databases.

Results of both DQAs and data quality audits can be used in a number of ways. First, they can be used in making recommendations for change s in the design and performance of data collection efforts, and in the use and documenta tion of QC procedures. Secondly, they can be used as a guide for the planning and acquisiti on of supplemental data for the project and potentially for other related pr ojects. Problems identified th rough DQAs may trigger the need for an MSR to determine management deficienci es, or a TSA to identify technical problems.59 

## CHAPTER 10 QUALITY IMPROVEMENT

The ADEQ Leadership Team actively supports quality improvement by encouraging the ADEQ

staff to:



##  Continually evaluate the effectiveness of current policies, procedures, and practices via discussions of the QA/QC Steering committee and subsequent leadership review;



##  Apply innovative approaches while main taining integrity and accuracy. Conduct regular management reviews to define and celebrate success while recognizing and eliminating undesirabl e processes or results.

The above goals are achieved by continually co mmitting resources to the Agency’s quality management efforts. Peer review and performanc e audits will enable th e constant evaluation of ADEQ Programs, projects, and individual staff performance. The ADEQ Quality Management System is designed to identify opportunities for improving the measurement process. Improvement can take the form of preventi ng quality problems from occurring by adjusting current work processes, or by seeking out bett er ways to do the work. The ADEQ Integrated Quality Management process seeks to prevent quality problems from occurring, recognize challenges early, and celebrate success.

Continual improvement is achieved through consis tent evaluations of Program, project, and individual performances. Regular oversight allows ADEQ to reshape Program protocols to reflect changing methods or procedures.

10.1 PROGRAM REVIEWS

It is the responsibility of line management to a ssure staff participation in all Program reviews and to review annually all QA activities of their st aff, to determine that SOPs are in place and to revise them if necessary, to en sure that QAPrPs are written and approved in advance of project start-up, and to ensure that data quality assessments are made. A ll deviations and discrepancies noted during any independent or self-assessment review will be corrected promptly. Recommendations for modifications to the QM P will be forwarded in writing to the ADEQ QA/QC Steering Committee for implementation and inclusion during regula r review sessions, as

described in section 9.2.1.60 10.2 PROJECT REVIEWS

It is the responsibility of Project/Case Managers to request project review s and/or QA audits and to identify where improvements can be made. This process is started during the determination of data quality objectives and is finalized during the assessment of data quality. All corrective actions required during the life cycle of the project are to be filed in the official project file or with the project’s final report. Project team debr iefing is a regular component of project closeout. All data collection and testing pr ocedures are to be scrutinized for consistency within industry best practices.

The evaluation can include the findings resulting from scientific scrutiny (new technologies) or analytical measurements. The team will prepare a written report of its findings, for Division Management and the Agency Leadership Team, along with recommendations for improvement. The Leadership Team may choose to solicit other recommendations for improvement from persons not directly involved with the project. The ADEQ Leadership Team will decide which recommendations to implement in future projects.61 

# TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

Acceptable Quality Level - a limit above which quality is considered satisfactory and below which it is not. In sampling inspection, the maximum percentage of defects or failures that can be considered satisfactory as an average.

Accuracy - the degree of agreement between an obser ved value and an accepted reference value; a data quality indicator

.

Activity - an all-inclusive term describing a specific set of operations or related tasks to be performed, either serially or in parallel (e.g., research and development, field sampling, analytical operations, equipment fabrication), th at in total result in a product or service.

Assessment - the evaluation process us ed to measure the performance or effectiveness of a system and its elements. In this document, assessm ent is an all-inclusive term used to denote any of the following: audit, performance evaluati on, management systems review, peer review, inspection or surveillance.

Audit - a planned and documented investigative ev aluation of an item or process to determine the adequacy and effectiveness, as well as comp liance with established pr ocedures, instructions, drawings, quality assurance project pl ans, and other applicable documents.

Audit of Data Quality - a qualitative and quantitative ev aluation of the documentation and procedures associated with envir onmental measurements to verify that the resulting data are of acceptable quality.

Bias - the systematic or persistent distortion of a measurement process which causes errors in one direction; a data quality indicator.

Characteristic - any property or attribute of a datum, item, process, or service that is distinct, describable, and measurable.

Comparability - the degree to which different methods, da ta sets and/or decisions agree or can be represented as similar; a data quality indicator

Completeness - the amount of valid data obtained co mpared to the planned amount, and usually expressed as a percentage; a data quality indicator.

Computer Program - a sequence of instructions suita ble for processing by a computer. Processing may include the use of an assembler, a compiler, an interpreter, or a translator to prepare the program for execution. A computer pr ogram may be stored on magnetic media, and be referred to as "software", or may be stored permanently on computer chips, and be referred to as "firmware". Computer programs covered by this document are those used for design analysis,62 data acquisition, data reduction, data storage (data bases), operation or control, and data base or document control registers when used as th e controlled source of quality information.

Contractor - any organization or indivi dual that contracts to furn ish services or items or perform work.

Corrective Action - measures taken to rectify cond itions adverse to quality and, where necessary, to preclude their recurrence.

Criteria - a standard on which judgment is based.

Customer - any individual or organi zation for whom items or services are furnished or work performed in response to defined requirements and expectations.

Data - facts or figures from which conclusions can be inferred.

Data Base - a collection of integrated data that ca n be used for a variety of applications.

Data of Known Quality - data are of known quality when the qualitative and quantitative components associated with their derivation are documented appropriately for their intended use

and such documentation is verifiable and defensible.

Data Quality Assessment (DQA) - a process for performing stat istical analysis to determine whether the quality of a data set is adequate for its intended use.

Data Quality Indicators - qualitative statistics and quantita tive descriptors that are used to interpret the degree of acceptability or utility of data to the user. The principal data quality indicators are bias, precision, accuracy, comparability, complete ness, representativeness, and sensitivity.

Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) - qualitative and quantitative st atements of the overall level of uncertainty that a decision-maker is willing to accept in results or decisions derived from environmental data. DQOs provide the statis tical framework for planning and managing environmental data operations consiste nt with the data user's needs.

Data Usability - the process of ensuring or determining whether the quality of the data produced

meets the intended use of the data.

Defensible - the ability to withstand any reasonable cha llenge related to the veracity of integrity of laboratory documents and derived data.

Design Review - a documented evaluation by a team, incl uding personnel other than the original designers, the responsible designers, the customer for the work or product being designed, and a quality assurance representative to determine if a proposed design will meet the established design criteria and perform as expected when implemented.63 Electronic Data Deliverable (EDD ) – an electronic file containi ng data sorted into specific fields for different data constituents. Designed to be uploaded into data bases for overall data management without additional manual input of data.

Engineered Environmental Systems - an all-inclusive term used to describe pollution control devices and systems, waste trea tment processes and storage facilities, and site remediation technologies and their components that may be u tilized to remove pollutants or contaminants from the environment. Examples include wet sc rubbers (air), soil washing (soil), granulated activated carbon unit (water), a nd filtration (air, water). Usually, this term will apply to hardware-based systems; however, it will also appl y to methods or techniques used for pollutant

reduction or containment of cont amination to prevent further m ovement of the contaminants, such as capping, solidification or vi trification, and bi ological treatment.

Environmental Conditions - the description of a physical medium (e.g., air, water, soil, sediment) or biological system expressed in terms of its physical, chemical, or biological

characteristics.

Environmental Data - any information or measurements resulting from field data collection activity, laboratory analyses or modeling invol ving the assessment of chemical, physical, or biological factors related to the environment, and that describe environmental processes or conditions, or the performance of en gineered environmental systems.

Environmental Data Operations - work performed to obtain, use, or report information pertaining to environmenta l processes and conditions.

Environmental Monitoring - the process of measuring or collecting environmental data.

Environmental Processes - manufactured or natural processes that produce discharges to or impact the ambient environment.

Environmental Programs - generally considered a regulator y activity that results from the implementation of an act of Congress or other legislative body (e.g., a st ate). The duration of a Program is usually legally seven years, (subjec t to renewal by the legislative body at various intervals), and is effectively c ontinuous. Measurements are usually the same from year to year and take place on a recurring basis, e.g., quarterly monitoring for water or air pollutants, site assessments for Superfund, etc. Although the locati ons, parameters, and nature of measurements may change, the overall goal, which is to compar e data to a regulatory standard, is generally constant. The Clean Water Act, Resource Conserva tion and Recovery Act, Clean Air Act, etc. are examples of Programs, although not all data generation activities funded under these laws would necessarily be considered Program data if they fall into the project category (see below). A Program requires a QMP , describing its QA System, a nd usually a Program QAPP (QA Program Plan) to describe in detail the process by which Program data are obtained. In this document, an environmental Program also refe rs to functional areas of work performed by groups or teams of people within the ADEQ organization.64 Environmental Project - is defined as a data gathering activit y that usually is of a finite length. Project data quality objectives are established during the planning phase and an assessment is made at the completion to determine whether th e data quality objectives were met. Projects may include monitoring, but the data collected are freq uently not intended for the use in enforcement of a regulatory standard. A tria l burn, testing a new technology, a one-time ecosystem assesment and a habitat inventory are but a few examples of environmental projects. An environmental project requires a Quality Assu rance Project Plan (QAPjP).

Environmentally Related Measurements - any measurement or information that describes environmental processes or conditions, or the perf ormance of engineered environmental systems. Thus, environmental data include all chemical, physical, or biological measurements relating to the environment; however, it does not include demographic or financial data. In addition,

environmental data includes both direct measur ements of environmental conditions and data

collected from other sources such as literature, industry surv eys, computerized databases, historical data, and mathematical models. Data from such sources are often called secondary

data.

External Oversight - a term used to convey related ac tivities performed for EPA by ADEQ; usually performed under contracts, grants, or co operative agreements. Used in reference to Quality Assurance Project Plans a nd the Quality Management Plan.

Financial Assistance - the process by which funds are provided by one organization (usually government) to another organization for the purpose of performing work or furnishing services

or items. Financial assistance mechanisms include grants, cooperative agreements, and government interagency agreements.

Graded Approach - the process of basing the level of app lication of managerial controls applied to an item or work according to the intended use of results and the degree of confidence needed in the quality of the results.

Hazardous Waste - any waste material that satisfies the definition of "hazardous waste" as given in 40 CFR Part 261, "Identifica tion and Listing of Hazardous Waste".

Independent Assessment - an assessment performed by a qualified individual, group, or organization that is not a part of the organization directly performing and accountable for the work being assessed.

Inspection - an examination or measurement of an item or activity to verify conformance to specific requirements.

Internal Activities - a term used to describe the ac tivities performed by ADEQ employees; usually used in relationship to Quality Assurance Project Plans, the QMP, contracts, or grants.

Item - an all-inclusive term used in place of th e following: appurtenance, facility, sample assembly, component, equipment, material, modul e, part, product, structure, subassembly, subsystem, system, unit, documented concepts, or data.65 Leadership Team - that group of ADEQ Management asse mbled and under the direction of the ADEQ Director. The Leadership Team consists of the following members: ADEQ Director; ADEQ Deputy Director; Waste, Wate r, Air and Administrative Dire ctors; Northern and Southern Regional Directors; Communications O fficer; and ADEQ Administrative Council.

Management - those individuals di rectly responsible and accountable for planning, implementing, and assessing work.

Management System - a structured non-technical system describing the policies, objectives, principles, organizational authority, responsibilit ies, accountability, and implementation plan of an organization for conducting work and producing items and services.

Management System Review (MSR) - the qualitative assessment of a data collection operation and/or organization(s) to establish whether the prevailing qualit y management structure, policies, practices, and procedures are ade quate for ensuring that the type and quality of data needed are

obtained.

Measurement Quality Ob jectives (MQOs) - Performance or acceptance criteria for individual data quality indicators, usually including precision, bias, sensitivity, completeness, comparability, and representativeness.

Method - a body of procedures and techniques fo r performing an activity (e.g., sampling, chemical analysis, quantification) systematically presented in the order in which they are to be

executed.

Mixed Waste - hazardous waste material, as define d by 40 CFR part 261 (RCRA), mixed with

radioactive constituents.

Peer Review - a documented critical review of work characterized by the existence of potential uncertainty. The peer review is conducted by qua lified individuals (or organization) who are independent of those who performed the work, but are collectively equivalent in technical expertise (i.e., peers) to those who performed the original work. The peer review is conducted to

ensure that activities are tec hnically adequate, competently performed, properly documented, and satisfy established technical and quality requirements. The peer re view is an in-depth assessment of the assumptions, calculations, extrapol ations, alternate interpretations, methodology, acceptance criteria, and conclusions pertaining to specific work and of the documentation that supports them. Peer reviews provi de an evaluation of a subject where quan titative methods of analysis or measures of succe ss are unavailable or undefined, such as in research and development.

Performance Evaluation Audit - a type of audit in which the quantitative data generated in a measurement system are obtained independently a nd compared with routinely obtained data to evaluate the proficiency of an analyst or laboratory.66 Performance Evaluation Sample

- (PE) a sample, the composition of which is unknown to the analyst, is provided to test wh ether the analyst/laboratory can produce analytical results within the specified performance limits.

Procedure - a documented set of steps or actions that systematically specif ies or describes how an activity is to be performed.

Process - an orderly system of acti ons that are intended to achie ve a desired end or result. Examples of processes include analysis, desi gn, data collection, opera tion, fabrication, and

calculation.

Qualified Data - any data that have been reviewed and assessed as part of data validation, or data verification, operations.

Quality - the sum of features and properties/characteris tics of a process, item, or service that bears on its ability to meet the stated needs and expectations of the user.

Quality Assurance (QA) - an integrated system of mana gement activities involving planning, implementation, assessment, reporting, and quality improvement to ensure that a process, item, or service is of the type and quality needed and expected by the customer.

Quality Staff - the EPA Headquarters office within th e Office of Environmental Information that establishes and promulgates Quality Assura nce Policy for the Agency. Formerly the Quality Assurance Management Staff (QAMS).

Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPjP) - a formal document describing in comprehensive detail the necessary QA, QC, and other manage rial and technical activ ities that must be implemented to ensure that the results of the wo rk performed will satisfy the stated performance (data quality) objectives.

Quality Assurance Program Plan (QAPrP) – a formal document that describes the QA system for environmental Programs such as the Clean Wate r Act or Clean Air Act that is usually based on environmental regulations. It contains details like a QA Proj ect Plan, but at a organization wide or Program level and can function as a QA Project Plan or it may contain broader spectrum procedures that require additional QA Project Plans with more specific details.

Quality Control (QC) - the overall system of technical activiti es that measures the attributes and performance of a process, item, or service against defined standards to verify that they meet the stated requirements established by the customer.

Quality Improvement - a management Program for improving the quality of operations. Such management Programs generally entail a fo rmal mechanism for encouraging worker recommendations with timely management evaluation and feedback or implementation

Quality Management - that aspect of the overall manage ment system of the organization that determines and implements the quality policy. Quality management includes strategic planning,67 allocation of resources, and other systema tic activities (e.g., planning, implementation, and assessment) pertaining to the quality system.

Quality Management Plan (QMP) - a formal document that describes the quality system in terms of the organizational structure, functional re sponsibilities of management and staff, lines of authority, and required interfaces for those planning, implementing, and assessing all QA

activities conducted.

Quality System - a structured and documented manage ment system describing the policies, objectives, principles, organizational author ity, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation plan of an organization for ensu ring quality in its work processes, products (items), and services. The quality system pr ovides the framework for planning, implementing, and assessing work performed by the organiza tion and for carrying out required QA and QC procedures.

Readiness Review - a systematic, documented review of the readiness for the startup or continued use of a facility, process, or activity. Readiness reviews are t ypically conducted before proceeding beyond project milestones and prior to initiation of a major phase of work.

Remediation - the process of reducing th e concentration of a contam inant (or contaminants) in air, water, or soil media to a level that poses an acceptable risk to human health.

Self-Assessment - an assessment of work conducted by in dividuals, groups, or organizations directly responsible for overse eing and/or performing the work.

Sensitivity - - The capability of the measuring instrument to discriminate between the analytical response (e.g., absorbance, volume, meter reading) and background. In a specialized sense, it has the same meaning as the detection limit.

Service - the category of economic activity that does not produce manufactured items. In environmental data operations or engineering projects, such ac tivities include design, inspection, laboratory and/or field analys is, repair, and installation.

Significant Condition - any state, status, incident, or situ ation of an environmental process or condition of an engineered environmental system in which the work being performed will be adversely affected in a manner sufficiently seri ous to require corrective action to satisfy quality objectives or specifications and safety requirements.

Software Life Cycle - the period of time that starts when a software product is conceived and ends when the software product is no longer available for routin e use. The software life cycle typically includes a requirements phase, a design phase, an implementation phase, a test phase, an installation and check-out phase, an opera tion and maintenance phase, and sometimes a retirement phase.

Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) - a written document that details the method for an operation, analysis, or action with thoroughly pres cribed techniques and steps, and that is officially approved as the method for perfor ming certain routine or repetitive tasks.68 Supplier - any individual or organi zation furnishing items or services or performing work according to a procurement document or financial assi stance agreement. This is an all-inclusive term used in place of any of the following: vendor , seller, contractor, subc ontractor, fabricator, or

consultant.

Surveillance - the act of monitoring or observing a pro cess or activity to verify conformance to specified requirements.

Technical Review - a documented critical review of work that has been performed. The review is accomplished by one or more qualified revi ewers who are independent of those who performed the work, but are collectively equiva lent in technical expertise to those who performed the original work. The reviews are an in-depth analysis and evaluation of documents, activities, material, data, or items that re quire technical verifica tion or validation for applicability, correctness, adequ acy, completeness, and assurance that established requirements

are satisfied.

Technical Systems Audit (TSA) - a thorough, systematic, on-site qua litative audit of facilities, equipment, personnel, training procedures, reco rd keeping, data validation, data management, and reporting aspects of a system.

Validation - an activity that demonstrates or confirms that a process, item, data set, or service satisfies the requirements defined by the user.

Verification - the act of authenticating or formally asse rting the truth that a process, item, data set, or service is, in fa ct, that which is claimed.69 

## APPENDICES

ADEQ Temperature/Preservation Guidance Policy

ADEQ Policy 0154 - Addressing Spike and Surrogate Recovery As They Relate to Matrix Effects in Water, Air, Sludge, and Soil Matrices

ADEQ Policy 0170 – Implementation of EPA Method 5035 - Soil Preparation for EPA Methods 8015B, 8021B, and 8260B

Arizona Data Qualifiers – Revision 3 (0 9/20/2007)Attachment K

PCWRL Quality Manual**Thi s is a Controlled Document. Unless numbered, any copy of this Manual** 

**appearing in paper form is not controlled and should be checked against the server file version prior to use.**  **Copy # Given to:** 

5

- 12

- 12 1 of 74

COMPLIANCE AND REGULATORY AFFAIRS OFFICE

Water & Energy Sustainability Center 3035 W El Camino del Cerro, Tucson, AZ 85743 Telephone: (520) 724

- 6200 Fax: (520) 724

- 6071

**L L**  **A A**  **B B**  **O O**  **R R**  **A A**  **T T**  **O O**  **R R**  **Y Y**  **S S**  **E E**  **R R**  **V V**  **I I**  **I C**  **C E**  **E S**  **S**

**QUALITY MANUAL**5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 2 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 3 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**Section 2.0 Table of Contents**

**PAGE**

Section 2.0 Table of Contents

................................ ................................ ......................... 3
SECTION 3 INTRODUCTION & SCOPE

................................ ................................ ........ 5

3.1 Scope of Testing

................................ ................................ ............................ 5

3.2 Table of Contents, References and Appendices

................................ ........... 5

3.3 Glossary and Acronyms Used

................................ ................................ ........ 7
SECTION 4 ORGANIZATIONAL ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

............................. 9

4.1 Laboratory Organiz ational Structure

................................ .............................. 9

4.2 Responsibility and Authority

................................ ................................ ........... 9
SECTION 5

- QUALITY SYSTEMS

................................ ................................ ................ 12

5.1. Quality System Policy

................................ ................................ ................... 13

5.2. Standard Oper ating Procedures

................................ ................................ ... 14
SECTION 6

- DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT

................................ ................................ .. 14

6.1 Controlled Documents

................................ ................................ ................... 14

6.2 Obsolete Documents

................................ ................................ ..................... 16

6.3 Standard Operating Proce dures

................................ ................................ .... 16
SECTION 7

– REVIEW OF REQUESTS, TENDERS AND CONTRACTS

.................... 18

7.1 Procedure for the Review of Work Requests

................................ ................ 18

7.2 Documentation of Review

................................ ................................ ............. 19
SECTION 8

– SUBCONTRACTING OF TESTS

................................ ........................... 20
SECTION 9

– PURCHASING SERVICES AND SUPPLIES

................................ ......... 21
SECTION 10

– SERVICE TO THE CLIENT

................................ ................................ .. 22

10.1 Client Confidentiality

................................ ................................ ..................... 22
SECTION 11

– COMPLAINTS

................................ ................................ ...................... 22
SECTION 12

– CO NTROL OF NON

- CONFORMING WORK

................................ ....... 23
SECTION 13

– CORRECTIVE ACTION

................................ ................................ ....... 24

13.1 Selection and Implemen tation of Corrective Actions

................................ ..... 24

13.2 Monitoring of Corrective Action

................................ ................................ ..... 24

13.3 Technical Corrective Action

................................ ................................ ........... 25

13.4 Exceptionally Permitting Departures from Documented P olicies and

Procedures

................................ ................................ ................................ ................ 25
SECTION 14

– PREVENTIVE ACTION

................................ ................................ ........ 27
SECTION 15

– CONTROL OF RECORDS

................................ ................................ ... 28

15.1 Records Management and Storage

................................ .............................. 28

15 .2 Legal Chain of Custody Records

................................ ................................ ... 29
SECTION 16

– AUDITS AND MANAGEMENT REVIEW

................................ .............. 30

16.1 Internal Audits

................................ ................................ ............................... 30

16.2 External Audits

................................ ................................ .............................. 30

16.3 P erformance Audits

................................ ................................ ....................... 31

16.4 System Audits and Management Reviews

................................ .................... 31
SECTION 17

– PERSONNEL, TRAINING, AND DATA INTEGRITY

............................ 3 3

17.1 Job Descriptions

-

................................ ................................ .......................... 33

17.2 Data Integrity and Ethics

................................ ................................ ............... 335

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 4 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

17.3 Data Integrity and Ethics Training

................................ ................................ . 34

17.4 General Training

................................ ................................ ........................... 34
SECTION 18

– ACCOMMODATIONS & ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIO NS

................ 36
SECTION 19

– TEST METHODS AND METHOD VALIDATION

................................ .. 37

19.1 Demonstration of Capability (DOC)

................................ ............................... 37

19.2 On

- Going (or Continued) Proficiency

................................ ............................ 37

19.3 Initial Test Method Evaluation

................................ ................................ ....... 37

19.4 Estimation of Uncertainty

................................ ................................ .............. 39

19.5 Laboratory

- Developed or Non

- Standard Method Validation

.......................... 39

19.6 Control of Data

................................ ................................ .............................. 40
SECTION 20

– EQUIPMENT

................................ ................................ ........................ 42

20.1 General Equipment Requirements

................................ ................................ 42

20.2 Support Equipment

................................ ................................ ....................... 44

20.3 Analytical Equipment

................................ ................................ ..................... 49
SECTION 21

– MEASUREMENT TRACEABILITY

................................ ....................... 56

21.1 Reference Standards

................................ ................................ .................... 56

21.2 Reference Materials

................................ ................................ ...................... 57

21.3 Transport and Storage of Reference Standards and Materials

..................... 57

21.4 Labeling of Reference Standards, Reagents, and Materials

......................... 57
SECTION 22

– SAMPLE MANAGEMENT

................................ ................................ .... 59

22.1 Sample Receipt

................................ ................................ ............................. 59

22.2 Sample Acceptance

................................ ................................ ...................... 59

22.3 Sample Identification

................................ ................................ ..................... 60

22.4 Sample Storage

................................ ................................ ............................ 61

22.5 Sample Disposal

................................ ................................ ........................... 61

22.6 Sample Transport

................................ ................................ .......................... 62

22.7 Sampling Records

................................ ................................ ......................... 62
SECTION 23

– QUALITY OF TEST RESULTS

................................ ............................. 63

23.1 Essential Quality Control Procedures

................................ ............................ 63

23.2 Internal Quality Control Prac tices

................................ ................................ .. 64

23.3 Method Blanks

................................ ................................ .............................. 68

23.4 Laboratory Control Samples

................................ ................................ .......... 69

23.5 Matrix Spikes and Matrix Spike Duplicates

................................ ................... 69

23.6 Surrogate Spike s

................................ ................................ ........................... 70

23.7 Proficiency Test Samples or Interlaboratory Comparisons

............................ 70

23.8 Data Review

................................ ................................ ................................ .. 71
SECTION 24

– REPORTING OF RESULTS

................................ ................................ . 72

24.1 Test Reports

................................ ................................ ................................ .. 72

24.2 Supplemental Test Report Information

................................ .......................... 73

24.3 Environmental Testing Obtained from Subcontractors

................................ .. 74

24.4 Electronic Transmission of Results

................................ ............................... 74

24.5 Amendments to Test Reports

................................ ................................ ........ 74

See 3.2 for List of Appendices.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 5 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 3 INTRODUCTION & SCOPE** The purpose of this Quality Manual is to outline the quality system for the Pima County RWRD Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Office ( CRAO ) laboratory. The Quality

Manual defines the policies, procedures, and documentation that assure analytical services continually meet a defined standard of quality that is designed to provide clients with scientifically valid and legally defensible data of known and documented quality and, where applicable, demonstrate regulatory compliance.

**Policy**

The Quality Manual sets the standard under which all laboratory operations are performed including the laboratory's orga nization, objectives, and operating philosophy

.

**3.1 Scope of Testing**  The laboratory scope of analytical testing services includes those listed in Appendix M

- Laboratory License and in Appendix E

- Listing of CRAO Laboratory SOPs.

**3.2 Table of Conte**  **nts, References and Appendices**

3.2.1. Appendices

This Quality Manual uses the references included in Modules 1

- 7 in the 2009 TNI Environmental Laboratory Sector Standard

– Volume 1

– Management and Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Env ironmental Analysis. For additional references please refer to the following appendices. Appendices

 Appendix A

– WESC CRAO Lab oratory Floor Plan

 Appendix B

- Obsolete

 Appendix C

– WESC CRAO Laboratory Organizational Chart

 Appendix D

- Example of Fin al Lab Reports

 Appendix E

- Listing of CRAO Laboratory SOPs

 Appendix F

- Equipment Inventory Organic Chemistry

 Appendix G

- Equipment Inventory Inorganic Chemistry

 Appendix H

- Equipment Inventory QA Unit

 Appendix I

- Equipment Inventory Microbiolog y/Wet Chemistry

 Appendix J

- Preservation and Holding Times Table

 Appendix K

- Laboratory Glossary and Acronyms

 Appendix L

- Laboratory Employee Signature/Initial Identification Form

 Appendix M

- Laboratory License

 Appendix N

- Document Schedule

 Appendix O

- L ist of Forms and Checklists

 Appendix P

- List of QM changes

 Appendix Q

- Arizona Administrative Code for Licensing of Environmental

Laboratories R9

- 14

- 601 et seq

.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 6 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

3.2.2. References

This Quality Manual uses the references included in Modules 1

- 7 in the 20 09 TNI Environmental Laboratory Sector Standard

– Volume 1

– Management and Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis as well as the references listed in the Arizona Administrative Code for Licensing of

Environmental Laborat ories R9

- 14

- 601 et. seq. (Appendix Q).

This Quality Manual uses the references from the EL

- VI

- 2009 TNI Standard.
Test Method References: References to all analytical procedures in use are maintained in the CRAO Lab are located in the Unit Supervisor Offi ce, the Quality Assurance officer's (QAO) office, or online. The QAO is responsible for maintaining the currency of all references used to write SOPs. All compliance samples tested by the CRAO Lab must follow SOPs derived from EPA approved methods as app ropriate to the sample matrix. The following references contain approved methods for compliance testing performed by the CRAO Lab:

 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.01 and 11.02, Water and Environmental Technology, American Society for Testing and Mat erials, Philadelphia, PA. 1992.

 Hach Water Analysis Handbook , 3 rd Edition, Hach Company, P.O. Box 389, Loveland, CO, 1997

 Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water: Criteria and Procedures Quality Assurance , 5th Edition, U.S. E nvironmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH. Jan. 2005. EPA815

- R

- 05

- 004.

 Supplement to the Fifth Edition of the Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water , 5th Edition, U.S. Env ironmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH. June 2008. EPA 815

- F

- 08

- 006.

 Method 1664, Rev A, N

- Hexane Extractable Material (HEM; Oil and Grease)
and Silica Gel Treated N

- Hexane Extractable Material (SGT

- HE M; Non

- polar Material) by Extraction and Gravimetry , U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH.

, Feb 1999 EPA 821/R

- 98/002.

 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes , U.S. Environmental

Pr otection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, revised March 1983. (EPA 600/4

- 79

- 020).

 Methods for Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples , U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monit oring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, Aug 1993, EPA 600/R

- 93/100.

 Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and Industrial

Wastewater , U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, J uly 1982. (EPA 600/4

- 82

- 057). http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater , 19th Edition, APHA

- AWWA

- WPCF, 1995.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 7 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20th Edition,

APHA

- AWWA

- WPCF, 1 998.

 Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, EPA, Pub. No. SW

- 846, Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods (3rd ed. 1986) , as amended by Update I, July 1992; Update IIA, August 1993; Update II, September 1994; Update IIB, J anuary 1995; Update III, December 1996; Update IIIA, June 1999; and Update IIIB, July 2005, available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161, and at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/main.htm.

 Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 136 app. A (July 2005), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr

- table

- search.html.

 Handbook of Environmental Analysis, Roy

- Keith Smith, Genium Publishing Corporation, 1993. (Definitions)

 EPA 821/R

- 02/013 for Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing (WETT testing).

**3.3 Glossary**  **and Acronyms Used**  Quality control terms are generally defined within the section that describes the activity. Glossary

For acronyms and definitions not covered here, please refer to A ppendix K.

Acronyms

A list of acronyms used in this document and their definitions are:

AA

– Accrediting Authority
ADHS

- Arizona Department of Health
ANSI

– American National Standards Institute
ASQC

– American Society for Quality Control
ASTM

– Americ an Society for Testing and Materials

Blk

– Blank

BKD

- Breakdown Check Standard, particular to pesticides
°C

– degrees Celsius
Cal

– calibration
CAL

- Calibration Standard
CAS

– Chemical Abstract Service
CCB

- Continuing Calibration Blank
CCV

– Continuin g calibration verification
COC

– Chain of custody
CRL

- MRL

- Level Calibration Verification
DO

– Dissolved oxygen
DOC

– Demonstration of Capability

EPA

– Environmental Protection Agency5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 8 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

g/L

– grams per liter
GC/MS

– gas chromatography/mass spectrometry
HCV

- High

- Level Calibration Verification

IBL

- Instrument Blank
ICB

- Initial Calibration Blank

ICP

- MS

– inductively coupled plasma

- mass spectrometry
ICV

– Initial calibration verification

IFA

- Interference Check Standard A

IFB

- Interference Check Standar d B
ISO/IEC

– International Organization for Standardization/International

Electrochemical Commission
lb/in2

– pound per square inch
LCS

– Laboratory control sample

LFB

– Laboratory fortified blank

MDL

– method detection limit mg/Kg

– milligrams per kilo gram mg/L

– milligrams per liter
MS

– matrix spike
MSD

– matrix spike duplicate

NELAP

– National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program
NIST

– National Institute of Standards and Technology

PEM

- Performance Evaluation Mixture

PT

– Proficiency Tes t(ing)
PTOB

– Proficiency Testing Oversight Body

PTPA

– Proficiency Testing Provider Accreditor
QA

– Quality Assurance
QC

– Quality Control
QM

– Quality Manual
QAM

– Quality Assurance Manager

RL

– Reporting level

RPD

– Relative percent difference
RSD

– Re lative standard deviation
SCV

- Second Source Calibration Verification
SOPs

– Standard operating procedures spk

– spike
SRD

- Serial Dilution
SRM

– Standard Reference Material

std

– standard

TNI

- The NELAC institute

TUN

- MS Tune ug/L

– micrograms per l iter ug/m 3

– micrograms per cubic meter

UV

– Ultraviolet
VOC

– Volatile organic compound5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 9 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

WETT

– Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing

**SECTION 4 ORGANIZATIONAL ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES Policy**  The laboratory is a legally identifiable organization. Through ap plication of the policies and procedures outlined in this chapter, the laboratory assures that it is impartial and that personnel are free from undue commercial, financial, or other undue pressures that might influence their technical judgment. The laborat ory is responsible for carrying out testing activities that meet the requirements of the

EL

- VI

- 2009 TNI Standard and that meet the needs of the client.

**4.1 Laboratory Organizational Structure**  **Policy** The organizational structure indicated minimizes the potential for conflicting or undue interests that might influence the technical judgment of analytical personnel.

The CRAO Lab is managed by the Pima County Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Office of Regional Wastewater Reclamation Department (RWRD). The CRAO Lab operates under the Arizona Lab License number AZO159 and the EPA labcode AZ00009. The CRAO Lab operates in Pima County, Arizona and provides analytical services to (1) all Pima County owned and operated wastewater reclamation facilities (WRF), (2) Pima County Regional Wastewater Reclamation's CRAO Industrial Wastewater Control (IWC), (3) CRAO Water Quality, (4) Pima County Departments of Transportation, Environmental Quality, and Natural Resources, Parks and Recreation (5) governmental/private organizations outside of Pima County government. The CRAO Laboratory is located in the Water & Energy Sustainability Center (WESC) at 3035 W El Camino del Cerro, Tucson, Arizona 85745. Please reference Appendices A & B for location maps and Appendix C for the Organization Chart.

**4.2 Responsibility and Authority**  Management includes the Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Project Manager, Laboratory Director , Inorganic Chemist Specialist, Organic Chemist Specialist, Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Chemist Specia list, WETT Chemist Specialist, and the Quality Assurance Officer

.

**Policy** Management has overall responsibility for the technical operations and authority needed to generate the required quality of laboratory operations.

**Policy**5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 10 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Management ensures technical competence of personnel operating equipment, performing tests, evaluating results, or signing reports, and limits authority to perform laboratory functions to those appropriately trained and/or supervised.

**PROCEDURE** The assignment of responsibi lities, authorities, and interrelationships of the personnel who manage, perform, or verify work affecting the quality of

environmental tests is documented in the Quality Manual section 4.2.1.

Management bears specific responsibility for maintenance of t he Quality System. This includes defining roles and responsibilities to personnel, approving documents, providing required training, providing a procedure for confidential reporting of data integrity issues, and periodically reviewing data, procedures,

and documentation.

Management ensures that audit findings and corrective actions are completed within required time frames.

For any member of the CRAO Staff, should that staff member be absent, the authority and responsibility shifts to that staff member's supervisor.

Management is responsible for defining the minimal level of education, qualifications, experience, and skills necessary for all positions in the laboratory and assuring that technical staff has demonstrated capabilities in their tasks.

Traini ng is kept up to date as described in Section 17.4 by periodic review of training records and through employee performance reviews.

The CRAO Lab is committed to reporting quality information, and this commitment is communicated to all levels of personnel from management down to staff positions. The following information reflects the authority and responsibilities of management, supervision, and staff.

The CRAO Lab organization consists of the following five units. (See Organizational Chart shown in Appen dix C):

1. Inorganic Chemistry Unit

2. Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Unit

3. Organic Chemistry Unit

4. Quality Assurance Unit /Safety/Training/Haz Mat

5. Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing

4.2.1 Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Project Manager: The Complianc e and Regulatory Affairs Project Manager is the administrator and the final authority for the CRAO Laboratory. It is the Program Manager's responsibility to ensure adequate funding and equipment is available for the laboratory staff. The Program Manager re ports directly to the RWRD Director. The Program Manager a dministers the operations, maintenance and technical5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 11 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

services of the Compliance and Regulatory Affairs group. The Program Manager acts as the "owner" of the CRAO Lab and therefore cosigns the Labora tory
License.

4.2.2. CRAO Laboratory Director : The CRAO Laboratory Director p rovides first line supervision of laboratory personnel involved in the chemical and microbiological examination of water and waste to include ground water, storm water, surface water, wastewater, and biosolids from RWRD facilities. This classification is responsible for accurate and timely testing for compliance with licensure requirements set forth by local, State and Federal regulatory agencies. [This position fulfills the req uirements of the “Laboratory Director” as defined with duties enumerated by the Arizona Environmental Laboratory Licensure Rule.] The CRAO Laboratory Director ensures the laboratory is committed to following the QM and the SOPs. The Laboratory Director rep orts to the CRAO Program Manager

4.2.3 Quality Assurance Officer The Quality Assurance Officer (QAO) has the responsibility and the authority to ensure the QM is implemented and followed at all times. The QAO has access to anyone in management who may make decisions on laboratory policy or resources. Ultimately the QAO is responsible for the oversight and/or review of quality control data. The QAO and The Quality Assurance Unit are not directly involved in analyzing samples to help ensure there is not a conflict of interest. Internal Audits are performed without influence from management or analysts.

The QAO is responsible for ordering and managing the laboratory performance evaluations annually. The QM is updated annually by the QAO.

The QAO is respo nsible for updating the SOPs, Forms, and data. The QAO reports to the Laboratory Director.

4.2.4 Chemical Hygiene /Training Officer: The Chemical Hygiene/Training Officer is responsible for monthly safety meetings, laboratory hazardous waste disposal , and the Chemical Hygiene Plan. The Chemical Hygiene /Training Officer reports to the Laboratory Director.

4.2.5. WW Laboratory Chemist Specialist: The Chemist Specialist is a unit supervisor position and is responsible for verifying the quality of wor k of staff in the Unit. Chemist Specialist must review and approve all analytical results for the unit in LIMS. The unit supervisor also reviews all calibrations, detection limits, and quality control checks performed by analysts. The Chemist Specialist ha s the authority to reject an analysis or result
for cause.

The unit supervisor is responsible for reviewing, updating and signing each SOP along with all data forms used by the unit. Each supervisor is responsible for5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 12 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

ensuring the analysts in their unit are properly trained, following accepted methods, and are performing analytical procedures in a manner that is safe to themselves and others in the laboratory. SOPs must remain current.

The Chemist Specialist is responsible for troubleshooting problems an d making corrective action plans in concert with the analyst.

Unit supervisors have the authority to recommend approved methods and initiate purchase of new instruments for their unit. The amount unit supervisors can approve for purchases varies from cont ract to contract. This classification requires specialized knowledge of environmental laboratory functions for a unit of the laboratory. This classification is also responsible for following accepted testing methods as established by local, State and Feder al regulatory agencies. They are responsible for annually reading, following and ensuring the people in their unit follow the CHP, QM, and Ethics policy. The Chemist Specialist position reports to the Laboratory Director.

4.2.6 WW Laboratory Chemist:

Th e Chemist has the responsibility to perform chemical and microbiological testing of samples using ADHS Licensed methods for reporting compliance data. The Chemist responsibilities include keeping the supervisor informed. Chemists must annually read and fol low all SOPs relevant to the testing they perform. They report to the Chemist Specialist for any problems or concerns. They must conduct testing in accordance with the Lab Ethics Policy. Chemists may perform internal audits, provide training, calibrate t hermometers, and write reports as

needed.

Chemists may stop an analysis, which is not adhering to QA guidelines for that method or the client's requirements. Chemist must then immediately inform their Supervisor, QAO, and/or Laboratory Director as appropr iate. Chemists report to the Chemist Specialist in the unit they are assigned.

4.2.7 WW Laboratory Technician: The Technician has the responsibility to perform chemical and microbiological testing, under moderate supervision, samples in the field or br ought to the laboratory using ADHS Licensed methods for reporting compliance data.

Technicians may stop an analysis, which is not adhering to QA guidelines for that method or the client's requirements. Technicians must then immediately inform their, Super visor, QAO, and/or Laboratory Director as appropriate. Technicians report to the Chemist Specialist in the unit they are assigned.

**SECTION 5**

**- QUALITY SYSTEMS**  The laboratory's Quality System is documented in this Quality Manual and associated quality syst em documents. Together they describe the policies, objectives, principles,5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 13 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

organizational authority, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation plan of the organization for ensuring quality in its work processes, products, and services.

**5.1. Qu**  **ality System Policy**

**Quality Policy Statement** The objective of the quality system and the commitment of management is to consistently provide our customers with scientifically valid and defensible data of known and documented quality that meets their requi rements. Our policy is to use good professional practices, to maintain quality, to uphold the highest quality of service, and to comply with the EL

- VI

- 2009 TNI Standard and ADHS Rules & Statutes. The laboratory ensures that personnel are free from any co mmercial, financial, and other undue pressures, which might adversely affect the quality of work. This policy is implemented and enforced through the unequivocal commitment of management, at all levels, to the Quality Assurance (QA) principles and practice s outlined in this manual. However, the primary responsibility for quality rests with each individual within the laboratory organization. Every laboratory employee must ensure that the generation and reporting of quality analytical data is a fundamental

pr iority. Every laboratory employee is required to familiarize him or herself with the quality documentation and to implement the policies and procedures in their work. All employees are trained annually on ethical principles and procedures surrounding the d ata that is generated. The laboratory maintains a strict policy of client confidentiality.

**Quality Manual (QM) Policy**  Laboratory management ensures that the laboratory’s policies and objectives for quality are documented by reference or by inclusion in th e Quality Manual , and

that the Quality Manual is communicated to, understood by, and implemented by all personnel concerned.

**Policy**

Where the Quality Manual documents laboratory requirements, a separate SOP or policy is not required. The QM is provided a s an overall guidance for the CRAO laboratory. The QM is to be used in conjunction with the SOPs for a complete Quality Assurance System.

**PROCEDURE** All employees sign a form, kept with their training records that state that they

have read and understood the Quality Manual , including the quality policy.

The Quality Assurance Officer maintains the Quality Manual current and up

- to

date.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 14 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**5.2. Standard Operating Procedures**  SOPS are in place to give in

- depth instructions on both general and technical subje cts.

**SECTION 6**

**- DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT**  This Section describes procedures for document management, which includes controlling, distributing, reviewing, and accepting modifications. The purpose of document management is to preclude the use of invalid and/or ob solete documents.

The laboratory manages three types of documents, 1) controlled, 2) approved, and 3)

obsolete.

A CONTROLLED DOCUMENT is one that is uniquely identified, issued, tracked, and kept current as part of the quality system. Controlled documen ts may be internal documents

or external documents.

A PPROVED means reviewed, and either signed and dated, or acknowledged in writing or secure electronic means by the issuing authority.

O BSOLETE DOCUMENTS are documents that have been superseded by more r ecent
versions.

**Policy** All documents that affect the quality of laboratory data are managed appropriate to the scope and depth required.

**6.1 Controlled Documents** 

**Policy** Forms and Checklists will be reviewed and approved for use by the owner of the

docum ent or the Unit Supervisor prior to issue.

SOPs will be reviewed and approved for use by the unit chemist specialist , if applicable, the Quality Assurance Officer , and the Laboratory Director prior to

issue.

**PROCEDURE** Documents are reviewed each year or more often to ensure their contents are suitable and in compliance with the current quality systems requirements, and accurately describe current operations.

Approved copies of documents are available at all locations where operations are

essential to the effective functions of the laboratory.

Copies of documents to distribute to laboratory personnel are numbered consecutively. The Laboratory Director or Quality Assurance Officer determines5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 15 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

to whom the documents will be distributed. The Quality Assuran ce Officer maintains the lists of distribution on the Laboratory Drive of the Network. The sequential number of each copy is recorded next to the individual’s name in the distribution list. The date of distribution is recorded. The employee initials that the copy was received. When the document is no longer valid, the date the document became obsolete is recorded, and the retrieved copies are checked off next to each employee’s name.

Controlled internal documents are registered tracked by the QA unit. Acc eptable file types PDF, WORD, and EXCEL. Each document has a unique number. SOP numbers are listed in Appendix E. Each document has a unique number and is identified with 1) date of issue, 2) revision identification, 3) page number, and 4)

the total numbe r of pages.

A master list of controlled internal documents is maintained that includes distribution, location, and revision dates is automatically by Quality Assurance. The controlled document list is maintained by Quality Assurance. It is the Unit Super visor’s responsibility to update forms and documents as needed.

6.1.1 Document Changes to Controlled Documents For more information, access SOP 9.20 Adding and Revising Documents.

6.1.1.1 Paper Document Changes

**Policy** Document changes are approved by the original approving authority, usually the unit chemist specialist or designee.

**Policy** Corrections on documents, including Chain of Custodies shall specify the reason for the correction unless the correction is transcription error.

**Policy**

The docu ment management process allows for handwritten

modifications to documents.

**Procedure**

The unit chemist specialist must approve all document changes in SOPs. The modified SOP is then copied and distributed, and obsolete

documents are removed.

Amendments to SOPs are incorporated into a new revision and reissued as soon as practicable.

6.1.1.2 Electronic Document Changes5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 16 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL **Procedure** Suggested revisions to electronic documents are presented to the unit chemist specialist for review and approval. Changes t o electronic documents are approved by date and initial on the document or through electronic means (such as email, change tracking functions, or memoranda).

Where practicable, the altered text or new text in the draft is identified during the revision o r review process to provide for easy identification of
the modifications.

**6.2 Obsolete Documents** 

**Policy** All invalid or obsolete documents are removed from general distribution, or otherwise prevented from unintended use.

**Procedure**
Please refer to SO P 9.20 for procedures on obsolete documents.

**6.3 Standard Operating Procedures** 

S TANDARD O PERATING P ROCEDURES (SOPs) are used to ensure consistency of application of common procedures, are written procedures that describe in detail how to accurately repro duce laboratory processes, and are of two types: 1) test method SOPs, which have specifically required details, and 2) Administrative use SOPs which document the more general organizational procedures.

SOPs do not have to be formal documents with predefi ned section headings and contents. They can be less formal descriptions of procedures described in the Quality Manual or other documents.

**Policy** Copies of all SOPs are accessible to all personnel. Electronic s igned copies are located internally at X: \ CR AO \ Lab Svcs \ _Shared Data \ Lab \ SOPs. Paper copies

are distributed to each unit

.

**Procedure** Each SOP indicates the effective date, the revision number, and the signature(s)
of the Unit Chemist Specialist, the Quality Assurance Officer , and the Laboratory

Di rector

.

6.3.1 Test Method SOPs

**Policy**5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 17 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

The laboratory has SOPs for all test methods within its scope, located in the Quality Assurance Office, and for procedures that are part of the Quality System that accurately reflect how the analytical process is p erformed. Where equipment manuals or published methods accurately reflect laboratory procedures in detail, a separate SOP is not required.

**Policy** Any deviation from a test method is documented, including both a description of the change made and a techn ical justification. The deviation from a test method is reported to the client. For compliance reporting, the deviation must be an allowable method modification per the 40 CFR, Part 136.6 and ADHS rules.

**Procedure**
Each Test Method SOP includes or refere nces (as applicable) the following:

a) Identification of the test method; b) Applicable matrix or matrices; c) Detection limit; d) Scope and application, including components to be analyzed; e) Summary of the test method; f) Definitions; g) Interferences; h) Safety; i) Equipment an d supplies; j) Reagents and standards; k) Sample collection, preservation, shipment and storage; l) Quality control, including acceptance criteria (5.4.10.6); m) Calibration and standardization; n) Procedure; o) Data analysis and calculations; p) Method performance; q) Pollution prevention; r) Data assessment and acceptance criteria for quality control measures; s) Corrective actions for out

- of

- control ; t) Contingencies for handling out

- of

- control or unacceptable data; u) Waste management; v) References; and, w) Any tables, diagrams, flowcharts an d validation data.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 18 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 7**

**– REVIEW OF REQUESTS, TENDERS AND CONTRACTS** 

**Policy** The review of all new work assures that oversight is provided so that requirements are clearly defined, the laboratory has adequate resources and capability, and the test method is applicable to the customer's needs. This process assures that all work will be given adequate attention without shortcuts that may compromise data quality.

Contracts for new work may be formal bids, signed documents, verbal, or electronic.

The written form for evaluation of requests, tenders and contract in available on the G

drive, form QA

- 23.

**PROCEDURE**

**7.1 Procedure for the Review of Work Requests** 

The Laboratory Director determines if the laboratory has the necessary accreditations, resour ces, including schedule, equipment, deliverables, and personnel to meet the work request.

The Quality Assurance Officer informs the client of the results of the review if it indicates any potential conflict, deficiency; lack of accreditation or inabili ty of the lab to the complete the work satisfactorily.

The client is informed of any deviation from the agreement including the test method or sample handling processes. All differences between the request and the final agreement are resolved and recorde d before any work begins. It is necessary that the contract be acceptable to both the laboratory and the client.

The review process is repeated when there are amendments to the original agreement by the client. The participating personnel are given copies of the

amendments.

The Laboratory Director or designee will review the work request.

For routine projects and other simple tasks, a review by the unit chemist specialist is considered adequate. The unit chemist specialist confirms that the laboratory ha s any required certifications, that it can meet the client’s data quality and reporting requirements, and that the lab has the capacity to meet the clients

turn around needs.

For new, complex or large projects, the proposed work agreement is given to the Laboratory Director . The Laboratory Director will in turn forward the work agreement to the appropriate personnel to evaluate such items as:5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 19 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL  Method capabilities, analyte lists, reporting limits, and quality control

limits

 Turnaround time feasibility

 QA/QC issues, including certification/accreditation

 Formal laboratory quote

 Final report formatting and electronic deliverable documents

 Time required to keep sample in house

 Final sample disposal requirements

 Review PT sample results

The Laboratory Director or designee submits the bid and formal quote to the

client.

**7.2 Documentation of Review** 

Records are maintained for every agreement or work request, when appropriate. This includes pertinent discussions with a client relating to the client's requirements or the results of the work during the period of execution of the agreement.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 20 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 8**

**– SUBCONTRACTING OF TESTS** 

A SUBCONTRACT LABORATO RY is defined as a laboratory external to this laboratory, or at a
different location than the address indicated on t he front cover of this manual, that performs analyses for this laboratory.

**Policy** When subcontracting analytical services, the laboratory assures work requiring accreditation is placed with an appropriately accredited laboratory or one that meets applicab le statutory and regulatory requirements for performing the tests.

**PROCEDURE**

A list of subcontractors is maintained.

A copy of the certificate and analyte list for subcontractors may be maintained as evidence of compliance. A current list of licensed parameters for any Arizona certified
lab is accessible on the ADHS website https://app.azdhs.gov/BFS/LABS/ELBIS/ArizonaCertifiedLabs/

.

The laboratory notifies the client of the intent to subcontract the work in writing. When possible, the laboratory gains the approval of the client to subcontract their work prior to implementation, preferably in writing.

The laboratory performing the subcontracted work is identified in the fin al report. The laboratory assumes responsibility to the client for the subcontractor’s work, except in the case where a client or a regulating authority specified which subcontractor is to be used.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 21 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 9**

**– PURCHASING SERVICES AND SUPPLIES** 

**Policy**

T he laboratory ensures that purchased supplies and services that affect the quality of environmental tests are of the required or specified quality by using approved suppliers and products.

**Policy** The laboratory has procedures for purchasing, receiving, a nd storage of supplies that affect the quality of environmental tests.

**PROCEDURE**

The unit chemist specialist or the Lab Director perform reviews and approves the supplier of services and supplies and approves technical content of purchasing documents prio r to ordering.

Evaluation of suppliers is accomplished by ensuring the supplier ships the product or material ordered and that the material is of the appropriate quality by signing packing slips or other supply receipt documents. The purchasing document s contain the data that adequately describe the services and supplies ordered.

The laboratory keeps a list of approved suppliers.

On Demand Items (Items not on a purchase order) Three Bids are taken on each order. Each item requested must meet quality

sp ecifications as required in the SOPs. A statement and a signature line are included on the purchase order to indicate that the items requested meet quality specifications (like specific grades mentioned in SOPs).

Bid Items (Items from a multi

- year purchase order)

-

Purchase Orders are required for similar or repetitive purchases of more than $1,000 during any one fiscal year period or for purchases with an aggregate cost (including freight, tax, etc.) of more than $4,999.99. Purchase Orders may either be Dep artment

Only or County wide.

All Bid orders are tracked in Pima Core, the county financial applications program.

**Procedure for Receipt of Supplies** Supplies received are reconciled against the packing list and inspected for damage, distributed to the appro priate individuals, departments or storage areas. Supplies received are stored according to manufacturer’s instructions, laboratory SOP, or test method specifications.

Bid items are received in PimaCore when they are physically received.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 22 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 10**

**– SER**  **VICE TO THE CLIENT**

The laboratory collaborates with clients and/or their representatives in clarifying their requests and in monitoring of the laboratory performance related to their work. Each request is reviewed to determine the nature of the request a nd the laboratory's ability to comply with the request within the confines of prevailing statutes and/or regulations without risk to the confidentiality of other clients.

**10.1 Client Confidentiality**  **Policy** As a government entity, all records are availab le to the public

. C onfidentiality may not be promised or assumed.

**SECTION 11**

**– COMPLAINTS** 

The purpose of this section is to assure that customer complaints are addressed and corrected. This includes requests to verify results or analytical data.

**Poli cy**  The Laboratory Director reviews all complaints and determines appropriate action.

**PROCEDURE** All customer complaints are documented by the person receiving the complaint and addressed by appropriate personnel. If it is determined tha t a complaint is without merit, it is documented, and the client is contacted. If it is determined that the complaint has merit, a corrective action is initiated. See Section 13 for corrective action procedures.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 23 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 12**

**– CO**  **NTROL OF NON**

**- CONFORMING WO**  **RK**

N ON

- CONFORMING WORK is work that does not meet acceptance criteria or requirements.

Non

- conformances can include unacceptable quality control results (see Section 24 Assuring the Quality of Results) or departures from standard operating procedures or test methods. Requests for departures from laboratory procedures are approved by the unit chemist specialist and documented.

**POLICY** The policy for control of non

- conforming work is to identify the non

- conformance, determine if it will be permitted, and ta ke appropriate action. All employees have the authority to stop work on samples when any aspect of the process does not conform to laboratory requirements.

**PROCEDURE** The responsibilities and authorities for the management of non

- conforming work are

detail ed in the text below. The procedure for investigating and taking associated

corrective actions of non

- conforming work are described in Section 13.

The unit evaluates the significance of the nonconforming work, and takes corrective action immediately. The client is notified if their data has been impacted. Resumption of

work after non

- conformance is authorized by the unit chemist specialist.

Employees immediately notify the appropriate unit chemist specialist of any non

conformance. The unit chemist spec ialist reviews the significance of nonconformance and develops a course of action. Customers are notified within one business day if data is questionable.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 24 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL



### SECTION 13

**– CORRECTIVE ACTION** 

C ORRECTIVE ACTION is the action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing nonconformity, defect, or other undesirable situation in order to prevent recurrence.

**POLICY** Deficiencies cited in external assessments, internal quality audits, data reviews, complaints, or managerial reviews are documented and require correcti ve action. Corrective actions taken are appropriate for the magnitude of the problem and the degree of risk.

**PROCEDURE**

The unit chemist specialist is responsible for initiating corrective action on routine data

reviews. The unit chemist specialist is res ponsible for monitoring and recording

corrective actions.

All deficiencies are investigated and a corrective action plan developed and implemented if determined necessary. The implementation is monitored for
effectiveness.

Specific corrective action pro tocols specified in test methods may override general corrective action procedures specified in this manual.

**13.1 Selection and Implementation of Corrective Actions** 

ROOT CAUSE is the condition or event that, if corrected or eliminated, would prevent the recurrence of a deficiency.

**POLICY** Once an exceedence or nonconformance is noted, the first action is an investigation to determine the root cause. Records are maintained in Y: \ Lab
Svcs \ _Shared Data \ Lab \ Corrective Action of nonconformance requiring

c orrective action to show that the root cause(s) was investigated, and includes the results of the investigation.

Where uncertainty arises regarding the best approach for analysis of the cause of exceedences that require corrective action, appropriate pers onnel will

recommend corrective actions to be initiated.

The appropriate unit Chemist Specialist ensures that corrective actions are discharged within the agreed upon time frame.

**13.2 Monitoring of Corrective Action** 

**POLICY**5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 25 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Appropriate personnel will monitor implementation and documentation of the
corrective action to assure that the corrective actions were effective

.

**Procedure**

The unit chemist specialist enters corrective Actions into correct file in Y: \ Lab
Svcs \ _Shared Data \ Lab \ Corrective Action . Quality Assurance Personnel or designees will follow

- up in four to six weeks to ensure corrective action is effective. If the problem still exists and was not fixed, the process will start again.

**13.3 Technical Corrective Action** 

C AUSE A NALYSIS in correc tive action investigates the root cause of the problem.

**POLICY** Sample data associated with a failed quality control are evaluated for the need to be reanalyzed or qualified.

**Procedure** Unacceptable quality control results are documented, and if the e valuation requires cause analysis, the cause and solution are recorded.

The analyst is responsible for initiating or recommending corrective actions and ensuring that exceedences of quality control acceptance criteria are documented. Analysts routinely i mplement corrective actions for data with unacceptable QC measures. First level correction may include re

- analysis without further assessment. If the test method SOPs addresses the specific actions to take, they are followed. Otherwise, corrective actions start with assessment of the cause of the problem.

unit Chemist Specialist review corrective action reports and suggest improvements, alternative approaches, and procedures where needed. If the data reported are affected adversely by the nonconformance, t he client is notified in writing.

The discovery of a non

- conformance for results that have already been reported to the client must be immediately evaluated for significance of the non

conformance, its acceptability to the client, and determination of the appropriate

corrective action.

**13.4 Exceptionally Permitting Departures from Documented Policies and** 

**Procedures**

**POLICY** The laboratory allows the release of non

- conforming data only with approval by the appropriate unit chemist specialist or their desi gnee on a case

- by

- case basis.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 26 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Planned departures from procedures or policies do not require audits or investigations.

**Procedure** Permitted departures for non

- conformances, such as QC failures, are fully documented and include the reason for the departure, the affected SOP(s), the impact of the departure on the data, and the data itself.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 27 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 14**

**– PREVENTIVE ACTION** 

P REVENTIVE ACTION , rather than corrective action, aims at minimizing or eliminating inferior data quality or other non

- conformance thro ugh scheduled maintenance and review, before the non

- conformance occurs.

Preventive action includes, but is not limited to, review of QC data to identify quality trends, regularly scheduled staff quality meetings, annual budget reviews, annual managerial reviews, scheduled column trimming, running a new LIMS system in tandem with the old system to assure at least one working system, and other actions taken to prevent problems.

All employees have the authority to recommend preventive action procedures, h owever management is responsible for implementing preventive action.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 28 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 15**

**– CONTROL OF RECORDS** 

R ECORDS are a subset of documents, usually data recordings that include annotations, such as daily refrigerator temperatures posted to a laboratory for m, lists, spreadsheets, or analyst notes on a chromatogram. Records may be on any form of media, including electronic and hard copy. Records allow for the historical reconstruction of laboratory activities related to sample

- handling and analysis.

**POLICY**

T he laboratory maintains a record system appropriate to its needs, records all laboratory activities, and complies with applicable standards or regulations as required.

**PROCEDURE** The laboratory retains all original observations, calculations and derived d ata, calibration records, and a copy of the test report for ten years. The CRAO lab at the WESC facility will maintain two years on

- site and maintain eight years at the Pima County Records Retention Center where data can be retrieved within 24 hours.

Note: Retained records must contain the following information:

 Identity of personnel involved in sampling, sample receipt, preparation, or testing;

 Information related to equipment, test methods, sample receipt, sample preparation, and data verification;

 Record

- keeping system that facilitates retrieval of information for verification or inspection;

 Changes to records are signed or initialed by laboratory staff and includes the reason for signature or initials, such as “reviewed by” or “sampled by”;

 Records, exce pt those generated by automated systems, are generated directly, promptly, and legibly in permanent ink;

 Entries are not obliterated by methods such as erasures, over

- writings, or markings. All changes are made by one line marked through the entry with the entry signed or initialed and dated by the individual making the change;

 Changes to electronic records are tracked through the data system audit tracking system or by notations made in the electronic system.

Records of all procedures to which a sample i s subjected while in the possession of the laboratory are kept.

**15.1 Records Management and Storage** 

**POLICY** Records, including electronic records, are easy to retrieve, legible, and protected from deterioration or damage; held secure and in confidence; and are available to accrediting authorities for a minimum of ten years.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 29 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**POLICY** The laboratory maintains a record management system for control of laboratory notebooks, instrument logbooks, standards logbooks, and records for data reduction, validation, storage, and reporting.

**POLICY** Archived information and access logs are protected against fire, theft, loss, environmental deterioration, vermin, and in the case of electronic records, electronic or magnetic sources.

**POLICY**

In the event that the labo ratory transfers ownership or goes out of business, records are maintained or transferred according to the clients’ instructions.

**Procedure**

All electronic records are backed

- up weekly by Information Technology. Access to protected records is limited to la boratory management or their designees to prevent unauthorized access or amendment.

Identification: Records are uniquely identified.

Collection: Observations, data and calculations are recorded at the time they are

made. When mistakes are made in techni cal records, each mistake is crossed out with a single line (not erased, made illegible, or deleted) and the correct value entered alongside. Corrections are signed or initialed by the person making the correction. For electronic systems, all changes are t racked by the audit trail or by added notes. When changes are made to technical records for reasons other than for correction of transcription errors, the reason for the change is recorded

on the document.

Storage: All records stored on electronic media a re supported by the hardware and software required for retrieval and have hard

- copy or write

- protected backup copies.

Filing: Records are filed promptly and in an organized fashion.

Disposal: Records are disposed of according to applicable regulation, cl ient request, or after ten years.

**15.2 Legal Chain of Custody Records** 

E VIDENTIARY SAMPLE DA TA are used as legal evidence. The CRAO lab processes all compliance samples submitted into the laboratory or contracted to another lab
with an official Chain of Custody to maintain the transfer as uncompromised.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 30 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 16**

**– AUDITS AND MANAGEMENT REVIEW** 

A UDITS measure laboratory performance and verify compliance with accreditation/ certification and project requirements. Audits specifically provide management with an

on

- going assessment of the quality system. They are also instrumental in identifying areas where improvement in the quality system will increase the reliability of data. Audits are of four main types: internal, external, performance, and system.

Notification of clients for events that cast doubt on the validity of the results is completed within one working week of the results being reviewed. See SOP 9.21 Exceedence Report Procedure For AZPDES/NPDES, App Permits, Reuse, And IWC Ordinances

**16.1 Internal Audits** 

**POLICY** The laboratory conducts internal audits of its quality systems activities, including data integrity, and the use of trained and qualified personnel at least annually. Personnel may not audit their own activities except when it can be demonstrated
that an effective audit will be carried out.

**Procedure** Annually, the laboratory prepares a schedule of internal audits to be performed during the year. These audits verify compliance with the requirements of the quality system, including analytical methods, SOPs, ethics policies, other laboratory policies, and the EL

- VI

- 2009 TNI Standard.

It is the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Officer to plan and organize audits as required by the schedule and requested by management.

The ar ea audited, the audit findings, and corrective actions are recorded.

All investigations that result in findings of inappropriate activity are documented and include any disciplinary actions involved, corrective actions taken, and all appropriate notificat ions of clients.

Clients are notified promptly, in writing, when audit findings cast doubt on the validity of the data.

Audits are reviewed after completion to assure that corrective actions were implemented and effective.

**16.2 External Audits** 

**POLICY** It is the laboratory’s policy to cooperate and assist with all external audits, whether performed by clients or an accrediting authority.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 31 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**POLICY** All external audits are fully documented and tracked to closure. ADHS currently performs on

- site audits o n a biennial review.

**Procedure** Management ensures that all areas of the laboratory are accessible to auditors as applicable and that appropriate personnel are available to assist in conducting

the audit.

Any findings related to an external audit follow corrective action procedures.

Management ensures that corrective actions are carried out within the timeframe specified by the auditor(s). EL

- VI

- 2009 TNI rules currently specify that a written Corrective Action Plan is submitted within 30 days from th e date of the initial Report of Findings.

**16.3 Performance Audits** 
**POLICY** The laboratory defines holding time for PT or QC samples as beginning when the vial is opened.

Performance audits may be Proficiency Test Samples, internal single

- blind samples, d ouble

- blind samples through a provider or client, or anything that tests the performance of the analyst and method.

The policy and procedures for Proficiency Test Samples are discussed in SOP 9.6, Distribution of Performance Evaluation Samples

.

**16.4 System Audits and Management Reviews** 

**POLICY** Laboratory management reviews the quality system and maintains records of review findings and actions.

**Procedure** The quality system is reviewed annually, and findings are recorded. Managers

assure that action s are performed within agreed time frames.

Internal Audits may review:

 The suitability of policies and procedures

 Reports from managerial and supervisory personnel

 The outcome of recent internal audits5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 32 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL  Corrective and preventive actions

 Assessments by exte rnal bodies

 The results of interlaboratory comparisons or Proficiency Tests

 Changes in the volume and type of the work

 Client feedback

 Complaints

 Other relevant factors, such as:

o Quality control activities

o Resources

o Staff training

Findings from management reviews are recorded. These records ensure that corrective actions are completed in one month.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 33 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 17**

**– PERSONNEL, TRAINING, AND DATA INTEGRITY** 

**17.1 Job Descriptions** 

**** For more information see 4.2.

**POLICY** Job descriptions are available for all positions that manage, perform, or verify work affecting data quality, and are located at http://www.pima.gov/hr/salary.

**Procedure** Job descriptions include the specific tasks, minimum education and qualifications, skills, and experience required for each position.

**17.2 Data Integrity and Ethics** 

D ATA INTEGRITY is the result of the processes that together assure valid data of known and documented quality.

Data integrity and ethics procedures in the laboratory include training, signed,

and dated int egrity documentation for all laboratory employees, periodic monitoring of data integrity, and written SOP 9.1.

**POLICY** Technical managers uphold the spirit and intent by supporting integrity procedures, by enforcing data integrity procedures, and by signi ng and dating the data integrity procedure training forms.

**POLICY** Data integrity procedures and evidence of inappropriate actions are reviewed annually or through regularly scheduled internal audits, and are updated by management.

**POLICY**

The mechanism for confidential reporting of ethics and data integrity issues is (1) unrestricted access to senior management, (2) an assurance that personnel will not be treated unfairly for reporting instances of ethics and data integrity breaches, and (3) anonymous r eporting.

**POLICY** Employees are required to understand, through training and review of quality systems documents that any infractions of the laboratory data integrity procedures will result in a detailed investigation that could lead to very serious

conse quences such as immediate termination, or civil/criminal prosecution.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 34 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**POLICY** Any potential data integrity issue is handled confidentially until a follow

- up evaluation, full investigation, or other appropriate actions have been completed

and the issues clarified. Inappropriate activities are documented, including disciplinary actions, corrective actions, and notifications of clients, if applicable. These documents are maintained for a minimum of 5 years.

**Procedure** Any determination for detailed investi gation of data integrity issues must be communicated to senior management. Allegations are investigated and remain confidential to the extent necessary.

Documentation for all investigations that result in findings of inappropriate activity include any di sciplinary actions involved, corrective actions taken, and all appropriate notifications of clients.

Data integrity procedures are reviewed annually and are periodically monitored through in

- depth data review, records review, or other thorough check proc esses.

For more information, see SOP 9.1, Laboratory Ethics Policy.

**17.3 Data Integrity and Ethics Training** 

**POLICY** Data integrity training is provided for all employees initially upon hire and annually thereafter.

**Procedure**

Attendance at an initial data integrity training (part of new employee orientation) and the annual refresher training is recorded with a signature attendance sheet or other form of documentation that demonstrates all staff has participated and understands their obligations related to data integrity.

Training records regarding data integrity and ethics are signed and dated by senior management. When contracted technical or support personnel are used, management is responsible for ensuring that they are trained to the laboratory’s quality system and data integrity procedures, competent to perform the assigned tasks, and appropriately supervised.

Topics covered are provided in writing and provided to all trainees.

**17.4 General Training** 5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 3 5 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**POLICY** All personnel are appropriately tra ined and competent in their assigned tasks before they contribute to functions that can affect data quality. It is management’s responsibility to assure personnel are trained.

**POLICY** Only trained personnel are authorized to perform specific tasks.

**PO LICY**  Training records are kept on individual training forms.

**Procedure** New staff members are given introductory training and orientation upon arrival. Training is documented by signature sheets of all who attended.

Attendance at training sessions is do cumented on signature sheets.

The initial training for a new task contains the following steps:

 All documentation involved with a new and unfamiliar task is read and understood by the trainee.

 Training is under the direct supervision of a qualified seni or analyst. During the time the analyst is training, the trainee may sign laboratory notebooks or logbooks, but laboratory notebooks must be cosigned by the senior analyst, who is responsible for the data generated.

 The trainee demonstrates competency in t he new task before they can operate independently. The competency for a test method is accomplished by a demonstration of capability as indicated in Section 19. Approval of competency is noted by the initials or signature of the qualified senior analyst

on the training form.

 Each step of the training process is documented.

Ongoing training will consist of the following:

 The analyst attests, through signature that they have read, understood, and agreed to perform the latest version of the Quality Manual a nd any method SOP’s that the analyst performs.

 Annually, the analyst shows continued proficiency in each method they perform.

 Other training as determined by management.

 Proof of acceptable on

- going training is documented by the annual
demonstrations of ca pability for each analyst and each method.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 36 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 18**

**– ACCOMMODATIONS & ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS** 

**POLICY** Laboratory facilities are designed and organized to facilitate testing of environmental samples. Environmental conditions are monitored to ensure th at conditions do not invalidate results or adversely affect the required quality of any measurement.

**POLICY** Environmental tests are stopped when the environmental conditions jeopardize the

results.

**POLICY** Access to, and use of areas affecting the qua lity of the environmental tests is controlled by restriction of areas to authorized personnel only.

**POLICY** The laboratory workspaces are adequate for their use, and appropriately clean to support environmental testing and ensure an unencumbered work ar ea.

**PROCEDURE** Laboratory space is arranged to minimize cross

- contamination between incompatible areas of the laboratory. Please see Appendix A for CRAO Lab Floor Plans.

If the laboratory environment is required to be controlled by method or regulation, t he

adherence is recorded.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 37 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 19**

**– TEST METHODS AND METHOD VALIDATION** 

**POLICY** A method is validated before it is put into use. All methods are published or

documented.

**19.1 Demonstration of Capability (DOC)** 

A D EMONSTRATION OF C APABILITY (DOC) is a procedure to establish the ability of the analyst to generate data of acceptable accuracy and precision.

W ORK CELLS consist of analysts with specifically defined tasks who together perform the method. Work cells together meet specified acceptance c riteria and demonstrations of capability.

**POLICY** The laboratory confirms that it is capable of generating data of acceptable accuracy and precision on all methods before employing them.

**PROCEDURE** The DOC is documented and kept in the training files for each analyst.

A DOC is performed for each analyte whenever the method, analysts, analytes, or instrument type is changed.

The unit Chemist Specialist certifies that technical staff members in their area of expertise are trained and authorized to perfo rm all tests for which we are accredited by signing the DOC form.

The process for DOC is documented in SOP 9.36, Demonstration of Capability.

**19.2 On** 

**- Going (or Continued) Proficiency** 

After the demonstration of capability is completed, on

- going prof iciency is maintained and demonstrated at least annually through the analysis of either single

- blind samples, performing another DOC, or use of four consecutive laboratory control samples compared to pre

- determined acceptance limits for precision and accur acy. This is documented in the training file of each analyst and in each unit by the unit supervisor.

**19.3 Initial Test Method Evaluation** 

For chemical analyses, the INITIAL TEST METHOD EVALUATION involves the determination of the Limit of Detection (LO D) (also called Method Detection Limit or MDL), confirmation of the Limit of Quantitation (LOQ) (also called Practical5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 38 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Quantitation Limit or PQL), an evaluation of precision and bias, and an evaluation of the selectivity of the method.

19.3.1 Limit of D etection (LOD) or Method Detection Limit (MDL)

The LOD/ MDL is an estimate of the minimum amount of a substance that an analytical process can reliably detect. An LOD/MDL is analyte

- and matrix specific and may be laboratory

- dependent.

19.3.2 Limit of Qu antitation (LOQ) or Practical Quantitaion Limit (PQL)

The LOQ/PQL or is an estimate of the minimum amount of a substance that can be reported with a specified degree of confidence.

**POLICY** If an LOD/MDL study is not performed, concentrations less than the Limit of Quantitation are not reported, are reported as less than the PQL, or reported with a qualifier.

**POLICY** The lowest calibration standard is equal to the LOQ/PQL.

**POLICY** The LOQ/PQL will always be greater than the LOD/MDL.

**POLICY**
The LOD/MD L must be current.

**PROCEDURE** LOQ/PQLs are determined from a quality system matrix using all sample processing steps, when there is a change in the test method or instruments affects sensitivity.

LODs/MDLs are run by a Method Detection Level study accordi ng to 40CFR, Part 136, Appendix B and use the MDL as the LOD.

The LOQ/PQL is the lowest standard in the calibration curve.

19.3.3 Precision and Bias

P RECISION is the degree to which a set of observations or measurements of the same property, obtained under similar conditions, conform to themselves. Precision is usually expressed as standard deviation, variance, or range, in either

absolute or relative terms.

B IAS is the systematic error that contributes to the difference between the mean of a signific ant number of test results and the accepted reference value.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 39 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**POLICY**

Precision and bias are determined for standard and non

- standard methods.

**PROCEDURE** Precision and bias are determined for standard methods through the performance of a Demonstration of Capability.

Precision and bias using non

- standard, modified standard or laboratory

developed methods are compared to the criteria established by the client (when requested), the method, or the laboratory.

Replicate spikes in a quality system matrix are analyzed according the procedures outlined in the 2009 TNI Standard where applicable.

19.3.4 Selectivity

S ELECTIVITY is the capability of a test method or instrument to respond to a target substance or constituent in the presence of non

- target substanc es (EPA

- QAD).

**POLICY** The laboratory evaluates selectivity through procedures defined in the test
method SOPs.

**19.4 Estimation of Uncertainty** 

E STIMATION OF UNCERTA INTY consists of the sum (combining the components) of
the uncertainties of the numerous steps of the analytical process, including, but not limited to, sample plan variability, spatial and temporal sample variation, sample heterogeneity, calibration/calibration check variability, extraction variability, and weighing variability.

**PROCEDURE**

I f requested on certain projects, the laboratory estimates uncertainty using the three times standard deviation calculated from routine quality control samples, where applicable.

**19.5 Laboratory** 

**- Developed or Non** 

**- Standard Method Validation** 

**POLICY**

Labora tory developed, modified standard methods, and non

- standard methods require method validation.

**PROCEDURE**5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 40 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

M ETHOD VALIDATION is the confirmation by examination and the provision of objective evidence that the particular requirements for a specific intended use are fulfilled ( EL

- VI2009 TNI Standard).

**POLICY** Where applicable, the laboratory validates non

- standard methods, laboratory

designed/developed methods, standard methods used outside their published scope, and amplifications and modifications of stand ard methods to confirm that

the methods are fit for the intended use.

**POLICY** The range and accuracy of the values obtainable from validated methods (e.g. the uncertainty of the results, detection limit, selectivity of the method, linearity, limit of repe atability and/or reproducibility, robustness against external influences
and/or cross

- sensitivity against interference from the matrix of the sample/test object), is assessed for the intended use and whether it is relevant to the clients'

needs.

**PROCEDURE** The laboratory’s method validation procedures may conform to the EPA’s Tier 1, 2 or 3 Validations Procedures, http://water.epa.gov/scitech/methods/cwa/atp/flex.cfm

. The laboratory reco rds method validation results, the procedure used for the validation, and a statement as to whether the method is fit for the intended use.

**19.6 Control of Data** 

**POLICY** All calculations and all relevant data are subject to appropriate checks in a

sys tematic manner.

**POLICY**

Commercial off

- the

- shelf software (e.g. word processing, database and statistical programs) used within the designed application range is considered sufficiently

validated when in

- house programming is not used.

**PROCEDURE**

The labo ratory assures that computers and software are protected, maintained, and secure through measures such as documentation, locked access, and control of the laboratory environment.

Each laboratory member has his or her own user name and password for

Windows & LIMS. The pass

- words are changed at intervals set up by the administrators of the programs.

Computers left unattended for 15 minutes are locked to avoid unauthorized users5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 41 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

accessing the computer.

The lab drive on ‘Y: \ Lab Svcs \ _Shared Data \ Lab' is ac cessible to lab and Data Management personnel (DM) only. Each user has a personal directory that only that person can access. Training records on the ‘Y: \ Lab Svcs \ _Shared

Data \ Labdrive' are accessible by the Laboratory Director , the unit Chemist Specialis ts , QA auditors and the file administrator.

To insure that reported data is free from transcription errors, instruments that are automated directly import data into LIMS. The remainder of the data in LIMS is checked by the unit Chemist Specialist or thei r designee against the raw data for

errors.

Quality control measures are reviewed by the analyst and unit Chemist Specialists before data is approved in LIMS.

**Transcription error procedure**

a) Transcription and calculation errors are minimized through data review and through periodic review of data reduction processes.

b) Quality control results are reviewed by the analyst and by authorized personnel (such as the supervisor or peer). The results are evaluated for consistency, trend, or feasibility befo re data are released to the client.

c) Manual integrations and any analytical notes are reviewed for integrity and justification prior to the release of data.

The laboratory assures that computers, user

- developed computer software, automated equipment, or microprocessors used for the acquisition, processing, recording, reporting, storage, or retrieval of environmental test data are:

a) Documented in sufficient detail and validated as being adequate for use;

b) Protected for integrity and confidentiality of d ata entry or collection, data storage, data transmission and data processing;

c) Maintained to ensure proper functioning and are provided with the environmental and operating conditions necessary to maintain the integrity of environmental test data; and

d) Hel d secure including the prevention of unauthorized access to, and the unauthorized amendment of, computer records.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 42 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 20**

**– EQUIPMENT** 

**20.1 General Equipment Requirements** 

**POLICY** The laboratory provides all the necessary equipment required for the correct performance of the scope of environmental testing presented in this Quality

Manual

.

**POLICY** All equipment and software used for testing and sampling is capable of achieving the accuracy required and complies with the specifications of the enviro nmental test method as specified in the laboratory SOP.

**POLICY** Equipment is operated only by authorized personnel.

**POLICY** The laboratory procedure for safe handling, transport, storage, use and planned maintenance of measuring equipment to ensure prop er functioning and in order to prevent contamination or deterioration is found in the specific instrument
manuals and in the method SOPs.

**PROCEDURE**

Up

- to

- date instructions on the use and maintenance of equipment (including any relevant manuals provided by the manufacturer of the equipment) are readily available for use by laboratory personnel.

All equipment is calibrated or checked before being placed into use to ensure that it meets laboratory specifications and the relevant standard specifications.

T est equipment, including hardware and software, are safeguarded from adjustments which would invalidate the test results measures by limiting access to the equipment and using password protection where possible.

Equipment that has been subject to overloa ding, mishandling, given suspect results, or been shown to be defective or outside specifications is taken out of service, isolated to prevent its use, or clearly labeled as being out of service until it has been shown to function properly. If it is shown that previous tests are affected, then procedures for non

- conforming work are followed.

When equipment is needed for a test that is outside of permanent control of the laboratory, the lab ensures the equipment meets the requirements of this manual prior t o its use by inspecting or otherwise testing it.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 43 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Each item of equipment and the software used for testing and significant to the results is uniquely identified and records of equipment and software are maintained. This information includes the following:

a) Identity of the equipment and its software;

b) Manufacturer’s name, type identification, serial number or other unique identifier;

c) Checks that equipment complies with specifications of applicable tests;

d) Current location;

e) Manufacturer’s instructions, if avail able, or a reference to their location;

f) Dates, results and copies of reports and certificates of all calibrations, adjustments, acceptance criteria, and the due date of next calibration;

g) Maintenance plan where appropriate, and maintenance carried out to da te;
documentation on all routine and non

- routine maintenance activities and reference material verifications;

h) Any damage, malfunction, modification or repair to the equipment;

i) Date received and date placed into service (if available); and

j) Condition when re ceived, if available (new, used, reconditioned).

See appendices F, G, H, and I for inventory lists.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 44 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**20.2 Support Equipment** 

S UPPORT EQUIPMENT includes, but is not limited to: balances, ovens, refrigerators, freezers, incubators, water baths, temperatur e measuring devices, volumetric dispensing devices, and thermal/pressure sample preparation devices.

**POLICY** All support equipment is maintained in proper working order and records are kept of all repair and maintenance activities, including service calls

.

**PROCEDURE** All raw data records are retained to document equipment performance. These records include logbooks, data sheets, or equipment computer files.

All support equipment is calibrated or verified annually over the entire range of use using NIST traceable references where available. The results of the calibration of support equipment are within specifications or (1) the equipment is removed from service until repaired, or (2) records are maintained of correction

factors to correct all measurements

.

Support equipment such as balances, ovens, refrigerators, freezers, and water baths are checked with a NIST traceable reference if available, each day prior to use, to ensure they are operating within the expected range for the application for

which the equipment is to be used.

Mechanical volumetric dispensing equipment, including burettes (except Class A glassware), is checked for accuracy the day of use for primary standards, or quarterly, whichever is more frequent.

Glass micro

- liter syringes have a certificate attesting to the established accuracy. If the certificate of accuracy for glass micro

- liter syringes is not available, the accuracy of the syringe is demonstrated upon receipt and documented.

For chemical tests that use autoclaves, the tempe rature, cycle time, and pressure is documented by use of chemical indicators or temperature recorders and pressure gauges.

For microbiology analyses, records for autoclaves used in the laboratory are required for the following:

 Initial performance of the autoclave functional properties (supplier by the installer);5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 45 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 Temperature demonstration of sterilization continuous monitoring device or maximum registering temperature;

 For every cycle, record date, contents, maximum temperature reached, pressure, time in sterilization mode, total run time, and analysts initials;

 Quarterly check of autoclave timing device against a stopwatch; and

 Annual maintenance check to include a pressure check and calibration of temperature device.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 46 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

20.2.1 Support Equipment Maintena nce

Regular maintenance of support equipment, such as balances is conducted at least annually.

Maintenance on other support equipment, such as ovens, refrigerators, and

thermometers is conducted on an as needed basis.

Records of maintenance to su pport equipment are documented in Instrument Maintenance Logs. Each piece of support equipment has its own logbook.

20.2.2 Support Equipment Calibration

Calibration requirements for analytical support equipment are found in the table below. For analyti cal instrumentation, the calibration requirements are found in
the method SOPs

**Table 20.2**

**- 2**  **Calibration And Maintenance**

**Instrument Activity**  **Frequency Documentation** 

Balance 1. Clean.

2. Check alignment. 3. Check with working weight.
4. Check with reference weights.

5. Service Contract. 1. Before use.

2. Before use.
3. Before use.

4. Monthly.

5. Annually. Worksheet/log

book.

Post annual service

date on balance.

ASTM Class 1 Weights 1. Only use for the intended purpose

2. Use plastic forceps

t o handle.

3. Keep in case.

4. Re

- calibrate. Once every year. File certificate.

Thermometers:

1. Glass and

electronic

2. Dial

thermometers Check at the

temperature used, against a reference
NIST certified

thermometer 1. Annually for glass an d electronic, twice a year
for Coliform

thermometers

2. Quarterly for

dial

thermometers
See SOP 9.25 Calibration factor

and date of

calibration on

thermometer and worksheet/log book5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 47 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**Table 20.2**

**- 2**  **Calibration And Maintenance**

**Instrument Activity**  **Frequency Documentation**  pH meters Calibration:

1. pH buffer aliquot are used only once.

2. Buffe rs used for 3 point calibration will bracket the pH of the media, reagent, or sample tested. Daily before use. Worksheet/log

book.

pH probe Maintenance:

Use manufacturer’s specifications. As needed. Worksheet/log

book.

Automatic or digital type pipettes Calibrate for accuracy

and precision using reagent water and analytical balance. See SOP 9.14 Before use, if

used for 1 
Standards. Worksheet/logbook

Refrigerators, Freezers, and
BOD incubators 1. Thermometers are

immersed in liquid to the appropriate

imm ersion line.

2. The thermometers are graduated in

increments of 1  C or

less. Temperatures

are recorded each day in use.

See SOP 9.25,

9.30 Correction factor

Worksheet/log

book.

Sterilizer 1. Use a maximum

temperature

registering

thermometer or a

contin uous recording

device. 1.Weekly. Worksheet/log

book.

2. Use spore strips or ampoules. 2. One sterilizing cycle per

month.

3. Maintenance of autoclave by service

contract. 3. Annually.

4.Timing Autoclave cycle. 4.Quarterly Worksheet/log

book.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 48 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**Table 20.2**

**- 2**  **Calibration And Maintenance**

**Instrument Activity**  **Frequency Documentation** 

5. Hot air ovens must

maintain a stable temperature of

170  C

- 180  C for at

least two hours 5. Checked Daily Worksheet/log

book.

Microbiological incubators, and

water baths 1. Thermometers in

each unit are immersed in liquid to the appropriate

immersion l ine.

2. The thermometers will be graduated in

increments of 0.5  C (0.2  C increments for

tests which are

incubated at 44.5  C)

or less. Temperature of

incubators and

water baths will

be recorded twice a day for each day in use with readings separated by at

l east four hours Worksheet/log

book

DO probe Maintenance as specify

by manufacturer As needed Worksheet/log

book5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 49 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**20.3 Analytical Equipment** 

20.3.1 Maintenance for Analytical Equipment

**POLICY** All equipment is properly maintained, inspected, and clea ned.

**PROCEDURE** Maintenance of analytical instruments and other equipment may include regularly scheduled preventive maintenance or maintenance on an as

- needed basis due to instrument malfunction and is documented in Instrument Maintenance Logs,

which bec ome part of the laboratory’s permanent records.

Equipment that is Out of Service must clearly be marked as such by the equipment operator or analyst or removed out of the laboratory area, when practicable.

Required maintenance may be specified in the cor responding method SOPs or in specific SOPs written to cover only maintenance, as listed below in the table.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 50 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**Table 20.3**

**- 1**  **Analytical Equipment Maintenance**

**Instrument Procedure**  **Frequency** Leeman Mercury Analyzer
See SOP 5.7.5 Check tubing for wear

Repl acing the liquid

- gas separator
Lubricate the auto

- sampler arm with oil Daily

As required

ICP
See SOP 5.7.4 Check pump tubing

Check nebulizer torch and injector tip
Check sample tube is not plugged Verify that there is no aerosol

cohesion within the mix ing chamber Check waste level, Check torch

Clean the dust screens on Power supplies, Camera refrigeration unit, &

Water chiller. Back up files and instrument configuration files
Defrost camera Daily Daily Daily

Daily Daily

As required

As required As req uired

ICPMS Clean the surface of the equipment

Check Drain Vessel, empty if needed Check pump tubing and replace if

necessary Clean and inspect the torch Clean and inspect the cone Clean and inspect the snout and

bonnet Replace pump tubing Clean and insp ect the spray chamber Clean and inspect the nebulizer Clean and inspect the cooling air intake
filter Inspect the state of the induction coil
Check the water level in the water

cooler Perform a Wavelength Calibration Clean and inspect water filter Daily

D aily Daily

Weekly Weekly Weekly

Weekly Monthly Monthly Monthly

Monthly Monthly

Monthly Every 6 month Auto Analyzers Clean sampler

Check all tubing Record manifold temperature Daily Daily Heated procedures

GC/MS Analyzer bake

- out

Analyzer cleaning

R esolution adjustment As required As required As required5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 51 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**Table 20.3**

**- 1**  **Analytical Equipment Maintenance**

**Instrument Procedure**  **Frequency**

COMPUTER SYSTEM AND PRINTER: Air filter cleaning Change data system air filter Printer head carriage lubrication Paper sprocket cleaning

Drive belt lubrication As required As required As required As required As required

Gas Chromatograph Check air, H 2 , and He tank levels

Open make up, air and H 2 Change septum Daily Daily Weekly

Balances Working weight check

Clean pan and check if level

Field service Calibrated weight check Daily, when used

Dail y At least annually Monthly

Deionized/Distilled

Water Check Levels on Storage Tanks

Check UV disinfection lights
Record flow rate Record Resistivity Note which pump is on Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Drying Ovens Temperature monitoring

Temperature ad justments Daily As required Refrigerators/

Freezers Temperature monitoring

Temperature adjustment Daily As required pH/Specific Ion

Meter Calibration/check slope

Clean electrode Daily As required

Water Baths Water replaced Daily or as needed5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 52 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

20.3 .2 Initial Instrument Calibration

Initial instrument calibration and continuing instrument calibration verification are an important part of ensuring data of known and documented quality. If more stringent calibration requirements are included in a mandat ed method or by regulation, those calibration requirements override any requirements outlined here or in laboratory SOPs. Generally, instrument calibrations are provided in test methods. Calibration Training is available on the ADHS website http://www.azdhs.gov/lab/license/tech/calibration

- training/index.htm

.

**POLICY**

All initial instrument calibrations are verified with a standard obtained from a

second source traceable to a national standard when commercially available. If a second source is not available, a standard prepared from a separate lot may be used as long as the manufacturer can demonstrate the lot was prepared independently from other lots purchased.

**POLIC Y**  If the reference or mandated method does not specify the number of calibration standards to use, the minimum number is three, not including blanks or a zero

standard.

**POLICY** Any samples that are analyzed after an unacceptable initial calibration are r e

analyzed or the data are reported with qualifiers, appropriate to the scope of the unacceptable condition.

**POLICY** Quantitation is always determined from the initial calibration unless the test method or applicable regulations require quantitation from the continuing

calibration.

**POLICY** The lowest calibration standard is the lowest concentration for which quantitative results can be reported without qualification. The lowest calibration standard is equal to the Limit of Quantitation and is greater tha n the limit of detection.

**POLICY** The highest calibration standard is the highest concentration for which quantitative results can be reported.

**POLICY** Data reported that are greater than the highest calibration standard without

dilution are considered t o be an estimate and are reported with a qualifier code5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 53 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

and explained in the case narrative.

**PROCEDURE** Initial instrument calibration includes calculations, integrations, acceptance criteria, and associated statistics referenced in the test method SOP

**.**

Sufficient raw data records are collected to allow reconstruction of the initial instrument calibration. These include, at a minimum, calibration date, test method, instrument, analysis date, analyte names, analysts signature or initials,

concentration and response, calibration curve or response factor, or unique equation or coefficient used to reduce instrument responses to concentration. Calibration date and expiration date (when recalibration is due) is recorded for equipment requiring calibration, wher e practicable.

Acceptance criteria are listed in the method SOP.

Corrective actions are performed when the initial calibration results are outside acceptance criteria. Calibration points are not dropped from the middle of the

curve unless the cause is de termined and documented. If the cause cannot be determined, the calibration curve is re

- prepared. If the low or high calibration point is dropped from the curve, the working curve is adjusted and sample results outside the curve are qualified.

Results t hat are less than the lower calibration standard are considered to have increased uncertainty, and are either reported with a qualifier code or explained

in the case narrative.

Results that are greater than the highest calibration standard are either dilu ted to within the calibration range, or considered to be an estimate; and are reported with a qualifier code and explained in the case narrative. For instrumentation where single point calibration is recommended by manufacturer’s instructions, such as wit h some ICP and ICP/MS technologies (with a zero and single point calibration), the following apply:

a) For single point plus zero blank calibrations, the zero point and the single point standard are analyzed prior to the analysis of samples, and the linear

r ange of the instrument established by analyzing a series of standards, one of which is at the lowest quantitation level.

b) Zero blank and single point calibration standards are analyzed with each analytical batch for methods where they are specified.

c) A stand ard corresponding to the limit of quantitation is analyzed with each analytical batch and must meet established acceptance criteria when using single point plus zero blank calibrations.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 54 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL d) The linearity of single point plus zero blank calibrations is verified at a frequency established by the method or the manufacturer.

20.3.3 Continuing Instrument Calibration

**POLICY** The validity of the initial calibration is verified prior to sample analysis by use of a continuing instrument calibration verification (CCV ) standard.

**POLICY** Corrective action is initiated for continuing instrument calibration verification results that are outside of acceptance criteria.

**PROCEDURE** Continuing instrument calibration verification is performed at the beginning and
end of each analytical batch, except for instances when an internal standard is used. For methods employing internal standards, only one verification may be performed at the beginning of the analytical batch.

Continuing instrument calibration verification is perfor med whenever it is expected that the analytical system may be out of calibration or might not meet verification acceptance criteria.

Continuing instrument calibration verification is performed when the time period

for calibration or the most recent calibr ation verification has expired.

Continuing instrument calibration verification is performed for all analytical systems that have a calibration verification requirement.

Calibration is verified for each compound, element, or other discrete chemical specie s.

The calculations and associated statistics for continuing instrument calibration
are included or referenced in the test method SOP.

Sufficient raw data records are retained to allow reconstruction of the continuing

instrument calibration verificati on. Continuing instrument calibration verification records connect the continuing verification date to the initial instrument

calibration.

Acceptance criteria for continuing instrument calibration verification is referenced
in the test method SOP.

Some m ethods require a PQL/LOQ or method reporting level calibration verification standard (CRL). The acceptance criteria is either specified in the5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 55 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

referenced method, or the laboratory uses the ADHS default acceptance criteria
of 50

- 150% recovery (See Appendix Q, Exhibit II, Section E).

A second source calibration verification (SCV) may also be analyzed per the referenced method. Depending on the method it may be equivalent to the ICV/CCV or LFB. The method SOP would specify the acceptance criteria.

If ro utine corrective action for continuing instrument calibration verification fails to produce a second consecutive (immediate) calibration verification within acceptance criteria, then a new calibration is performed or acceptable performance is demonstrated after corrective action with two consecutive
calibration verifications.

For any samples analyzed on a system with an unacceptable calibration, some results may be useable if qualified and under the following conditions:

a) If the acceptance criteria are exc eeded high (high bias) and the associated samples are below detection, then those sample results that are non

- detects may be reported as non

- detects.

b) If the acceptance criteria are exceeded low (low bias) and there are samples that exceed the maximum regu latory limit, then those exceeding the regulatory limit may be reported.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 56 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 21**

**– MEASUREMENT TRACEABILITY**  Measurement quality assurance comes in part from traceability of standards to certified

materials.

**POLICY** All equipment used that affects the quality of test results are calibrated prior being put into service and on a continuing basis. These calibrations are traceable to national
standards of measurement where available.

**POLICY** Measurements from laboratory equipment provide the uncertaint y required by test

method or client.

**POLICY** If traceability of measurements to SI units is not possible or not relevant, evidence for correlation of results through inter

- laboratory comparisons, proficiency testing, or independent analysis is provided.

**PROCEDURE** All equipment that affects the quality of test results are calibrated according to the minimum frequency suggested by the manufacturer, by regulation, by method, or as

needed.

Clients can verify that required uncertainty is achieved by reviewing the internal quality control data, if requested.

**21.1 Reference Standards** 

R EFERENCE STANDARDS are standards of the highest quality available at a given location, from which measurements are derived.

**POLICY** Reference Standards, such as ASTM Class 1 weights, are used for calibration only and for no other purpose unless it is shown that their performance as

reference standards will not be invalidated.

**PROCEDURE** Reference standards, such as ASTM Class 1 weights, are calibrated by an entity that can p rovide traceability to national or international standards. The following reference standards are sent out to be calibrated to a national

standard:

a) Class 1 weights are sent out for calibration every 12 months.

b) Reference thermometers are sent out for cal ibration every 12 months.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 57 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**21.2 Reference Materials** 

R EFERENCE MATERIALS are substances that have concentrations that are sufficiently well established to use for calibration or as a frame of reference.

**POLICY** Reference materials, where commercially av ailable, are traceable to national standards of measurement, or to Certified Reference Materials, usually by a Certificate of Analysis.

**POLICY** Internal reference materials, such as working standards or intermediate stock solutions, are checked as far as technically and economically possible.

**PROCEDURE** Purchased Reference Materials require a Certificate of Analysis.

Internal Reference Materials, such as working standards and intermediate stock solutions, are checked according to the SOP.

**a)** Internal therm ometers are checked annually against the NIST certified

reference thermometer.

**b)** Working class weights are checked against Class 1 weights monthly.

**21.3 Transport and Storage of Reference Standards and Materials** 

**POLICY** The laboratory handles and transp orts reference standards and materials in a way that protects their integrity.

**PROCEDURE** Reference standard and material integrity is protected by separation from incompatible materials and/or minimizing exposure to degrading environments or

materials.

Reference standards and materials are stored according to manufacturer’s recommendations and separately from working standards or samples.

**21.4 Labeling of Reference Standards, Reagents, and Materials** 

**POLICY**

Reference standards and materials are trac ked from purchase, receipt, and storage through disposal LIMS.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 58 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**POLICY** Reagent quality is verified before use.

**PROCEDURE** Records for all standards, reagents, reference materials, and media include:

1. The manufacturer/vendor name (or traceability to purcha sed stocks or neat compounds).

2. The manufacturer’s Certificate of Analysis or purity (if supplied).

3. The date of receipt.

4. Reference to the method of preparation.

5. Date of preparation.

6. Where it is stored.

7. An expiration date after which the material shall not b e used (unless its reliability is verified by the laboratory). It may be documented elsewhere if
referenced.

8. Preparer’s initials (if prepared).

9. Dates used.

In methods where the purity of reagents is not specified, analytical reagent grade

is used. If the purity is specified, that is the minimum acceptable grade. Purity is verified and documented according to Section 9, Purchasing, Services, and Supplies.

All containers of standards, reagents, or materials, whether original or prepared,

are labeled with an expiration date and tracked through LIMS.

All containers of prepared standards and reference materials have a preparation date and unique identifier. This laboratory uses LIMS assigned numbers.

Standard preparation records are kept in LIMS and indicate traceability to purchased stocks or neat compounds, reference to the method of preparation, date of preparation, expiration date, and preparer's initials.

Prepared reagents are verified to meet the requirements of the test method according to each SOP.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 59 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 22**

**– SAMPLE MANAGEMENT** 

**22.1 Sample Receipt** 

**PROCEDURE** When samples are received at the laboratory, their condition is documented, they are given unique identifiers, and they are logged into the LIMS.

Sample location is tracked in LIMS or in a laboratory notebook. Most samples are delivered to sample storage, room 1085. Analysts then sign the samples in and out of sample storage for analysis and disposal. Samples with a short holding time may be delivered directly to the unit.

**22.2 Sample**  **Acceptance**

**POLICY**

T he minimum conditions a sample must meet on receipt are:

 Preservation type,

 Bottle type

 Sample integrity

 Full required documentation (sample ID, location, date and time of collection, sampler name, sample type, and analysis requested).

 Holding time

If these conditions are not met, the client is contacted prior to any further processing.

**PROCEDURE** The laboratory checks samples for the conditions above, where appropriate, to evaluate sample acceptance

.

The following preservation chec ks are performed and documented upon receipt:

Thermal preservation:

a) For temperature preservation, the temperature must be within ± 2°C unless

otherwise stated.

b) For samples that require preservation at 4°C, the acceptable range is “from just above freezin g to 6°C”.

c) Samples that are delivered to the lab the same day as they are collected are likely not to have reached a fully chilled temperature. This is acceptable if there is evidence that chilling has begun.

d) Record on the receipt form if ice is present a nd the temperature.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 60 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

The following preservation checks are performed and documented upon receipt

in the unit:

Chlorine checks:

a) Microbiological samples from chlorinated water systems do not require a

chlorine check if

-

 Sufficient sodium thiosulfate is present (to neutralize 5mg/L chlorine for drinking water and 15 mg/L chlorine for wastewater).

 One container from each batch containers is checked for efficacy of the

sodium thiosulfate for 15

- mg/L chlorine for wastewater.

 Chlorine residual is checked in the field and documented.

pH checks:

b) The pH of samples requiring acid/base preservation is checked upon sample receipt or upon initiation of analysis.

The sample acceptance policy is available to sample collection personnel, and emphasizes the need fo r use of water resistant ink, use of appropriate containers, and adherence to holding times, sample volume requirements, and what to do with compromised samples.

Sample submission sheets from the field are maintained by the samplers.

If the checks perfo rmed upon sample receipt indicate the criteria are not met, then 1) the sample is rejected as agreed with the client, 2) the decision to proceed is documented and agreed upon with the client, 3) the condition is noted on the Chain of Custody form and/or la b receipt documents, and 4) the data are qualified in the report.

**22.3 Sample Identification** 

**POLICY** Samples, including subsamples, extracts, are uniquely identified in a permanent chronological record in LIMS to prevent mix

- up and to document receipt o f all sample containers.

**PROCEDURE** Samples are assigned sequential numbers that reference more detailed information kept in the LIMS.

See SOP 9.2.1, Receiving Samples And Logging Samples Into LIMS, for more
information.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 61 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**The following information is co llected in**  LIMS for each bottle:

a) Client or project name

b) Date and time of sampling

c) Date and time of receipt at lab

d) Unique laboratory identification number

e) Unique field LIMS number

f) Initials of recorder

g) Analyses requested

h) Comments regarding rejection (if any)

.

**22.4 Sample Storage** 

**PROCEDURE** Storage conditions are monitored for any required criteria, verified, and the verification recorded in logbooks. This includes temperature.

Samples are held secure, as required. Samples are stored apart from standards,

r eagents, food or potentially contaminating sources, and such that cross

contamination is minimized. All portions of samples, including extracts, digestates, leachates, or any product of the sample is maintained according to the required conditions.

**22.5 Sample Disposal** 

**POLICY** Samples are disposed of according to Federal, State and local regulations. Procedures for the disposal of samples, digestates, leachates, and extracts are contained in the appropriate SOP.

**Sample Storage, Disposition, and Disposa l** 

**Sample Disposal Policy:** ERLN samples must be retained for 60 days. Daily WRF samples are disposed of the day the analysis is complete. All other samples are disposed of after the result is released unless a client requests it be stored longer.

 After s ample analysis the samples are returned to their original location in the refrigerator. A red stick

- on dot is placed on the container signifying that they have been analyzed for all parameters requested.

 The unit supervisors will review the source of the s ample to determine if any of the released sample reports should have the samples retained.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 62 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 The unit supervisors will review the result of the samples to ensure there are no hazardous waste samples.

 The unit supervisors prepare a list of samples for disposa l.

 Any Hazardous waste samples must be given to the CHO.

 The unit supervisors will ensure the samples are disposed.

 A record of when and how the samples were disposed shall be maintained.

 All bacterial samples are autoclaved before disposal.

 Sample digesti ons containing HF are neutralized before disposal.

**HEALTH AND SAFETY WARNINGS**

- Each sample should be treated as a potential health hazard. Appropriate PPE must be worn, and safety procedures as prescribed in the Chemical Hygiene Plan must be

observed.

**22.6 Sample Transport** 

**POLICY** Samples that are transported under the responsibility of the laboratory, where necessary, are done so safely and according to storage conditions. This includes moving bottles within the laboratory. Specific safety operation s are addressed
outside of this document.

**22.7 Sampling Records**  Micro/Wet Chemistry personnel perform sampling for the daily AZPDES discrete samples at Roger and Ina for chlorine, dissolved oxygen, temperature, pH, and E. coli testing 365 days per year. Sampling is performed according to SOP 6.6, Daily Permit Grab Sampling For Chlorine, Dissolved Oxygen, E. Coli, Ph, And Temperature.

Operations personnel, IWC personnel, and Water Quality Personnel perform other sampling necessary.

**POLICY** Sampling pla ns are based, whenever it is reasonable or requested by the client, on appropriate statistical sampling methods.

Sub

- sampling within the laboratory is performed according to SOP 9.2.3, Monthly
QA Plant Pour

- off and distribution of Discharge Monitoring Re port Samples

.

Relevant sampling data are recorded, including the 1) sampling procedure used, 2) the identification of the sampler, 3) environmental conditions (if relevant), 4) the sampling location, and 5) the statistics upon which the sampling procedure s are based.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 63 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**SECTION 23**

**– QUALITY OF TEST RESULTS** 

**23.1 Essential Quality Control Procedures** 

**POLICY** All essential quality control elements are collected and assessed on a continuing

basis.

**POLICY** The qualities of test results are recorded in such a way that trends are detectable, and where practicable, are statistically evaluated.

**POLICY** For test methods that do not provide acceptance criteria for an essential quality control element or where no regulatory criteria exist, acceptance criteria ar e developed or the ADHS rules default acceptance criteria is adopted (Appendix Q, Exhibit II) . Control limits are developed using the mean, plus or minus 3 standard deviations; or static limits such as +/

- 15 percent. These limits can be found in the
SOP f or the method.

**POLICY** The quality control procedures specified in test methods are followed by laboratory personnel. The most stringent of control procedures is used in cases where multiple controls are offered. If it is not clear which is the most strin gent, that mandated by test method or regulation is followed.

**PROCEDURE**

To monitor the validity of environmental tests performed, review includes any one or combination of the techniques below:

a) Use of certified reference materials or cultures and/or in ternal quality control using secondary reference materials;

b) Participation in proficiency testing programs;

c) Replicate testing using the same or different methods;

d) Retesting of retained samples; and/or

e) Correlation of results for different characteristics of a sample.

Written procedures to monitor quality controls including acceptance criteria are located in the test method SOPs, except where noted, and include such procedures as:5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 64 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL a) Use of laboratory control samples and blanks to serve as positive and negative controls for chemistry methods;

b) Use of laboratory control samples to monitor test variability of laboratory results;

c) Use of calibrations, continuing calibrations, certified reference materials and/or PT samples to monitor accuracy of the test method;

d) Measu res to monitor test method capability, such as limit of detection, limit of quantitation, and/or range of test applicability, such as linearity;

e) Use of regression analysis, internal/external standards, or statistical analysis
to reduce raw data to final re sults;

f) Use of reagents and standards of appropriate quality;

g) Procedures to ensure the selectivity of the test method;

h) Measures to assure constant and consistent test conditions, such as temperature, humidity, rotation speed, etc., when required by test me thod;

i) Use of sterility checks for equipment, media and dilution water for microbiology; and

j) Use of positive and negative culture controls for microbiology.

**23.2 Internal Quality Control Practices** 

Analytical data generated with QC samples that fall withi n prescribed acceptance
limits indicate the test method is IN CONTROL

**.**

QC samples that fall outside QC limits indicate the test method is OUT OF

CONTROL (non

- conforming) and that corrective action is required or that the data are qualified.

**POLICY**

Det ailed QC procedures and QC limits are included in test method standard operating procedures (SOPs), or where unspecified in the SOPs, are detailed

elsewhere.

**POLICY**
All QC measures are assessed and evaluated on an on

- going basis, so that

trends are detec ted.

**PROCEDURE The following general controls are used:** 

Positive and Negative Controls such as:

a) Blanks (negative)

b) Laboratory control sample or laboratory fortified blanks (positive)5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 65 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL c) Sterility checks and control cultures (positive and negative).

Selectiv ity is assured through:

a) Absolute and relative retention times in chromatographic analyses;

b) Two

- column confirmation when using non

- specific detectors;

c) Use of acceptance criteria for mass

- spectral tuning (found in test method SOPs);

d) Use of the correct method according to its scope assessed during method validation; and

e) Use of reference cultures (positive and negative) from a recognized manufacturer (where applicable).

Consistency, Variability, Repeatability, and Accuracy are assured through:

a) Proper installat ion and operation of instruments according to manufacturer’s recommendations or according to the processes used during method validation;

b) Monitoring and controlling environmental conditions (temperature, access, proximity to potential contaminants);

c) Select ion and use of reagents and standards of appropriate quality; and

d) Cleaning glassware appropriate to the level required by the analysis. Cleaning procedures not provided in test method SOPs are provided in a separate SOP. For microbiology, glassware care in cludes use of borosilicate glassware, use of detergents designed for laboratory use, testing each day for alkaline or acid residue with bromthymol blue, and conduct of the Inhibitory Residue test when the detergent is changed.

e) Following SOPs and document ing any deviation, assessing for impact, and treating data appropriately;

f) Testing to define the variability and/or repeatability of the laboratory results, such as replicates;

g) Use of measures to assure the accuracy of the test method, including

calibratio n and/or continuing calibrations, use of certified reference materials, proficiency test samples, or other measures;

Acceptance or rejection criteria are created according to laboratory policy where no method or regulatory criteria exist. Acceptance crite ria define the boundary for the appropriate response from laboratory personnel, such as corrective action, reporting with qualifiers, reanalysis, review, and others.

Test Method Capability is assured through:

a) Establishment of the method detection limit ( MDL) where appropriate;5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 66 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL b) Establishment of the practical quantitation limit (PQL) or reporting level;
and/or

c) Establishment of the range of applicability such as linearity;

Data reduction is assured to be accurate by:

a) Selection of appropriate formulae to red uce raw data to final results such as regression;

b) Periodic review of data reduction processes to assure applicability;

c) Microbiological calculations, data reduction, and statistical interpretations specified by each test method.

The following tables summa rize the key elements of a quality control system for a laboratory performing chemistry and microbiology testing.

-

**Item Frequency**  **Acceptance**
**Criteria Corrective action** 

Negative Control (Met hod Blank). 1/batch. Method specific or reporting limit. Qualify data and take

corrective action.

Positive Control (Laboratory Control Sample). 1/batch or by

method requirement. Method specific or

determined by laboratory. Reprocess, reanalyze,

or qual ify data.

Matrix Spike; Matrix Spike Duplicates. Per method

requirement. Method specific or

determined by laboratory. Corrective action and

qualify data.

Surrogate spikes. Per method

requirement. Method specific or

determined by laboratory. Correctiv e action and

qualify data

Matrix Duplicates. Per method

requirement. Method specific or

determined by laboratory. Corrective action and

qualify data

Continuing
Calibration

Verification. Per method

requirement. Method specific or

determined by the

labora tory. Reanalyze standard

immediately; Corrective

action5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 6 7 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**Item Frequency**  **A cceptance** 
**Criteria Corrective action** 

Sterility blank Each lot of media prior to

first use No growth. Investigate cause

Sterility check

containers One container (bottle) for

each lot or batch

sterilized. No growth. Investigate cause

Sterility check

dil ution water One per batch of dilution

water. No growth. Investigate cause

Positive control Pure culture of target

organisms/ each lot or batch of medium (prior to first use of medium) Positive

reaction. Investigate cause.

If necessary reject

the medium

Negative control Pure culture of non

- target

organisms/each lot or batch of medium (prior to first use of medium) Negative

reaction. Investigate cause.

If necessary reject

the medium.

Duplicate colony counts (For

numeric results only) Monthly on one pos itive

sample for each month performed. Same analyst

<5% difference

between counts Two analysts
<10% difference

between counts Investigate cause.

Qualify data

1) Microorganisms may be single use preparations or cultures maintained by documented procedures that demonstrate the continued purity and viability of the organism.5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 68 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

**Table 23.2** 

**- 4**  **Essential Quality Control Requirements for Microbiology**

**– Pour Plate Methods Only** 

**Item Frequency**  **Acceptance**
**Criteria Corrective action** 

Sterility blank

me dia Each lot of media

prior to first use

minimum one blank plate per batch. Internally
defined Investigate cause

**Table 23.2**

**- 5**  **Stock Cultures**

**Item Frequency**  **Handling**

Reference cultures Single use Preserved and handled per mfg. specifications

Refer ence culture
Reference stock Culture stocks to make working stocks Preserved and not refrozen Handling per mfg specs

Working stocks Not transferred more

than five times.

Not sub

- cultured to replace reference stocks

**23.3 Method Blanks** 

**POLICY**
Co ntaminated blanks are identified according to the acceptance limits in the test method SOPs or laboratory documentation.

**POLICY** Samples associated with a contaminated blank are evaluated as to the appropriate corrective action for the samples (e.g. repro cessing or data qualifying codes).

**PROCEDURE** Our laboratory identifies a blank as contaminated when analyte results are greater than two times the MDL or above the reporting limit, as specified in the
method SOP.

When a blank is determined to be contam inated, the cause must be investigated and measures taken to minimize or eliminate the problem.

Data that are unaffected by the blank contamination (non

- detects or other5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 69 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

analytes) are reported unqualified.

Sample data that are suspect due to the presence of a contaminated blank are reanalyzed, qualified, or deleted.

**23.4 Laboratory Control Samples** 

L ABORATORY F ORTIFIED B LANKS

, OR C ONTROL S AMPLES are prepared from analyte free water, and spiked with verified and known amounts of analytes for the

purpose of establishing precision or bias measurements. Also referred to as Blank Spike (BS).

**POLICY** Laboratory control samples are analyzed at a frequency mandated by method, regulation, or client request, whichever is more stringent.

**PROCEDURE**

The results o f laboratory control samples (LCS) are calculated in percent recovery or other appropriate statistical technique that allows comparison to established acceptance criteria. The laboratory documents the calculation in the
test method SOP.

The individual LC S is compared to the acceptance criteria as published in the mandated test method, or where there are no established criteria, the laboratory established limits or refer to the default limits in the ADHS Rules (Appendix Q, Exhibit II).

**23.5 Matrix Spik**  **es and Matrix Spike Duplicates**

M ATRIX SPIKES (MS and MSD [duplicates]) are environmental samples fortified with a known amount of analyte to help assess the affect of the matrix on method performance. MS and MSD, when appropriate to the method, are perfor med at a minimum frequency of 5% of the samples.

**POLICY** The MS/MSD results are used to help assess the effect of the sample matrix on method performance.

**PROCEDURE** The laboratory procedure for MS/MSD includes spiking appropriate analytes at appropriate concentrations, calculating percent recoveries and relative percent difference (RPD), and evaluating and reporting the results.

Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory uses the mean plus or

minus three standard deviations as the control l imits for MS/MSD or refer to the5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 70 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

default limits in the ADHS Rules (Appendix Q, Exhibit II).

For MS/MSD results outside established criteria corrective action is documented or the data are reported with appropriate data qualifying codes.

**23.6 Surrogate**  **Spikes**

S URROGATES are substances with chemical properties and behaviors similar to the analytes of interest used to assess method performance in individual samples.

**POLICY** Surrogates are added to all samples (in test methods where surrogate use is

app ropriate) prior to sample preparation or extraction.

**PROCEDURE** Surrogate recovery results are compared to the acceptance criteria as published

in the mandated test method.

Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory uses the mean plus or

min us three standard deviations as surrogate control limits or may default to the
ADHS Rules of 70

- 130% recovery (Appendix Q, Exhibit II, Section B).

For surrogate results outside established criteria, data are evaluated to determine the impact. Corrective a ctions include qualifying data as appropriate.

**23.7 Proficiency Test Samples or Interlaboratory Comparisons** 

**POLICY** The laboratory participates in proficiency test (PT) samples twice per year.

**POLICY** The laboratory defines holding time for PT samples as beginning when the vial is opened.

**POLICY** The laboratory institutes corrective action procedures for failed PT samples.

**POLICY** The laboratory does not share PT samples with other laboratories, does not communicate with other laboratories regarding current PT sample results, and does not attempt to obtain the assigned value of any PT sample from the PT provider.

**PROCEDURE**5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 71 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Proficiency Testing (PT) or Proficiency Evaluation (PE) samples (or Performance

Evaluation Mixture

– PEM) are treated as typical samples in the normal production process where possible, including the same preparation, calibration, quality control and acceptance criteria, sequence of analytical steps, number of replicates, and sample log

- in. PT samples are not analyzed multiple time s unless routine environmental samples are analyzed multiple times.

**23.8 Data Review** 

**POLICY** The laboratory reviews data generated in the laboratory for compliance with method, laboratory and, where appropriate, client requirements.

**POLICY**

All data re view is documented.

**Data Review PROCEDURE** LIMS and benchsheets are used to record the information required for traceability of the analysis. The bench sheets include quality control measurements and acceptance criteria. Data is recorded on the bench she ets promptly at the time of the analysis, in ink or electronically.

Analysts review sample data and QC information at the time of analysis and indicate if the QC parameters meet the acceptance criteria by marking the bench sheet or approving it electronic ally.

The analyst approves, signs or initials and dates the bench sheet to indicate that they have performed the step indicated and that the analysis meets acceptance criteria or has exceptions that are noted in the bench sheet.

When the analyst has fini shed the primary analysis review the unit chemist specialist or their designee checks the bench sheet for the following items:

a) All required information has been recorded on the bench sheet.

b) QC criteria have been met or exceptions are documented in the bench

sheet.

c) Manual calculations are checked for accuracy.

d) When these checks have been completed, the reviewer initials and dates the bench sheet to document that the review has been performed.

The bench sheet is used by laboratory personnel to enter the data in LIMS. Any exceedences are reported per SOP 9.21, Reporting Exceedences. Data Qualifiers, if necessary, are entered into LIMS as per SOP 9.4, Arizona Data5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 72 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Qualifiers.

The unit chemist specialist verifies the correct number was entere d into LIMS and approves the result in LIMS.

The Laboratory Director reviews the result and approves the result in LIMS.

DM prints the final report and submits it to the QA Unit for final review. This final review verifies that the data is coherent, that QC results are acceptable, QC exceptions are appropriately reflected on the final report, and results are in line with historical values, if known. At least 10% of Final Reports are QA checked.
Please see form QA

- 22, Final Report Check sheet Form, for mor e information on the final report check.

The Laboratory Director or designee signs the final report.

**SECTION 24**

**– REPORTING OF RESULTS** 

**POLICY** The result of each test carried out is reported accurately, clearly, unambiguously, and objectively and compli es with all specific instructions contained in the test method.

**POLICY** Data are reported without qualification if they are greater than the lowest calibration standard, lower than the highest calibration standard, and without compromised sample

or method integrity.

**24.1 Test Reports** 
**POLICY** The report format has been designed to accommodate each type of test performed and to minimize the potential for misunderstanding or misuse.

**PROCEDURE** Each test report generated contains the following information ( unless not required by the client):

a) A title, such as Test Report or Test Results;

b) The name and address of the laboratory, the location of the laboratory if different from the address, and the phone number and name of a contact

person;

c) Unique identifica tion of the test report, such as a serial number, on each page and a pagination system that ensures that each page is recognized as part of the test report and a clear identification of the end of the report, such as 3 of 10;5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 73 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL d) The name and address of the c lient if applicable;

e) The identification of the test method used;

f) An unambiguous identification of the sample(s), including the client identification code;

g) The date of sample receipt when it is critical to the validity and application of the results, dat e and time of sample collection, dates the tests were performed, the time of sample preparation and analysis if the required holding time for either activity is less than or equal to 72 hours;

h) Reference to the sampling plan and procedures used by the labo ratory where these are relevant to the validity or application of the results;

i) The test results with failures identified, units of measurement, an indication of whether results are calculated on a dry weight or wet weight basis, and for
Whole Effluent Tox icity, an identification of the statistical package used;

j) The name, function, and signature or an equivalent electronic identification of the person authorizing the test report, and the date of issue;

k) Certification that the results are in compliance with the EL

- VI

- 2009 TNI Standard if accredited to be in compliance or provide reasons and/or justification if they do not comply.

l) The ADHS designated License Number AZO159 (WESC Lab).

**24.2 Supplemental Test Report Information** 

When necessary for interpret ation of the results or when requested by the client, test reports include the following additional information:

a) Deviations from, additions to, or exclusions from the test method, information on specific test conditions, such as environmental conditions, and any non

- standard conditions that may have affected the quality of the results, and any information on the use and definitions of data qualifiers;

b) A statement of compliance/non

- compliance when requirements of the quality systems are not met, including identification of test results that did not meet sample acceptance requirements, such as holding time, preservation, etc.;

c) Where applicable and when requested by the client, a statement on the estimated uncertainty of the measurement;

d) Additional informa tion which may be required by specific methods or client;

e) Qualification of results with values outside the working range.

For test reports that contain the results of sampling, the following is provided if necessary for the interpretation of the results :

a) The date of sampling;5

- 12

- 12 Rev.7 74 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL b) Unambiguous identification of the material sampled;

c) The locations of the sampling

d) A reference to the sampling plan and procedures used;

e) Details of any environmental conditions during sampling that may affect the interpretations of the test results;

f) Any standard or other specification for the sampling method or procedure, and deviations, additions to or exclusions from the specification

concerned.

**24.3 Environmental Testing Obtained from Subcontractors** 

Test results obtained from test performed by subcontractors are clearly identified on the test report by subcontractor name and/or accreditation number.

The test results from subcontractors are reported in writing or electronically. A copy of the subcontractors report is atta ched to the final report.

**24.4 Electronic Transmission of Results** 

**POLICY** All test results transmitted by telephone, fax, telex, e

- mail, or other electronic means comply with the requirements of this Quality Manual and associated procedures to protect the confidentiality and proprietary rights of the client.

**24.5 Amendments to Test Reports** 

**POLICY** Material amendments to a test report after it has been issued are made only in the form of another document or data transfer. All supplemental reports m eet all the requirements for the initial report and the requirements of this Quality Manual

.

**PROCEDURE** Amended test reports are titled, “Revision # ” or an equivalent form of wording to assure they can be differentiated from other test reports.

When it is necessary to issue a complete new report, the new report is uniquely identified and contains a reference to the original that it replaces.

## Appendix A

– Laboratory Floor Plan

5

- 12

- 12 A 1 of 1

## Appendix C

5

- 12

- 12 C

- 1 of 1APPENDIX D Final Report Example

5/1 2 /12 D 1 of 2APPENDIX D Final Report Example

5/1 2 /12 D 2 of 2APPENDIX E
SOPS

5

- 12

- 12 E 1 of 5 2.1 Sample Container Preparation

2.2 Sample Bottle Preservation

2.5 Preparation of Trip Blanks for 40 ml Clear Septum Vials

2.8 Contract Lab Sample Shipping

5.1.1.1 Glassware Was hing

- Metals

5.1.1.2 Glassware Washing

- Nonmetals

5.1.1.3 Cleaning Procedure for Pipettes

5.1.4 Detection Limits

5.1.5 Criteria for Accepting and Rejecting Data

5.2.2 Mercury

- EPA Method 245.1 and 7470A, Mercury

5.5.3.1 SM4500

- CN - G. Cyanides Amen able to Chlorination after Distillation

5.5.3.2 SM 4500

- CN - E, Cyanide, Total for Water and Wastewater Samples,

Colorimetric Method (LACHAT)

5.5.3.3 Method SM 4500

- CN - C, Cyanide Distillation

5.5.4 Fluoride

– Ion Selective Electrode (SM 4500

- F C)

5.5 .5 Hardness by Calculation

- SM 2340 B

5.5.11 Method SM4500

- SO 4 2

- F, Sulfate Automated Methylthymol Blue (Lachat)

5.5.13 Sulfide

- SM 4500

- S F

5.5.14 Pretreatment and Analysis of Turbid Wastewater Samples, Sulfide, ATP

5.5.15 HACH 8131, Sulfide Methyle ne Blue Method

5.6.2 ICP Analysis of Solid Wastes, Method 6010B

5.6.7 EPA Method 7471A, Mercury in Sludge and Sediment

5.7.4 ICP Maintenance

5.7.5 Maintenance Procedures for Leeman PS 200 Automated Mercury Analyzer

5.8 Quality Control Data and Report

5.10 Method of Standard Additions

5.11.1 Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy (EPA Method 200.7,

Rev. 4.4) Varian

5.12 CEM Microwave Assisted Acid Digestion of Aqueous Samples and Extracts

5.13 Method EPA 1311, TCLP: Extraction Procedure f or Metals

5.15 ICP

- MS Analysis of Water and Waste EPA Method 200.8

5.16 Determination of Metals in Ambient Particulate Matter Using Inductively

Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectroscopy (ICP/MS) EPA IO

- 3.5APPENDIX E
SOPS

5

- 12

- 12 E 2 of 5 5.16.1 EPA IO

- 3.1 Digestion of Ambient Particulate Matte r for use with ICP and

ICP

- MS Analysis

5.16.2 Determination of Metals in Ambient Particulate Matter Using Inductively

Coupled Plasma (ICP) EPA IO

- 3.4

5.16.3 Preparation of Lead Audit Strips

5.16.4 Method EQL 0510

- 191, Determination of Lead in TSP using ICPMS with

Heated Ultrasonic Digestion

5.17.1 ICP

- MS Maintenance

5.18 Chloride in Water (Colorimetric, Automate Ferricyanide) SM 4500

- Cl - E

(LACHAT FIA)

5.19 Method SM 4500

- NO 2 B

, Nitrite Nitrogen (Colorimetric Automated

Diazotization)

5.20 EPA 353.2, Nitrate/Nitrite Nitrogen (Colorimetric Automated Diazotization)

(LACHAT FIA)

5.21 Determination of Orthophosphate and Total P by EPA 365.1 (Colorimetric,

Automated, Ascorbic Acid)

5.22 EPA Method 350.1 Ammonia Nitrogen (Colorimetric Automated Phenate

La chat)

5.22.1 Method SM4500

- NH 3 D Ammonia

- Ion Selective Electrode

5.23 Determination of Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN) EPA 351.2, Semi

Automated Colorimetry

5.24 Method SM 4500

- Cr D, Hexavalent Chromium (Colorimetric)

5.25 For Method 1010A, Ignitability

5.26 Turbidity

– EPA 180.1 (Nephelometric) Analytical Procedure for Water

Samples

5.28 Using the Reagent, Solution, & Standard Traceability Feature in Sapphire

6.1.1 SM 2320B Total Alkalinity

– Titrametric Method

6.1.2 Alkalinity

- In Digested Sludg e (2320B)

6.2.1 SM 5210B Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)

6.3 Hach 8000, Chemical Oxygen Demand

6.4.1 Total Residual Chlorine by Hach Methods

6.4.2 For Hach Method 10014, Total Residual Chlorine

6.5 Multiple

- Tube Fermentation Analysis for Fecal Colifor ms, SM 9221 A, B, C,

D, & E

6.5.2 Multiple

- Tube Fermentation Analysis for Fecal Coliforms, SM9221 A, B, C &APPENDIX E
SOPS

5

- 12

- 12 E 3 of 5

E For Sludges, Soils, Sediments And Muds.

6.5.3 For Method SM 9223B, Total Coliform, Fecal Coliform and E. Coli By Most

Probable Number or Presenc e/Absence (IDEXX Colilert  , Colilert 18  )

6.6 Daily Permit Grab Sampling for Chlorine, Dissolved Oxygen, E. Coli , pH,
and Temperature.

6.9 Methods SM 2510B and Hach 8160, Specific Conductance (Conductivity)

6.16 Method SM 4500

- H + B, pH

6.17 For Method SM 2540G, Total Solids & Total Volatile Solids

6.18 For Method 2540 C, Total Dissolved Solids

6.19A For Method EPA 160.5, Settleable Solids

6.20 For Method SM 2541D & EPA 160.4, Total Suspended Solids & Volatile

Suspended Solids

6.36 Method SM 4500

- O G, Dissolved Oxygen and Hach Method 10360,

Luminescent Dissolved Oxygen

6.37 Microbiological Media and Sample Collection Bottle Preparation, SM 9020B

6.38 Microbiology Bench Quality Control

6.39 Morning Preparation

6.40 Temperature (SM 2550B), Care a nd Use of Thermometers

6.41 Stormwater Procedures

7.1 Organic Glassware Washing Procedure

7.2 Method Detection Limits (MDL) Organic Unit

7.9 Total Organic Carbon Analysis (SM 5310C) Persulfate

– Ultraviolet

Oxidation Method

7.10 Volatile Organic Acids

7.11 Sludge Digester Gas Analysis (By Gas Chromatographic Method SM

2720C )

7.16 Method 1664, Revision A: N

- Hexane Extractable Material (HEM, Oil, and

Grease and Silica Gel Treated N

- Hexane Extractable Material (SGT

- HEM;

Non

- Polar Material By Extraction and Gravimetry

8.1 Determination of Volatile Organics in Wastewater by Purge and Trap Gas

Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometry

8.2 625 Semi

- volatiles by GC/MS

8.2.1 625 Pesticide/PCB by GC/MS

8.2.2 625 Extraction Pesticide/PCBAPPENDIX E
SOPS

5

- 12

- 12 E 4 of 5 8.3 Determination of Volat ile Organics In Groundwater and Municipal Sludge by

Purge and Trap Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry

8.4 8270C Semi

- Volatile by GC/MS

8.4.1 8270C Pesticides/PCB by GC/MS

8.7 Determination of 2, 3, 7, 8

- Tetrachlorodibenzo

- P

- Dioxin (2, 3, 7, 8

- TCDD) in

Wastewater and Municipal Sludge by GC/MS

8.8 Determination of Acrolein and Acrylonitrile in Wastewater by Purge and

Trap Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry

8.9 TCLP Extraction Semi

- Volatile s

8.9.1 TCLP Extraction Procedure for Volatile Compounds

9.1 Laboratory Ethics Policy

9.2.1 Receiving Samples and Logging Samples into LIMS

9.2.3 Monthly QA Plant Pour

- Off and Distribution of Discharge Monitoring Report

Samples

9.3.1 Laboratory Water System Maintenance WESC Building

- (Formerly named

DI (Deioni zed) Water System Maintenance Administration Building)

9.4 Guidelines for the Use of Arizona Data Qualifiers

9.5 Sample Holding Time

9.6 Distribution of Performance Evaluation Sample s

9.9.1 Laboratory Balance Calibration and Maintenance

9.14 Calibration of Micro Pipette (Gravimetric)

9.18 Managing Laboratory Standard Operating Procedures

9.20 Adding and Revising Documents

9.21 Not Analy zed, Not Reported, and Exceedance Reporting Procedure for

AZPDES, APP, Reuse Permits, and IWC Ordinances

9.24 Expression of Results

9.25 Thermometer Calibration, Use, and Maintenance

9.25.1 Operation of Thermometer Calibration Bath

9.26 Quality Contro l Samples

9.28 Proficiency Testing

9.29 Chain of Custody

9.30 Ice

- point Calibration of Reference Thermometers

9.32 Guidelines for Internal Auditing

9.36 Demonstration of CapabilityAPPENDIX E
SOPS

5

- 12

- 12 E 5 of 5 9.38 Management Review

LS 1 Personal Protective Equipment

– Laboratory Gloves

LS 2 Fume Hoods

LS 3 Laboratory Hazardous Waste Disposal

LS 4 Chemical Spills

LS 5 Safe Practices Using HF Acid

LS 6 Introducing New Chemicals into the Laboratory

LS 7 Safe Handling of GlasswareAPPENDIX F ORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5

- 12

- 12 F 1 of 2 Asset
Serial Number PC Tag Item description (Make, Model) Manufacturer Purpose

**ROOM 1079 VOLATILES**

114968 GC CP

- 3800 Varian Volatiles

88895 MS Saturn 2000 Varian Volatiles
US01615907 Purge And Trap Velocity XPT Tekmar Volatiles

VAR12103 Autosample r Archon Varian Volatiles
SN 020905007 Refrigerator/Freezer

5.5 cu. ft. Fisher Sci Volatiles

97

- 935

- 2 Refrigerator/Freezer

5.5 cu. ft. Marvel Volatiles

----- Zero headspace extraction Associated Design & Manufg Co. TCLP

13274
PC

- 93934 GC/MS CP

- 38 00
Saturn 2000 Varian Volatiles

SN US09030001
PC

- 116913 Autosampler, Solatek 72 Tekmar Volatiles

US09023002
PC

- 116912 Purge And Trap, Stratum Tekmar Volatiles

CN11481003 (GC) US11493935 (MS) GC

- MS Agilent Volatiles

US11344 003 Autosampler/Purge & Trap (Foam Sensor) Teledyne Leeman Volatiles

**ROOM 1082 SAMPLE PREP, EXTRACTIONS**

PC

- 97211 SPE

- DEX 3000XL Horizon Tech Oil and Grease

PC

- 97210 SPE

- DEX 3000XL Horizon Tech Oil and Grease

PC

- 97878 SPE

- DEX 3000XL Horizon Tech Oil an d Grease

1120280108
PC

- 100696 Analytical Balance Mettler Reagents, Oil
and Grease

DAA

- V132

- GB Vacuum Pump (Oil & Grease) GAST Oil and Grease

PC

- 95390 Solvent Recovery system Horizon Tech Oil & Grease

----- Solvent Evaporator Horizon Tech Oil & Greas e
107440 Glassware Oven Grieve Semi

- volatiles

PC

- 54904 Vacuum Oven Fisher Scientific Various
PC

- 112111 Concentrator Dry Vap Horizon Tech Pesticide

PC

- 112110 (6) Extractor SPE

- DEX 4790 Horizon Tech Pesticide
PC

- 91606 Liq

- Liq Extractor (BNA) Organomati on Assoc. Semi

- volatiles

PC

- 91604 Liq

- Liq Extractor (BNA) Organomation Assoc.

PC

- 76874 Liq

- Liq Extractor (BNA) Organomation Assoc.

267059

- B NANOpure Ultra Pure Water Barnstead Water Purity

PC

- 83556 Centrifuge, HN

- SII IEC

Y10W

- 689718

- YW Refrigerat or/Freezer Thermo Sci Revco

0146005901111123 Refrigerator Thermo Sci

PC

- 91505 Chiller (BNA) NESLABAPPENDIX F ORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5

- 12

- 12 F 2 of 2 Asset
Serial Number PC Tag Item description (Make, Model) Manufacturer Purpose

----- Chiller VWR

**ROOM 1083 COMPOUNDS OF EMERGING CONCERN** 

4024 GC

- MS + Auto

- sampler Leco

5101 GC

- MS + Auto

- sampler Leco

Y10W

- 689720

- YW Refriger ator/Freezer Thermo Sci Revco
**ROOM 1084 SEMIVOLATILES**

C70264250004US
PC

- 107700 GC/MS
QP

- 2010/GC2010 Shimadzu Semi

- volatiles

116179 Smart UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply SURT003 Semi

- volatiles

PC

- 95574 Refrigerator/Freezer Fisher Scientific

CN614390 38
PC

- 114465 GC 6890N Agilent Pesticides

PC

- 114465 GC/MS, Pegasus IV Leco Pesticides

116180 Smart UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply ---- Pesticides

911204
PC

- 83815 Gas Partitioner
Tremetrics 541GC Tremetrics Sludge Gas Analysis
C118049 Gas Chromatogra ph
GC

- 2010 Plus Shimadzu Sludge Gas Analysis
HG1100115613 Hydrogen Generator Perkin Elmer

1084 Gas Chromatograph
FID GC

- 2014 Shimadzu Volatile Acids

1084 TOC Analyzer, Phoenix 8000 Tekmar Dohrman TOCAPPENDIX G INORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5

- 12

- 12 G 1 of 2 Asset or Serial Number PC Tag Item description (make, model) & Location Manufacturer Purpose

**ROOM 1063 NUTRIENTS**

SN 070500000450 FIA 8500 W pump Lachat Nutrients

010797A520 XYZ Auto Sampler
ASX520 Lachat Nutrients

PC 103741 Block Digester Lachat

A83000

- 1825 FIA 8000 series W/ pump (SN A82000

- 612) Lachat Nutrients

A81010

- 508 XYZ Auto Sampler
ASX520 Lachat Nutrients

----- FIA 8500 w/ pump) Lachat Nutrients

----- XYZ auto sampler Lachat Nutrients
SN18104358 Analytical Balance PI225D Denver Instr. Weighing

P117368 XS205 Balance Mettler Toledo

B114126748 Balance (top load) Mettler Toledo

B102102312 Balance (side load) Mettler Toledo
SN 1378936 Asset Tag WW000457 DR3800 Spectrophotome ter Hach Sulfide

----- DR 2010 Spectrophotometer Hach Hexaval ent
Chromium

0146007301111130 Refrigerator #2 Thermo Sci Stds and reagents

0168968101111114 Refrigerator #1 Thermo Sci Stds and reagents

980608

- 198TS

- Z
PC9?469 Heat Block Environmental Express Total Phos

SN 5060262
SN 82000

- 127 Pump Lachat Back for FIA

**ROOM 1064 TRACE METALS PREP**

90NML48540

- 1 Chiller

HX

- 150 Neslab (Thermo Fisher) Cooling Instruments

MD5023 Microwave CEM Metals Digestion
PC

- 000395 Ultra Sonic Cleaner Model
60/H Tovatec ELMA Air Filter Lead

PC

- 000455 Ultra Sonic Cleaner Model
60/H Tovatec ELMA Air Filter Lead

257062

- 9 NANOpure Water Filtration Barnstead Water Purifier

----- Refrigerator 5.5 ft 3 Thermo Sci

----- Acid Neutralizing System BPE (Burt

Process Equipment) Acid Neutralization

103510 Mars5 Microwave Digestion CEM Metals Digestion

**ROOM 1065 TRACE METALS**

PC

- 116922 ICP 725

- ES Varian MetalsAPPENDIX G INORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5

- 12

- 12 G 2 of 2 Asset or Serial Number PC Tag Item description (make, model) & Location Manufacturer Purpose

w/ Chiller & Autosampler

81XN1111702 NexION

300

- ICP

- MS Seko In Storeroom

----- Chiller Perkin Elmer In Storeroom

----- Vacuum Pump Seko In Storeroom

81XN1111701 NexION

300

- ICP

- MS Seko In Storeroom

----- Chiller Perkin Elmer In Storeroom

----- Vacuum Pump Seko In Storeroom **ROOM 1069 LOW LEVEL Hg PREP**

**ROOM 1070 LOW LEVEL Hg**

----- Low Level Mercury Analyzer Teledyne In Storeroom **ROOM 1071 HIGH LEVEL Hg**

112108 Mercury AA An alyzer Hydra w/ Autosampler Teledyne

Leeman Mercury HL

----- Hotblock
SC151

- 35

- Well w/enclosure Environmental Express Mercury Digestion

**INA**

**- TO BE DISCARDED** 

98310 Mercury AF Analyzer Hydra Teledyne Leeman Mercury LL

86707 Fume Hood (Nutrient TKN's) Labconco Nutrient

Fume Hood (Metals/HF ) Labconco Metals

Fume Hood (Mercury Digestion per EPA 245.7) Labconco Mercury

85167 Lachat FIA Lachat

89062 TJA ICP IRIS
w/Chiller & autosampler Thermo Fisher Metals Testing

100737 VG PQ Excel
w/chiller and

a utosampler Thermo Fisher Metals Testing

88397 MDS 2100 Microwave Digestion System CEM Corp Metals Samples Digestion

72149 MDS 81D Microwave Digestion System CEM Corp Metals Samples Digestion

----- Analytical Balance

A2005 Sartorius WeighingAppendix H Quality Assurance Inventory

5/12/12 H 1 of 2 Asset
Serial number PC Tag Item description (make, model) Manufacturer Purpose

**ROOM 1044 SAMPLE RECEIVING**

SN 57BE05603 Digital Copier System, printer, scanner, fax
Bizhub 600 **Bldg 1, Sample Receiving**  Konica/ Minolta Sample Receiving

SN

016897420111111 6 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

**ROOM 1046 BOTTLE PREP**

SN 0168 9333 011

111 01 Refrigerator/Freezer

Model # 3764A Thermo Scientific QC Samples Ice, Lab Water

SN 110541833 K Dishwasher
FlaskScrubber

Model# 442 0331 Labconco Bottle Washing

SN 110542233 K Dishwasher
FlaskScrubber

Model# 442 0331 Labconco Bottle Washing

SN G24626 Thermometer Calibration Bath System Ertco Model TCS200

- 35 Thermometer
Calibration

SN 600111000 Oven 104  C Thelco Pre cision Glassware Drying

**ROOM 1065 SAMPLE STORAGE**

0168968601111114 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Micro

0168974301111116 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage Inorganic

0168972901111115 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage Inorganic

0168974101111116 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage Inorganic

0168974001111116 Refriger ator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

WETT

0168973001111115 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

WETTAppendix H Quality Assurance Inventory

5/12/12 H 2 of 2 Asset
Serial number PC Tag Item description (make, model) Manufacturer Purpose

0168968301111114 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage Organic

0168968401111114 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage Organic

0168980901111117 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Micro

01689 81001111117 Refrigerator, 2

- door Glass

Model MR49PA

- GAEE

TS Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Micro

Asset
Serial number PC Tag Item Description (Make, Model) Manufacturer Purpose

**ROOM 1035 WAREHOUSING**

Pallet Jack

Model 4YX97 Dayton Hauling loads

**ROO M 1041 WATER TREATMENT** 

----- Water Treatment System Culligan Water Purity **ROOM 1043 RECEIVING (LOADING DOCK)**

SN 2764

- GO

- 1 Golf Cart, Electric EZ

- Go Sample Delivery

**MISCELLANEOUS LAB**

6LJ05251002 Digital Color System
Studio 5510c Toshiba Hallway Printe r, Copier, Scanner,

FaxAppendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5

- 12

- 12 I 1 of 4 Asset
Serial Number PC Tag Item Description (Make, Model)

Location Manufacturer Purpose

**ROOM 1056 BOD (BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND)**

11187 SP1000 Analyzer Skalar BOD

SN 06143
PC

- 113819 SP1000 Analyzer Skalar BOD

11691 Pump Skalar BOD

WL1136003 Water bath VWR BOD

11J 100031 Dissolved Oxygen Meter Orion DO Analysis

09E 100961 Dissolved Oxygen Meter Orion DO Analysis

SN 06J2165 Dissolved Oxygen Meter YSI DO Analysis

XL94101040 XL25 Accumet pH

021199 3 star meter Orion pH

110643258 K FlaskScrubber Labconco Glassware washer

Y10W689719YW Refrig/Freezer Revco Standards storage

021199 3 star meter Orion pH analysis
**ROOM 1056A BOD INCUBATION**

SN 2116 Walk

- In Incubator (20 degree) Environmental
Growth Chambers
**ROOM 1057 COLIFORMS**

02721 Tray Sealer IDEXX Coliforms

5315 Quanti

- Tray Sealer IDEXX Coliforms

1326983 Ultraviolet Light Cabinet
CM10 Spectroline Coliforms

1828507 Ultraviolet Light Cabinet
CM10 Spectroline Coliforms

247341

- 625 Waterbath

Model 2862 Precision
Thermo Sci Coliforms

110643257 K FlaskScrubber Labconco Media, Coliforms **ROOM 1057A AUTOCLAVE, INCUBATION**

URA010626 Gravity Steam Sterilizer
Model 422LS Getinge Coliforms

SN 04B04792
PC

- 105441 Microprocessor controlled
Steam Sterilizer model
422LS Getinge Coliforms

----- Incubator 35  C ThermoSci Coliforms

----- Incubator 35  C ThermoSci Coliforms

----- Incubator 35  C ThermoSci Coliforms

**ROOM 1058 MEDIA**

PC 116109 Media Incubator in Coliform room (20 degree) Thermo Electron Coliforms

271135

- 3 NANOpure Model 7149 Barnstead Coliforms, BODAppendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5

- 12

- 12 I 2 of 4 Asset
Serial Number PC Tag Item Description (Make, Model)

Location Manufacturer Purpose

ThermoS ci

----- Accudispense Barnstead
ThermoSci Coliforms, BOD

B114126756 Balance

Precision
XP1202S Mettler Toledo Media

----- Refrigerator ThermoSci Standards,Samples

001130 pH meter
4 Star Orion pH, DO

**ROOM 1059 SOLIDS, WET CHEMISTRY**

New Furnace TVS, TVSS

48818 Centrifuge Model HN

- S II Damon/IEC Alkalinity

116954 Thermolyne Type 30428C Furnace (550 degree) Barnstead/ Thermolyne TVS

B015024214 Balance

Excellence Plus
XP1202S Mettler Toledo TS, TVS

B114126747 Balance

Excellence Plus
XP1202S Mettler Toledo TS, TVS

021117 pH meter

3 star Orion pH analysis

XL94101043 Accumet XL25 Accumet pH analysis

1154186 Spectrophotmeter
DR/2800 Hach Chlorine, COD

SN B045085417 Balance
New Classic MF
Model MS 304S/03 Mettler Toledo TSS, TVSS, TD S

116081

- 337 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

111352

- 333 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

111354

- 336 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

113082

- 339 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

113081

- 338 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

113 824

- 343 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

4123215A 104 Oven A Heratherm TS, TSS

SN 42132151 Oven 180  C Heratherm
Thermo Sci TDS

0011 Durabath

Waterbath Baxter TS, TDS

10050C0335 DRB 200

Reactor Black Hach COD

1231255145 Seven Multi Meter Mettler T oledo pH, ConductivityAppendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5

- 12

- 12 I 3 of 4 Asset
Serial Number PC Tag Item Description (Make, Model)

Location Manufacturer Purpose

1231275344 Seven Multi Meter Mettler Toledo pH, Conductivity

113687

- 665 Waterbath Precision
Thermo Sci Conductivity

110300005632 HQ40d Meter Hach Conductivity

B24947/248910

- A

- 10 3Star Meter Orion Conductivity

3995500 Vacuum pump

Model UN726FTP KNF Neuberger TDS

5804AL061743 Centrifuge 5804 Eppendorf Alkalinity

----- Centrifuge (back

- up) In Storeroom

----- Balance (back

- up) In Storeroom **INA OLD LAB (Moving to WESC)**

00171 Automatic Pipetting

Machine Hamilton Media Preparatio n

PC 54607 Centrifuge Damon/IEC

Division Isolate sample

matrix

002795 Conductivity Meter, Digital Model 115 Orion Conductivity Analysis

---------- Dissolved Oxygen Meter

5100 Orion DO Analysis

PC 106153 Incubator 35  C "C" VWR Media

1204

- 007 Refrigera tor, 4  C

97

- 915

- 1 Fisher Cl2

PC48778
PC 47921 Automatic Pipetting Machine (2) Brewer Media Preparation

PC 65534 Incubator 35  C "B"

3010 VWR Coliforms

------- pH meter

510 Oakton pH analysis

------- pH meter

520 Orion pH analysis

XL94101040 Accumet XL 25 Accumet pH analysis

**INA LAB**

----- DR/2800 Hach Chlorine

88967
AN 99000014 Labconco Dishwasher Labconco Glassware Cleaning

48805

- 7

- 9 Walk

- In Incubator (20 degree) Sherer BOD

48804

- 6

- 8 Walk

- In Refrigerator (4 degree) Sherer Sample StorageAppendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5

- 12

- 12 I 4 of 4 **INA OLD LAB (To be discarded, or go to Ops)** 

89693 VWR Model 1370 GM Oven (180 degree) VWR TDS

SN 5600573 Top loading Balance
FY3000 0.1

- 3100g AND Coliform Culture

Media

SN J8055010 Top loading Balance
EK200G 0.01

- 200g AND TS, TVS

SN1117032037 Analytical Bal ance AG204 0.1mg

- 210g Mettler Toledo TSS, TVSS, TDS,

SN04112981117028 Incubator Model #

414004

- 594 VWR Coliforms

PC 73621 Incubator 35  C "A"

1550 VWR Coliforms

PC 87348 Oven 103  C Isotemp Fisher TS, TSS/VSS, RAS, MLSS, Grit

PC 89693
SN 0500597 Ov en, 180  C
1370 GM VWR TDS

92080007632 Reactor Heat Block

16500

- 10 Hach COD

960500014203 Reactor Heat Block

16500

- 10 Hach COD

981000018238 Reactor Heat Block

16500

- 10 Hach COD

920900007829 Reactor Heat Block

16500

- 10 Hach COD

981000018242 Reactor Heat Block

16500

- 10 Hach COD

49263 Steam Table 1437 Boekel TS, TDS

70936 Steam Table 1437 Boekel TS, TDS

Steam Table Precision Scientific TS, TDS

25369 Vacuum Manifold Gelman TSS/VSS, RAS,
MLSS

98909 Waterbath, 44.5  C Linberg Fecal Coliforms**APPENDIX J**

P RESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5

- 12

- 12 J 1 of 4 **PARAMETER METHOD**  **PRESERVATION MAXIMUM** 

**HOLDING TIME CONTAINER** 

Alkalinity SM 2320B Cool

, 4  C 14 days 500

- 1000 ml Plastic or
Glass Acrylonitrile/ Acrolei n (AC/AC) EPA 624 Field

- Sodium

Thiosulfate if Chlorine is pr esent. Cool, 4  C, HCl to pH 4

- 5 3 days w /o preservation, 14 days w/preservation 40ml septa vials, 1 40ml trip blank

Ammonia (as N) EPA 350.1,

SM4500

- NH 3 D Cool, 4  C, H 2 SO 4 to

pH <2 28 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Beryllium (Air filters) Method IO

- 3.4 dry storage none Air Filters Biosolids (a ny parameter) ---------------------- Cool to 4  C, no chemical preservative -------------------- ---------------------------------

Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) SM 5210B Cool, 4  C 48 hours 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) H ACH 8000 Cool, 4  C, H 2 SO 4 to pH <2 28 days 500 ml Glass or Plastic

Chloride SM 4500

- CL E None Required 28 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Chlorine

- Total

Residual H ACH 10014 None Required Immediately 300ml black glass BOD

bottle

Coliforms

- Fecal SM 9221E

SM 9223B Co ol, 4  C,

Na 2 S 2 O 3 , EDTA 6 hours 125

- 250 ml Sterile

Plastic or Glass
Cyanide, Total SM 4500

- CN
BCE Cool, 4  C,

10N NaOH to pH >12, (0.6g ascorbic acid in the presence of Chlorine). 14 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Cyanide, Amenable SM 4500

- CN G Cool, 4  C, 10N NaOH to pH >12, (0.6g ascorbic acid in the presence of Chlorine). 14 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Dissolved Metals EPA 200.7

EPA 200.8 Filter first, Cool, 4  C,

HNO 3 to pH <2 6 months 1 Liter HDPE before filtering, 500ml HDPE after filtering

Diss olved Oxygen SM 4500

- O G None Required Analyze Immediately 300 ml Glass BOD Bottle, Glass stopper
Dissolved Organic SM 5310C Cool, 4  C, H 2 SO 4 to 28 days (filtered & 120 ml Glass w/ Teflon**APPENDIX J**

P RESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5

- 12

- 12 J 2 of 4 **PARAMETER METHOD**  **PRESERVATION MAXIMUM** 

**HOLDING TIME CONTAINER** 

Carbon (DOC) pH <2 preserved) Septa

E.coli by Colilert MPN

Total Coliform by
Colilert SM 9223B Cool, 4  C,

Na 2 S 2 O 3 , 6 hours 100 ml Sterile

Plastic or Glass

Fluoride SM 4500 F

- C None Required 28 days 1000 ml Plastic

Hardness SM 2340B HNO 3 to pH <2 6 months 1000 ml Plastic or Glass
Ignitability EPA 1010A None 28 days 1000 ml Amber Glass
Mercury EPA 245.1
EPA 7470A,

EPA 7471A HNO 3 to pH <2 28 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Metals/Minerals EPA 200.7,
EPA 200.8,

EPA 6010B HNO 3 to pH <2 6 months 500 or 1000ml Plastic or
Glass

Lead in TSP (Air Filters) EQL 0510

- 191 d ry storage none Air Filters

Nitrate/Nitrite (combined result) EPA 353.2 Cool, 4  C, H 2 SO 4 to pH <2 28 days 500 ml Glass

Nitrate & Nitrite (separate results) or

Nitrate alone EPA 353.2/ SM

4500

- NO 2 B Cool, 4  C,

1

- unpreserved

1

- H 2 SO 4 to pH <2 48 hours

28 days 250 ml Glass

500 ml Glass

Nitrite SM 4500

- NO 2 B, Cool, 4  C 48 hours 250 ml Glass
Nitrogen, Kjeldahl EPA 351.2 Cool, 4  C ,H 2 SO 4 to pH <2 28 days 500 ml Glass

Oil & Grease EPA 1664A Cool, 4  C, HCl to pH

<2 28 days 1000 ml Glass

Orthophosphate EPA 365.1 Cool, 4  C 48 hours 250 ml Glass

Pesticides/PCBs EPA 625 Cool, 4  C Field

- Na2S2O3 to be used

for chlorinated samples 7 days until extracted; 40 days

after extraction 1000ml Amber Glass, Teflon Cap

Petroleum Hydrocarbons EPA 1664A Cool, 4  C HCl to p H

<2 28 days 1000 ml Glass

pH SM 4500

- H B None Required Analyze Immediately 500

- 1000 ml Glass or Polyethylene
Phosphorous (T) EPA 365.1 Cool, 4  C H 2 SO 4 to pH <2 28 days 250ml glass**APPENDIX J**

P RESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5

- 12

- 12 J 3 of 4 **PARAMETER METHOD**  **PRESERVATION MAXIMUM** 

**HOLDING TIME CONTAINER** 

Purgeables (VOCs)

– not including AC/AC EPA 624

EPA 8260 Cool, 4  C, ma y be

preserved upon laboratory receipt 7 days unpreserved 14 days preserved 4 X 40ml septa vials
1 trip blank

Residue, Filterable (Total Dissolved Solids TDS) SM 2540C Cool, 4  C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Residue, Nonfilterable (Total Suspended

Sol ids

- TSS) SM 2540D Cool, 4  C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Residue, Volatile (Total Suspended

Volatile Solids

- TVSS) EPA 160.4 Cool, 4  C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Semi

- Volatile Organics (Excluding Pesticides

& PCBs) EPA 625

EPA 8270C Cool, 4  C, Field

-

Na2S2O3 to be used

for chlorinated samples 7 days until extracted; 40 days

after extraction 1000 ml Amber Glass, Teflon Lined Cap

Sludge Gases

– non compliance SM 2720C None Required Analyze immediately 250ml Clear Glass Collecting Tube
Speci fic Conductance SM 2510B Cool, 4  C 28 days 125 ml Plastic or Glass

Sulfate SM 4500

- SO4 F Cool, 4  C 28 days 250, 500, 1000 ml Plastic

or Glass

Sulfide Hach 8131 (Low)

SM 4500

- S F (High) Added in the Field:

Zinc Acetate,

10N NaOH to pH >9 7 days 300 ml G lass BOD (3 Bottles for High Level)

Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) Herbicides EPA 1311

– Contract Lab Cool, 4  C 7 days until extraction; 40 days

after extraction 1000 ml Glass

TCLP Mercury EPA 1311 Cool, 4  C 28 days until extraction; 2 8 days after extraction; 1000 ml Glass

TCLP Metals, except Mercury EPA 1311 Cool, 4  C 180 days until extraction; 180 days

after extraction 1000 ml Glass

TCLP Pesticides EPA 1311 Cool, 4  C 14 days to prepare 1000 ml Glass**APPENDIX J**

P RESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5

- 12

- 12 J 4 of 4 **PARAMETER METHOD**  **PRESERVATION MAXIMUM** 

**HOLDING TIME CONTAINER** 

leachate; 7 days until extraction; 40 days

aft er extraction

TCLP Semi Volatile Organics Cool, 4  C 14 days to prepare leachate; 7 days until extraction; 40 days

after extraction 1000 ml Glass

TCLP Volatile Organics Cool, 4  C 14 days until extraction, 14 days after extraction; Soil Jar s with Septa lids or 40ml Septa vials

Temperature SM 2550B N.P. Immediately 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Total Organic Carbon (TOC) SM 5310C Cool, 4  C, H 2 SO 4 to pH <2 28 days 120 ml Amber Glass Vial

Total, Fixed, and

Volatile Solids in Sludge (TS, TVS) SM 2540G Cool to 4  C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Turbidity, ntu EPA 180.1 Cool, 4  C 48 hours 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Volatile Organic Acids (VOA)

– non compliance SM 6010C None Required

----------------- Analyze immediately**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 1 of 12 **ADEQ:** The Arizona Department of Environmental Quality.

**ADHS:** The Arizona Department of Health Services.

**Analyte:** means the substance or chemical constituent being sought or measured in an analytical procedure.

**APP:** Aquifer Protection Permit issued by Ar izona Department of Environmental Quality.

**ASLAPR**

- Arizona State Library, Archives and Public Records

**Approved method:** An analytical test procedure or technique authorized by the Department to test for the presence of a particular contaminant or

characte ristic and includes an alternate method approved by the Department under R9

- 14

- 610(C) and an approved method used with a method alteration approved by the Department under R9

- 14

- 610(C).

**ASTM:** American Society for Testing and Materials

**AZPDES:** Arizona Po llutant Discharge Elimination System

**Batch:** Environmental Samples that are prepare and or analyzed together with the same process and personnel, using the same lot(s) of reagents. A batch is composed of one to 20 samples.

**BOD** : Biological Oxygen Demand.

**BNAs** : Base, Neutral, Acid Extractable Compounds (See Semi

- Volatiles).

**Calibration Check:** Verification of the ratio of instrument response to analyte amount, a calibration check is done by analyzing for analyte standards in an appropriate solvent. Calibr ation check solutions are made from a stock solution, which is different from the stock used to prepare

standards.

**Calibration Check Standard:** (Continuing Calibration Standard)

- Standard used to determine the state of calibration of an instrument

between periodic recalibrations.

**Calibration model :**  A mathematical form for a calibration curve.

**CHP:** Chemical Hygiene Plan.**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 2 of 12 **COC:** Chain if Custody

**Confidence Coefficient:** The probability, percent (%), that a

measurement result will lie within the confidenc e interval or between the

confidence limits.

**Confidence Interval:** Set of possible values within which, the true value will lie with a specified level of probability.

**Confidence Limit :**  One of the boundary values defining the confidence

interval.

**Continui ng Calibration:**  (Organic Analysis) Analytical standard run every 8 to 12 hours as required by the SOP to verify the calibration of the GC/MS system.

**Continuing Calibration:** (Inorganic Analysis) Analytical standard run every 10 analytical samples or every 2 hours, whichever is more frequent, to verify the calibration of the analytical system.

**Continuous Liquid**

**- Liquid Extraction:**  Used herein synonymously with the terms continuous extraction, continuous liquid extraction and liquid

extraction. This extracti on technique involves boiling extraction solvent in a flask and condensing the solvent above the aqueous sample. The condensed solvent drips through the sample, extracting the compounds of interest from the aqueous phase.

**Control:** A lab fortified blank s piked with a known amount of all method analytes and processed through the analytical scheme. Controls measure accuracy of the procedure.

**Correlation Coefficient:** A number (r), which indicates the degree of dependence between two variables (concentration

- absorbance). The more dependent they are the closer the value to one. Determined based on the least squares line.

**CRAO:** Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Office

**DDT :**  dichloro

- diphenyl

- trichloroethane**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 3 of 12 **Decafluorotriphenylphosphine (DFTPP):** (Organic Analysis) Compound chosen to establish mass spectral instrument performance for

semi

- volatile analysis.

**Digestion Log** : (Inorganic Analysis) An official record of the sample preparation (digestion).

**Dissolved Metals:** (Inorganic Analysis) Analyte elements, which will pass through a 0.45 μm filter.

**DOC:** Demonstration of Capability or Dissolved Organic Compound.

**Dry Weight:** The weight of a sample based on percent solids. The weight after drying in an oven.

**Duplicate:** A second aliquot of a sample that is treated the same as the original sample in order to determine the precision of the method.

**Duplicate Samples:** Duplicate samples are two separate samples taken from the same source (i.e., in separate containers and analyzed independently).

**ECD :**  Electron C apture Detector

**EDB :**  1,2

- Dibromomethane

**Effluent :**  means an outflow, as of a stream that flows out of a facility

**Environmental Sample:** An environmental sample or field sample is a representative sample of any material (aqueous, nonaqueous, or multimedia) collected from any source for which determination of composition or contamination is requested or required. Environmental samples are normally classified as follows: Drinking Water

-- delivered (treated or untreated) water designated as potable water.

Water/Wastewater

-- raw source waters for public drinking water supplies, ground waters, municipal influents/effluents, and

industrial influents/effluents.**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 4 of 12 Biosolids (Sludge **)**

-- municipal sludges and industrial sludges.

Waste / Hazardous waste:

- aqueo us and nonaqueous liquid wastes,
chemical solids, contaminated soils, and industrial liquid and

solid wastes.

**EPA:** United States Environmental Protection Agency

**FID:** Flame Ionization detector

**Field Blank:** Usually an organic or aqueous solution that is as free of analyte as possible and is transferred from one vessel to another at the sampling site and preserved with the appropriate reagents. This serves as a check on reagent and environmental contamination. One field blank should be analyzed with each analytical batch or every 20 samples, whichever is greater.

**Field Measurement:** The determination of physical, biological, or radiological properties, or chemical constituents; that are measured on

site, close in time and space to the matrices being sampl ed/measured, following accepted test methods. This testing is performed in the field

outside of a fixed

- laboratory or outside of an enclosed structure that meets the requirements of a mobile laboratory.

**GC :**  Gas Chromatography

**GC/EC:** Gas Chromatography/El ectron Capture.

**GC/MS:** Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry.

**Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption (GFAA):** Atomic absorption, which utilizes a graphite cell for excitation.

**HEM :**  n

- Hexane extractable material.

**Holding Times (Maximum Allowable Holding Times )**  : the maximum times that samples may be held prior to analysis and still be considered valid or not compromised. (40 CFR Part 136)

**HPLC:** High Performance Liquid Chromatography.**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 5 of 12 **ICP/MS:** Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometry.

**ID:** Identification.

**IDOC :**  Initial demonstration of capability.

**Inductively Coupled Plasma (ICP) :** A technique for the simultaneous or sequential multi

- element determination of elements in solution. The basis of the method is the measurement of atomic and ionic emission by

a n optical spectroscopic technique. Characteristic atomic and ionic line emission spectra are produced by excitation of the sample in a radio frequency inductively coupled plasma.

**In**

**- House:**  At the laboratory’s facility.

**INTELEX** : web

- based environmental, quality, health & safety, and business performance management database.

**Initial Calibration:** Analysis of analytical standards for a series of different specified concentrations; used to define the linearity and dynamic range of the response of the analyti cal detector or method.

**Initial Demonstration of Capability (IDOC)**  **:** A test performed by an analyst, as prescribed by a method, to document the analyst's ability to perform the method.

**Injection :**  Introduction of the analytical sample into the instrument excitation system for the purpose of measuring absorbance, emission, or concentration of analyte. May also be referred to as exposure.

**Instrument Calibration:** (See also Calibration) Analysis of analytical standards for a series of different specified co ncentrations; used to define the quantitative response, linearity, and dynamic range of the instrument to target analytes.

**Instrument Detection Limit (IDL):** Determined by multiplying by three the standard deviation obtained for the analysis of a standard solution (each analyte in reagent water) at a concentration of 3 to 5 times the IDL on three nonconsecutive days with seven consecutive measurements per**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 6 of 12 day.

**Interferents:** Substances that affect the analysis for the analyte of

interest.

**Internal Standard s:**  Compounds added to the sample after sample preparation for qualitative and quantitative instrument analysis; the compounds serve to give a standard of retention time and response,

which is invariant from run

- to

- run with the instrument.

**IPC :**  Instrument Performance Check

**IT:** Information Technology

**KERP:** Kino Ecological Restoration Project

**Kilogram (kg) :**  1000 grams

**L or l :**  liter

**LIMS**

- Laboratory Information Management System, computer software that is used in the laboratory for the management of labor atory samples.(Wikipedia))

**Linear Range, Linear Dynamic Range:** (Inorganic Analysis) The concentration range over which the ICP analytical curve remains linear.

**Matrix:** the substrate of a test sample.

Field of Accreditation Matrix: these matrix definition s shall be used when accrediting a laboratory (see Field of Accreditation).

**Matrix Spike Duplicate (MSD):** A second aliquot of the same matrix as the matrix spike (above) that is spiked in order to determine the precision

of the method.

**MDL** : Method Dete ction Limit.

**Method Blank:** An analytical control consisting of all reagents, internal standards and surrogate standards, that is carried through the entire analytical procedure just like a sample. The method blank is used to**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 7 of 12 define the level of laborator y background and reagent contamination that may have been introduced into the sample during the digestion/extraction

process.

**Method of Standard Additions (MEA):** (Inorganic Analysis) The addition of 3 increments of a standard solution (spikes) to sample a liquots of the same size. Measurements are made on the original and after each addition. The slope, x

- intercept and y

- intercept, are determined by least

- square analysis. The analyte concentration is determined by the

absolute value of the x

- intercept . Ideally, the spike volume is low relative to the sample volume (approximately 10% of the volume). Standard addition may counteract matrix effects; it will not counteract spectral

effects. Also referred to as Standard Addition.

**mg/l :**  milligram per li ter

**Milligram (mg) :**  1/1000th of a gram

**Milliliter (ml) :**  1/1000th of a liter

**Must** : denotes a requirement that must be met. (Random House College Dictionary)

**NA, ND:** Not analyzed; none detected.

**Narrative:** A descriptive documentation of any problems enco untered in processing the samples, along with corrective action taken and problem

resolution.

**PE:** Performance Evaluation.

**Percent Moisture:** An approximation of the amount of water in a soil/sediment sample made by drying an aliquot of the sample at 105  C. The percent moisture determined in this manner also includes contributions from all compounds that may volatilize at or below 105 C, including water. Percent moisture may be determined from decanted samples and from samples that are not decanted.

**Pe rcent Solids**  : The proportion of solid in a soil sample determined by drying an aliquot of the sample.**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 8 of 12 **Performance Evaluation (PE) Sample:** See Proficiency Test Sample.

**pH:** The negative logarithm of the effective hydrogen ion concentration. A scale (0 to 14) representing an aqueous solution’s acidity or alkalinity. Low pH values indicate acidity and high values indicate alkalinity. The

scale’s mid

- point, 7, is neutral. Substance in an aqueous solution ionize to various extents giving different concentra tions of H and OH ions. Strong acids have excess H ions and a pH of 1 to 3 (HC1, pH = 1). Strong bases have excess OH ions and a pH of 11 to 13 (NaOH, pH

- 12).

**Pima County Municipal Code Title 11 Purchasing**

**-** Rules and

Regulations that must be followed by Pima County Employees when

purchasing. See

http://library.municode.com/index.aspx?clientId=16119&stateId=3&stateName=Arizona

**ppb:** Parts per billion (ug/l).

**ppm:** Parts per million (mg/l).

**ppt :**  parts per trillion (μg/mL)

**PQL :**  The practical quantitati on limit (PQL) is the lowest quantitation point that can be reliably achieved within specified limits of precision and accuracy during routine laboratory operating conditions.

**Primary Standard :**  1) A physical standard for a particular parameter which is designated or whose value is accepted without relation or comparison to any other reference.

**Protocol:** a detailed wri tten procedure for field and/or laboratory operation (e.g., sampling, analysis), which must be strictly followed. (EPA

- QAD)

**Purge and Trap (Device):** Analytical technique (device) used to isolate volatile (purgeable) organics by stripping the compounds fro m water or soil by a stream of inert gas, trapping the compounds on an absorbent such as a porous polymer trap, thermally desorbing the trapped**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 9 of 12 compounds onto the gas chromatographic column.

**QA:** Quality Assurance.

**QAO:** Quality Assurance Officer

**QC:** Qual ity Control.

**Quality Control Sample:** a sample used to assess the performance of all or a portion of the measurement system. QC samples may be Certified Reference Materials, a quality system matrix fortified by spiking, or actual samples fortified by spiki ng.

**Reagent Blank:** Usually an organic or aqueous solution that is as free of analyte as possible and contains all the reagents in the same volume as used in the processing of the samples. The reagent blank must be carried through the complete sample prep aration procedure and contains the same reagent concentrations in the final solution as in the sample solution used for analysis. The reagent blank is used to correct for possible contamination resulting from the preparation or processing of the sample. One reagent blank should be prepared for every analytical batch or for every 20 samples, whichever is greater.

**Reagent Water:** Water in which an interferant is not observed at or above the minimum quantitation limit of the parameters of interest.

**Relative Percent Difference (RPD):**  To compare two values, the relative percent difference is based on the mean of the two values and is reported as an absolute value (i.e. always expressed as a positive number or zero).

**Replicate:** Repeated operation occurring wit hin an analytical procedure. Two or more analyses for the same constituent in an extract of a single sample constitutes replicate extract analyses.

**Replicate Sample:** A replicate sample is a sample prepared by dividing a sample into two or more separate a liquots. Duplicate samples are considered to be two replicates. In cases where aliquoting is impossible, as in the case of volatiles, duplicate samples must be taken for the replicate analysis.**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 10 of 12 **Resolution:** Also termed separation or percent resolution. The separation between peaks on a chromatogram, calculated by dividing the depth of the valley between the peaks by the peak height of the smaller peak being resolved and multiplied by 100.

**Retention Time Window** : Usually defined as three times the standar d deviation of the absolute or relative RT of an analyte standard injected

over the course of a 72

- hour period.

**RRT:** Relative Retention Time.

**RSD:** Relative Standard Deviation.

**RT:** Retention Time.

**RT Window** : See Retention Time Window.

**Run** : A continuous analytical sequence consisting of prepared samples and all associated quality assurance measurements.

**RWRD**

- Regional Wastewater Reclamation Department

**Sample:** A portion of material to be analyzed that is contained in single or multiple containers and id entified by a unique sample number.

**Sample Number (LAB Sample Number) :** A unique identification number designated by LIMS for each sample. The LAB sample number appears on the sample Chain

- Of

- Custody which documents information on that sample.

**Sapphire:** The CRAO Laboratory Information Management System

**SD:** Standard Deviation.

**Secondary Standard: A** secondary standard is a standard that is prepared in the laboratory for a specific analysis. It is usually standardized against a primary standard.**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 11 of 12 **Semi**

**- vo**  **latile Compounds:** (Organic Analysis) Compounds amenable to analysis by extraction of the sample with an organic solvent. Used synonymously with Base/Neutral/Acid (BNA) compounds.

**Shall:** denotes a requirement that is mandatory whenever the criterion

for c onformance with the specification requires that there be no deviation. This does not prohibit the use of alternative approaches or methods for implementing the specification so long as the requirement is fulfilled. (ANSI)

**Should:** denotes a requirement tha t is mandatory whenever the criterion for conformance with the specification requires that there be no deviation permissible. (ADHS)

**Standard Curve:** A standard curve is a curve, which plots concentrations of known analyte standards versus the instrument r esponse to the analyte. Calibration standards are prepared by diluting the stock analyte solution in graduated amounts, which cover the expected range of the samples being analyzed. Standards should be prepared at the frequency specified in the appropria te section. The calibration standards must be prepared using the same type of acid or solvent and at the same concentration as will result in the samples following sample preparation. This is applicable to organic and inorganic chemical analysis. See

Ca libration.

**Stock Solution:** Standard solution which can be diluted to derive other

standards.

**Subcontractor:** A subcontractor is an individual or in many cases a business that signs a contract to perform part or all of the obligations of another's contract

. (Wikipedia)

**Suspended:** (Inorganic Analysis) Those elements which are retained by a 0.45 μm membrane filter.

**Synergen:** Asset Management Software used by Pima County

**TCLP:** Toxicity Characteristic Leaching (not Leachate) Procedure**APPENDIX K**
**DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY**

5

- 1 2

- 12 K 12 of 12 **Total Metals:** (Inorg anic Analysis) Analyte elements, which have been digested prior to analysis and have not been filtered.

**Trip Blank:** Usually an organic or aqueous solution that is as free of analyte as possible and is transported to the sampling site and returned to

the l aboratory without being opened. This serves as a check on sample contamination originating from sample transport, shipping, and from the site conditions. One trip blank should be analyzed with each analytical batch or every 20 samples, whichever is great er.

**Validation:** the confirmation by examination and provision of objective evidence that the particular requirements for a specific intended use

are fulfilled.

**Volatile Compounds:** (Organic Analysis) Compounds amenable to analysis by the purge and trap te chnique. Used synonymously with purgeable compounds.

**Water:** Reagent, analyte

- free, or laboratory pure water means distilled or deionized water or Type II reagent water which is free of contaminants that may interfere with the analytical test in question.

**Net Weight:** The weight of a sample aliquot including moisture (undried).Appendix L Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5

- 1

- 12 L 1 of 4 Appendix L

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)

Name Signature InitialsAppendix L Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5

- 1

- 12 L 2 of 4 Appendix L

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)

Name Signature Initials

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)Appendix L Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5

- 1

- 12 L 3 of 4 Appendix L

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)Appendix L Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5

- 1

- 12 L 4 of 4 Appendix L Name Signature Initials

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE

5

- 1 2

- 12 M 1 of 5APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE

5

- 1 2

- 12 M 2 of 5APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE

5

- 1 2

- 12 M 3 of 5APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE

5

- 1 2

- 12 M 4 of 5APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE

5

- 1 2

- 12 M 5 of 5Appendix N

5

- 12

- 12 N 1 of 1

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 1 of 14 FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION
DIGESTION LIST EPA 200.7 IO

- 1 1 JIMMIE BARAJAS Inorganic
CALCULATION OF SULFIDE STOCK

STANDARD IO

- 10,11 2 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

MDLPQLCALC IO

12,13,14,15 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

MDLCALC IO

- 16,17 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Standard Additions Worksheet IO

- 18,19 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

ICPMS Run Data IO

- 2 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

SULFIDE SHEET

- CONTROL WORKSHEET IO

- 20,21,22 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

ICPMS Instrument Parameters IO

- 4 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

ICPMS Digestion List IO

- 5 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Cyanide 2nd Source Control Standardization

Worksheet IO

- 6 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Cyanide Standardization IO

- 7 1 RICHARD M.
AROS In organic

Fluoride Worksheet IO

- 8 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Mercury Sludge Digestion Log IO

- 23 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Mercury Waters Digestion List IO

- 24 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Low Level Mercury Digestion List IO

- 25 1

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 2 of 14 FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION

Be Air filt er Digestion List IO

- 26 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Pb Air Filters Digestion List IO

- 28 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

TCLP Digestion List IO

- 29 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

200.7 Minerals IO

- 30 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

6010B Sludge Digestion Li st IO

- 31 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

TCLP Extraction Log IO

- 32 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

Fluoride Distillation Log IO

- 33 1 RICHARD M.
AROS Inorganic

LIMS Paramlist Addition

- Modification Form 01546 1 NANCY POWELL Laboratory

Review of Reques ts Tenders and Contracts

Form QA

- 23 5 NANCY POWELL Laboratory

SOP Template

- Administrative QA

- 5a 3 CYNTHIA
HOWSER Laboratory

Hach 10014 Ina Log M

- 10 3 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Ina Fecal Coliform M

- 11 3 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Micr obiology

Fecal Low Level M

- 12 2 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

E

- Coli M

- 13 2 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Roger Fecal Coliform M

- 14 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Ina and Roger pH DO Bench Record M

- 15 4 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD M icrobiology

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 3 of 14 FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION Weekly contact (Rodac) plates M

- 16 2 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Monthly air and water plates M

- 17 2 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Monthly Quantitray Sealer Test M

- 18 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Monthly Spore Test and Min Max
Thermometer Check M

- 19 3 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Quarterly Autoclave Timing Test M

- 20 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Roger Road Bench Record Chlorine M

- 21 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

ALK

- pH METER M

- 23 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Roger pH Meter Calibration M

- 24 2 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

IDEXX Bottle Volume Check M

- 25 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

Alkalinity Bench Record M

- 3 3 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

COD Bench Record M

- 4 2 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

pH & Alkalinity Bench Record M

- 5 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

TDS Bench Record M

- 6 2 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

TS TVS Bench Record M

- 7 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

TSS TVSS Bench Record M

- 8 3 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

BOD Bench Record Sheets M

- 9 1 SHAWNEEN R.
MICHAUD Microbiology

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 4 of 14 FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION Monthly Balance Calibration QA

- 11 8 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Therm Cal Check QA

- 12 2 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQ C

Working Weight Precision Check Form QA

- 15 2 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Internal Audit Log QA

- 16 3 CYNTHIA B.
HOWSER QAQC

Employee Roster QA

- 17 1 DAVID W.
FOSTER QAQC

Subcontract Lab Data Checksheet Form QA

- 18 8 NANCY POWELL QAQC

SOP Awareness Cerification QA

- 19 4 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

QA Monthly Report Form QA

- 2 4 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Header QA

- 21 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Review of Request for Analysis QA

- 23 5 NANCY POWELL QAQC Micropipette Calibration

- One Volume QA

- 2 4 2 NANCY POWELL QAQC Micropipette Calibration

- Two Volumes QA

- 25 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC
Corrective Action Form for PT Studies QA

- 26 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC Sample Bottle Sign Out Sheet QA

- 29 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Internal Audit Master QA

- 3 3 CYNTHIA B.
HOWSER QAQC

SOP Template

- Method QA

- 5 4 CYNTHIA B.
HOWSER QAQC

Internal Audit Schedule QA

- 6 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Quality Assurance Master Document List QA

- 7 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 5 of 14 FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION

Pretrip Inspection Form Page 2 S

- 10 1 SHAWN EEN R.
MICHAUD Safety

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION
Task Evaluation for Sulfate MethylthymolBlue Method 00756 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Blue Method Training Checksheet for Sulfate 00757 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic Methylthym ol Blue Method(2)

Pre

- trip Inspection Form 00786 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology
MICHAUD Training Checksheet for balance

calibration 00787 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

checks
Task Evaluation for Settable Solids 00797 1 SHAWNEEN R. M icrobiology

Analysis MICHAUD Training Checklist for 5 Day BOD

Analysis 00798 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD Training Checklist for E. Coli and

Total 00799 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Coliforms by Colilert MICHAUD Training Chec klist for Exceedence

Report 00800 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Procedures MICHAUD Training Checklist for Hach COD

Analysis 00801 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 6 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION Training Checklist for Microbiological

Media 00802 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiolo gy

and Sample Bottle Prep MICHAUD Training Checklist for Residual

Chlorine 00803 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD Training Checklist for Settable Solids 00804 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD Training Checklist for Sp ecific
Conductance 00805 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD Training Checklist for Water Alkalinity 00806 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD Training Checklist forTotal Suspended 00807 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Solids and TVSS MICHAUD Training Checklist Template 00808 2 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology
MICHAUD Training Checksheet for Fecal and

Total 00809 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Coliforms MICHAUD Training Checksheet for Ina Daily

Permit 00810 1 SHAWNEEN R. M icrobiology

Grab Sampling MICHAUD Training Checksheet for pH 00812 1 JOHN HENRY VAN Microbiology

RIPER Training Checksheet for Roger Daily

Permit 00813 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Grab Sampling MICHAUD Training Checksheet for Sludg e

Alkalinity 00814 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 7 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION Training Checksheet for Total

Dissolved 00815 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Solids Analysis MICHAUD Training Checksheet for Total Solids

and 00816 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

TVS Analysis MICHAUD Training Checksheet for balance

calibration 00822 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

checks Training Checksheet for Acid Bath 00823 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Neutralization Training Checksheet for daily DI

Water 00824 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Maintenance Training Checksheet for Exceedane

Report 00825 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Procedures Training Checksheet for Ice Point 00826 3 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Calibration Training Checksheet for Pouroff 00827 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Training Checksheet for QA

- QC 00828 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Bottlewashing Training Checksheet for Sample

Receiving 00829 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

and COC's Training Checksheet for Trip bla nk

prep 00830 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Training Checksheet for

- Inorganic 00831 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 8 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION
Glassware Training Checksheet for Ammonia

Lachat 00832 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis Training Checksheet for Chloride

Lachat 00833 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis Training Checksheet for
Determination of 00834 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Trace Metals by ICP Training Checksheet for

Determination of 00835 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Trace Metals by ICP EPA 200.8 Training Checksheet for
Determination of 00836 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Trace Metals by ICP

- MS 200.8 Training Checksheet for Digestions

for ICP 00837 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

and ICP

- MS Training Checkshee t for FIA Instrument by 00838 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat Training Checksheet for Fluoride ion 00839 2 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic Selective Electrode Analysis Training Checksheet for Ignitability

(Flash 00840 1 RICHARD M. AROS In organic

Point) Analysis Training Checksheet for Kjeldahl

Nitrogen 00841 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis Training Checksheet for Maintenance 00842 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic
Procedures for LEEMAN PS200

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 9 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION Training Checkshee t for Mercury by

Cold 00843 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Vapor Analysis Training Checksheet for Mercury

Sludge 00844 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

and Sediment Training Checksheet for Nitrate

- Nitrite 00845 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lach at Analysis Training Checksheet for Nitrite

Nitrogen 00846 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat Analysis Training Checksheet for Orthophosphate 00848 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat Analysis Training Checksheet for Sulfate 008 49 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic Turbidimetric Analysis Training Checksheet for Sulfides in

Turbid 00850 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Samples Training Checksheet for TCLP

Extraction for 00851 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Metals

Tr aining Checksheet for Total

Cyanide 00852 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis Training Checksheet for Total Cyanides for 00853 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Hazardous Wastes Analysis
Task Evaluation for Sulfides in Turbid 00855 1 RICHAR D M. AROS Inorganic

Samples

Task Evaluation for Lachat FIA

Analysis 00856 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 10 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION Task Evaluation for Cyanide Analysis 00857 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic Task Evaluation for Cyanide Total for 00858 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorga nic

Hazardous Wastes Task Evaluation for Digestion of ICP

and 00859 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

ICP

- MS Analysis
Task Evaluation for Flash Point

Ignitability 00860 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis
Task Evaluation for Fluori de Analysis 00861 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic Task Evaluation for Mercury Cold

Vapor 00862 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis
Task Evaluation for Nitrate

- Nitrite

Lachat 00863 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis
Task Evaluation for Nitrite Nitrogen

Lachat 00864 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis Task Evaluation for Orthophosphate

Lachat 00865 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Printed:
Task Evaluation for Sulfate

Turbidemetric 00866 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Task Evaluation for TKN Lachat

Analysis 00867 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Task Evaluatiuon for Determination of 00868 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic Metals by ICP

- MS EPA 200.8
Task Evaluation for Determination of 00869 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic Metals by ICP

- MS EPA 200.8A
Task Evaluatiuon for Determination of 00870 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 11 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Metals EPA 200.7 Task Evaluation for Mercury

- Sludge

and 00871 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Sediment

Task Evaluation for Ammonia

Nitrogen by 00872 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat
Task Evaluation for Chloride in Water

by 00873 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat
Task Evaluation for 625 Extractions 00874 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Task Evaluation f or Oil, Grease and 00875 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic Petroleum Hydrocarbons EPA 1664

- A

Task Evaluation for Organophosphorus 00876 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Pesticides 8141

- A Task Evaluation for TOC Analysis 00877 1 JULIAN R. PORTILL O Organic
Task Evaluation for VOA's 00878 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic Task Evaluation for Volatile Organics

in 00879 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Groundwater 8260B
Task Evaluation for 625 Pesticides

and 00880 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

PCB' s Task Evaluation for 8270C Pesticides

and 00881 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

PCB's Task Evaluation for Sludge Digester

Gas 00882 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Analysis Task Evaluation for sample receiving 00883 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC Task Evaluation for monthly balance 00884 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 12 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

checks Employee Orientation Plan 00885 3 JUDITH SCHNEIDER QAQC
Task Evaluation for Settable Solids 00889 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD
Task Evaluation for Total Suspended

and 00890 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Volatile Solids Analysis MICHAUD Task Evaluation for 5 Day BOD

readback 00891 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD Task Evaluation for 5 Day BOD setup 00892 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbi ology

Analysis MICHAUD Task Evaluation for COD Analysis by

Hach 00893 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Task Evaluation for Conductivity 00894 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology
MICHAUD
Task Evaluation for E. Coli and Total 00895 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbio logy Coliform by IDEXX Colilert MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for Fecal and Total

Coliform 00896 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD Task Evaluation for pH Analysis 00897 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology
MICHAUD Task Evaluation for Sludge Al kalinity 00898 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD
Task Evaluation for Total Dissolved

Solids 00899 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD
Task Evaluation for Total Solids and

Total 00900 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Volatile S olids MICHAUD Task Evaluation Template 00901 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 13 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION
MICHAUD Training Checksheet for 625 625P 01044 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Extractions Training Checksheet for 625 BNA 01045 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

E xtractions Training Checksheet for Oil and

Grease and 01046 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons Training Checksheet for Organic

Glassware 01047 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Washing Training Checksheet for 01048 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic Organophosphorous Pesticides

Analysis Training Checksheet for the

Determination 01049 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

of Semi

- Volatile Pesticides

- PCB's

8270C Training Checksheet for the

Determination 0105 0 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

of Semi

- Volatile Pesticides

- PCB's

EPA 625 Training Checksheet for Total

Organic 01051 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Carbon Analysis Training Checksheet for Volatile

Organic 01052 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organi c

Acids Analysis Training Checksheet for Volatile

Organics 01053 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

SW

- 8466 Method 8260B
Task Evaluation for Total Dissolved 01054 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

## Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5

- 12

- 12 O 14 of 14 CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION
Solids Analysis MICHAUD Training Checksheet for

Thermometer 01556 1 JUDITH K.
SCHNEIDER QAQC

Calibration, Use, and Maintenance
Subcontract Lab Data Checksheet QA 18 6 NANCY POWELL QAQC

## Appendix P Changes to the QM

5

- 12

- 12 P **1** of **5** Section 3 Added to “Compliance and Regulatory Affairs (CRAO)” to “ The purpose of

this Quality Manual is to outline the quality system for the Pima County RWRD laboratory.

Section

3.2.1 Changed from “Appendix A

- Layout at the Ina Road WRF” to “Appendi x A

–

WESC CRAO Laboratory Floor Plan”.

Section

3.2.1 Added “Appendix Q

- Arizona Administrative Code for Licensing of

Environmental Laboratories”.

Section

3.2.1 Marked Appendix B & C obsolete. Maps for Ina Rd.

Section

3.2.2 Removed, “This Quality Manual uses the references from the 2003 NELAC

Standard, Chapter 5, Appendix, A.”

“Added “This Quality Manual uses the references included in Modules 1

- 7 in the 2009 TNI Environmental Laboratory Sector Standard

– Volume 1

– Management and Technical Requirement s for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis as well as the references listed in the Arizona Administrative Code for Licensing of Environmental Laboratories R9

- 14

- 601 et. seq. (Appendix Q).

This Quality Manual uses the references from the 2009 TNI Standard. “

Section

3.2.2 Added EPA 821/R

- 02

- 013 reference for Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing

(WETT testing).

Section

3.2.2.1 Made this section part of 3.2.2.

Section

3.3 Removed “Appendix A, Chapter 1, 2003 NELAC Standards”

Section

3.3 Added , “AD HS

- Arizona Department of Health”,

Section

3.3 Added , “ BKD

- Breakdown Check Standard, particular to pesticides”

Section

3.3 Added , “ CAL

- Calibration Standard”

Section

3.3 Added, “ CCB

- Continuing Calibration Blank”

Section

3.3 Added, “ CRL

- MRL

- Le vel Calibration Verification”

Section

3.3 Added, “ IBL

- Instrument Blank”

Section

3.3 Added, “ ICB

- Initial Calibration Blank”

Section

3.3 Added, “ IFA

- Interference Check Standard A”

Section

3.3 Added, “ IFB

- Interference Check Standard B”

Section

3. 3 Added, “ PEM

- Performance Evaluation Mixture”

## Appendix P Changes to the QM

5

- 12

- 12 P **2** of **5** Section

3.3 Added, “ SCV

- Second Source Calibration Verification”

Section

3.3 Added, “ SRD

- Serial Dilution”

Section

3.3 Added, “ TUN

- MS Tune”

Section

3.3 Changed, “WET

– Whole Effluent Toxicity” to “W ETT

– Whole Effluent

Toxicity Testing”

Section 4 Changed, “ NELAC” to “TNI”

Section

4.1 Changed, “Arizona Lab License number AZ0139” to “Arizona Lab License

number AZO159”

Section

4.1 Changed, “Reclamation ’s” to “Reclamation’s”

Section

4.1 Changed, “The CRAO Laboratory is located in Building 1 and Building 16 at

7101 N. Casa Grande Hwy. Please reference Appendices A & B for location maps and Appendix C for the Organization Chart.” to “The CRAO Laboratory is located in the Water & Energy Sustainabili ty Center (WESC) at 3035 W El Camino del Cerro, Tucson, Arizona 85745. Please reference Appendices A & B for location maps and Appendix C for the Organization Chart”.

Section

4.2 Changed, “Management includes the Compliance And Regulatory Affairs

Project Manager, Laboratory Supervisor, Inorganic Chemist Specialist, Organic Chemist Specialist, Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Chemist Specialist, and the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist.” to “Management includes the Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Project Manager, Laboratory Supervisor, Inorganic Chemist Specialist, Organic Chemist Specialist, Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Chemist Specialist, WETT Chemist Specialist, and the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist.”

Section

4.2 Changed “The CRAO Lab organiza tion consists of the following four areas.

(See Organizational Chart shown in Appendix C):

1. Inorganic Chemistry Unit

2. Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Unit

3. Organic Chemistry Unit

4. Quality Assurance Unit /Safety/Training/Haz Mat

To “The CRAO Lab organiz ation consists of the following five units. (See Organizational Chart shown in Appendix C):

1. Inorganic Chemistry Unit

2. Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Unit

3. Organic Chemistry Unit

4. Quality Assurance Unit /Safety/Training/Haz Mat

5. Whole Effluent Toxici ty Testing

Section Changed, “ The QAO is responsible for maintaining the laboratory portion of

## Appendix P Changes to the QM

5

- 12

- 12 P **3** of **5** 4.2.3 Intelex  and updating the SOPs, Forms, and data in Intelex  . The QAO

reports to the Laboratory Director” To “The QAO is responsible for updating the SOPs, Forms, and data. The QAO reports to the Laboratory Director. ”
Section

4.2.5 Changed, “The unit supervisor is responsible for annually reviewing,

updating and signing each SOP along with all data forms used by the unit. Each supervisor is responsible for e nsuring the analysts in their unit are properly trained, following accepted methods, and are performing analytical procedures in a manner that is safe to themselves and others in the laboratory.” To: “The unit supervisor is responsible for reviewing, updat ing and signing each SOP along with all data forms used by the unit. Each supervisor is responsible for ensuring the analysts in their unit are properly trained, following accepted methods, and are performing analytical procedures in a
manner that is safe to themselves and others in the laboratory. SOPs must

remain current”

Section

4.2.5

- 4.2.7 Changed “4.2.5WW Laboratory Chemist” & “4.2.6 WW Laboratory

Technician:” TO: “4.2.6 WW Laboratory Chemist” & ”4.2.7 WW Laboratory Technician:”

Section

5.1 Change d “The objective of the quality system and the commitment of

management is to consistently provide our customers with data of known and documented quality that meets their requirements. Our policy is to use good professional practices, to maintain quality, to uphold the highest quality of service, and to comply with the NELAC Standard.” To “The objective of the quality system and the commitment of management is to consistently provide our customers with scientifically valid and
defensible data of known and documented quality that meets their requirements. Our policy is to use good professional practices, to maintain quality, to uphold the highest quality of service, and to comply with the TNI
Standard and ADHS Rules & Statutes.”

Section

6.1 Changed, “SOPs w ill be reviewed and approved for use by the Unit chemist

specialist, the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist, and the Laboratory Supervisor prior to issue.” To “SOPs will be reviewed and approved for use by the Unit chemist specialist, if applicable, the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist, and the Laboratory Supervisor prior to issue.”

Section

6.1
Procedure Changed, “Controlled internal documents are registered in Intelex  . Copies

may be entered by Quality Assurance Office, the System Administer, or by

another User with a Full User Intelex  license. Acceptable file types for

Intelex  are PDF, WORD, and EXCEL. Each document has a unique number. SOP numbers are listed in Appendix E. Current checklists and forms are listed in Appendix O

. Each document has a unique number and is identified with 1) date of issue, 2) revision identification, 3) page number, 4)

## Appendix P Changes to the QM

5

- 12

- 12 P **4** of **5**

the total number of pages, and 5) the at least electronic approval in Intelex  of the issuing authority (i.e. management).

A master list of controlled internal documents is maintained that includes distribution, location, and revision dates is automatically maintained in

Intelex  . A master list of controlled external documents is also maintained that includes title, author, copyright date, and date of p ublication, and location. The controlled document list is maintained by Intelex  . The controlled document list is updated automatically in Intelex 

. Annually a

review of the document is initiated and documented in Intelex  . Documents may be updated more of ten.” To, “ Controlled internal documents are registered tracked by the QA unit. Acceptable file types PDF, WORD, and EXCEL. Each document has a unique number. SOP numbers are listed in Appendix E. Each document has a unique number and is identified with 1 ) date of issue, 2) revision identification, 3) page number, and 4) the total number of pages.
A master list of controlled internal documents is maintained that includes distribution, location, and revision dates is automatically by Quality

Assurance. The controlled document list is maintained by Quality

Assurance. It is the Unit Supervisor’s responsibility to update forms and

documents as needed.”

Section

6.1 Changed, **Policy**

Copies of all SOPs are accessible to all personnel. To, “Policy Copies of all S OPs are accessible to all personnel. Electronic s igned copies are located internally at X: \ CRAO \ Lab Svcs \ _Shared Data \ Lab \ SOPs. Paper copies are distributed to each unit.”

Section

6.3.1 Added to Policy, “ For compliance reporting, the deviation must be an

allowable method modification per the 40 CFR, Part 136.6 and ADHS rules.”

Section 7 Changed, “Contracts for new work may be formal bids, signed documents,

verbal, or electronic. The written form for evaluation of requests, tenders

and contract in availabl e in Intelex  , form QA

- 23.”

To, “Contracts for new work may be formal bids, signed documents, verbal, or electronic. The written form for evaluation of requests, tenders and
contract in available on the G

- drive, form QA

- 23.”

Section 8

Procedure Added, “A current list of licensed parameters for any Arizona certified lab is

accessible on the ADHS website https://app.azdhs.gov/BFS/LABS/ELBIS/ArizonaCertifiedLabs/ ”
Section 9

Procedur e Changed, “All Bid orders are tracked in ORACLE  , the county financial

applications program.” To, “ All Bid orders are tracked in Pima Core, the county financial applications program.”

Various Change Laboratory Supervisor to Laboratory Director.

Section

13 R EMOVED ( IN STRIKEOUT ), “C ORRECTIVE ACTION is the action taken to eliminate

the causes of an existing nonconformity, defect, or other undesirable

## Appendix P Changes to the QM

5

- 12

- 12 P **5** of **5**

situation in order to prevent recurrence (NELAC, 2003). “
Section

13.1 Policy Changed, “Once an exceedenc e or nonconformance is noted, the first

action is an investigation to determine the root cause. Records are

maintained in Intelex  of nonconformance requiring corrective action to show that the root cause(s) was investigated, and includes the results of th e investigation.”

To, “Once an exceedence or nonconformance is noted, the first action is an investigation to determine the root cause. Records are maintained in Y: \ Lab
Svcs \ _Shared Data \ Lab \ Corrective Action of nonconformance requiring

corrective action t o show that the root cause(s) was investigated, and includes the results of the investigation.”

Section

13.2 Changed, “The Unit Chemist Specialist enters corrective Actions into correct

file into Intelex. Quality Assurance Personnel or designees will foll ow

- up in four to six weeks to ensure corrective action is effective. If the problem still exists and was not fixed, the process will start again.” To, “The Unit Chemist Specialist enters corrective Actions into correct file in

Y: \ Lab Svcs \

_Sh ared Data \ Lab \ Corrective Action. Quality Assurance Personnel or designees will follow

- up in four to six weeks to ensure corrective action is effective. If the problem still exists and was not fixed, the process will start again.”

Various Removed all direct references t o Intelex.
Section

20.3.1 Removed Inspect pump well and pump rollers quarterly.

Appendix

J Added dissolved metals**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 1 of 53 **ARTICLE 6. LICENSING OF ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES**

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 601. Definitions**  In addition to the definitions in A.R.S. § 36

- 495, the following definitions apply in this Article, unless otherwise specified: 1. "Acceptance criteria" means the range of satisfactory test results for a parameter. 2. "ADEQ" means the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality. 3. "Affiliate" means a business organization that: a. Controls or has the power to control the business organization that owns the laboratory, b. Is controlled by or could be controlled by the business organization that owns the laboratory, or c. Could be controlled by a third business organization that could also control the business or ganization that owns the laboratory. 4. "Alternate method" means an analytical test procedure or technique that is not an approved method and for which approval is requested under R9

- 14

- 610(C). 5. "Analyst" means an individual who performs compliance testi ng at a laboratory. 6. "Analyte" means the substance or chemical constituent being sought or measured in an analytical p rocedure. 7. "Applicant" means a person or persons requesting an initial or renewal license under R9

- 14

- 603, approval of an alternate

me thod or method alteration under R9

- 14

- 610(C), or approval of an exemption under R9

- 14

- 615(D), and includes, as required under A.R.S. § 36

- 495.03(D), the owner and, if the owner is not the laboratory director, the laboratory

director. 8. "Approved method" m eans an analytical test procedure or technique authorized by the Department to test for the presence of a particular contaminant or characteristic and includes an alternate method approved by the Depar tment under R9

- 14

- 610(C) and an approved method used wi th a method alteration approved by the Department under R9

- 14

- 610(C). 9. "ASTM" means American Society for Testing and Materials. 10. "Blind proficiency testing" means the Department's determination of a laboratory analyst's abili ty to analyze samples

corr ectly, accomplished by submitting samples for testing in such a manner that the laboratory analyst i s not aware that the proficiency testing is occurring. 11. "Business organization" means an entity such as a sole proprietorship, an unincorporated associa t ion, a corporation, a limited liability company, a partnership, or a governmental entity. 12. "Calibration curve" means a graphical display of the functional relationship between the instrum ent or analytical device response and the analyte amount.

13. "Calibration model" means a mathematical form for a calibration curve. 14. "CCC" means calibration check compounds. 15. "CCV" means continuing calibration verification standard. 16. "Client" means a person that submits a sample to a laboratory for complian ce testing. 17. "Contaminant" means a matter, pollutant, hazardous substance, or other substance for which a sam ple is being tested. 18. "Contiguous grounds" means real property that can be enclosed by a single unbroken boundary line that does not enclose property owned or leased by another. 19. "Critical step" means a task in the testing procedure that is required to be performed within a specified time period by regulation, method, standard operating procedure, or quality assurance plan.

20. "Current" mea ns up

- to

- date and extending to the present time. 21. "Data outlier" means a test result that falls outside of acceptance criteria. 22. "Days" means calendar days, excluding the day of the act, event, or default from which a designa ted period of time begins to run and excluding the last day of the period if it is a Saturday, a Sunday, or a legal holiday, i n which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a Saturday, a Sunday, or a legal holiday. 23. "DBCP" means 1,2

- Dibromo

- 3

- chloroprop ane. 24. "DDT" means dichloro

- diphenyl

- trichloroethane. 25. "DOC" means dissolved organic carbon. 26. "ECD" means electron capture detector. 27. "EDB" means 1,2

- Dibromoethane. 28. "Effluent" means an outflow, as of a stream that flows out of a facility.

29 . "EOX" means extractable organic halides. 30. "EP" means extraction procedure. 31. "EPA" means the United States Environmental Protection Agency.

32. "FID" means flame ionization detector.

33. "FL" means fluorescence.

34. "FT

- IR" means Fourier transform i nfrared. 35. "GC" means gas chromatography.

36. "HEM" means n

- Hexane extractable material. 37. "HPLC" means high performance liquid chromatography. 38. "HRGC" means high resolution gas chromatography. 39. "HRMS" means high resolution mass spectrometry.

40. "ICV" means initial calibration verification.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 2 of 53 41. "IDOC" means initial demonstration of capability. 42. "Initial Demonstration of Capability" means a test performed by an analyst, as prescribed by a m ethod, to document the analyst's ability to perform the method. 43. "Investigation" means an evaluation of a licensee's or applicant's compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article conducted by the Department upon its own initiative or upon receipt of a written complaint a nd may include a

labor atory inspection. 44. "IPC" means instrument performance check. 45. "Key reference" means a document incorporated by reference in R9

- 14

- 610(B). 46. "Laboratory inspection" means the Department's assessment of operations at a laboratory to deter mine a licen see's compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article. 47. "LCS" means laboratory control sample. 48. "Level I license" means an approval issued by the Department authorizing compliance testing of o ne to nine total parameters at a laboratory. 49. "Level II license" means an approval issued by the Department authorizing compliance testing of 10 to 17 total parameters at a laboratory. 50. "Level III license" means an approval issued by the Department authorizing compliance testing of more than 1 7 total parameters at a laboratory. 51. "LFB" means laboratory fortified blank. 52. "LFM" means laboratory fortified sample matrix. 53. "Licensee" means a person or persons to whom the Department issues a license to operate a labora tory and includes, as

re quired under A.R.S. § 36

- 495.03(D), the owner and, if the owner is not the laboratory director, the laboratory

director. 54. "Limit of detection" means an analyte

- and matrix

- specific estimate of the minimum amount of a substance that an analytical process can reliably detect, which may be laboratory dependent and is developed according to R9

- 14

- 615(C)(7). 55. "Limit of quantitation" means the minimum levels, concentrations, or quantities of a target vari able such as an analyte that can be reported with a s pecific degree of confidence. 56. "LOQ" means limit of quantitation. 57. "LRMS" means low resolution mass spectrometry. 58. "Method" means an analytical test procedure or technique. 59. "Method alteration" means a change to an established method.

60. "Meth od reporting limit" means the minimum concentration of a contaminant reported after analyzing a samp le in a given parameter, determined after corrections have been made for sample dilution and sample weight. 61. "Mobile laboratory" means a non

- stationary f acility where compliance testing is performed. 62. "MPN" means most probable number. 63. "MRL" means minimum reporting level. 64. "MS" means mass spectrometry.

65. "MSE" means microscale solvent extraction. 66. "NPD" means nitrogen phosphorous detector.

67 . "NPDES" means national pollutant discharge elimination system. 68. "NTU" means nephelometric turbidity units.

69. "ONPG

- MUG" means ortho

- nitrophenyl

- ß

- D

- galactopyranoside

- 4

- methylumbelliferyl

- ß

- D

- glucuronide. 70. "Owner" means a person that has controlling legal or equitable interest in and authority over a laboratory's operations. 71. "PAH" means polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon. 72. "Parameter" means the combination of a particular type of sample with a particular approved meth od by which the

s ample will be analyzed for a particular analyte or characteristic. 73. "PB" means particle beam. 74. "PCB" means polychlorinated biphenyls. 75. "PCDD" means polychlorinated dibenzodioxins. 76. "PCDF" means polychlorinated dibenzofurans. 77. "PDA" means pho todiode array. 78. "PID" means photoionization detection. 79. "POX" means purgeable organic halides. 80. "Precision" means repeatability of measurement data, specifically the similarity of successive i ndependent measurements of a single magnitude generated by repeated applications of a process under specified conditions. 81. "Proficiency testing" means a proficiency testing service's determination of a laboratory analys t's ability to analyze samples correctly, accomplished by submitting samples to the labor atory for testing and then analyzing the acceptability of the results. 82. "Proficiency testing service" means an independent service acceptable to the EPA or, if the EPA has not indicated acceptance of a proficiency testing service for a parameter, accept able to the Department based on recognition from a national organization such as the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program. 83. "Qualified" means explained in documentation.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 3 of 53 84. "Quality assurance plan" means documentation that meets the requirements of R9

- 14

- 615(B). 85. "Quality control checks" means the steps taken by laboratory analysts to monitor the accuracy an d precision of sample analysis. 86. "QCS" means quality control sample. 87. "RDX" means Hexahydro

- 1,3,5

- trinitro

- 1,3,5

- triazin e. 88. "Records" means all written, recorded, and electronic documentation necessary to reconstruct all laboratory activities that produce data and includes all information relating to the laboratory's equipment, analytical te st methods, and

related activi ties. 89. "RPD" means relative percent difference. 90. "Ruggedness" means the ability of a method to withstand changes in environmental factors and pro duce repeatable

results. 91. "Sample" means a specimen that is a representative part of a whole or a sing le item from a group. 92. "Single laboratory" means an individual laboratory facility or multiple laboratory facilities lo cated on contiguous grounds and having the same owner. 93. "Small business" means a business organization, including its affiliates, t hat is independently owned and operated, that is not dominant in its field, and that employs fewer than 100 full

- time employees or had gross annual receipts of less than $4 million in its last fiscal year. 94. "SOUR" means specific oxygen uptake rate.

95. "SPE" means solid

- phase extraction. 96. "SPLP" means synthetic precipitation leaching procedure. 97. "Standard operating procedure" means a documented process for carrying on business, analysis, or action, with instructions for performing routine or repeti tive tasks. 98. "Statistical outlier" means an individual data point that has a value far from those of the othe r data points in a set an d that has been determined through statistical analysis to have derived from a different population than th e other data points. 99. "TCLP" means toxicity characteristics leaching procedure.

100. "TDS" means total dissolved solids.

101. "TE" means thermal extraction.

102. "TNT" means trinitrotoluene. 103. "TOC" means total organic carbon. 104. "TOX" means total organic halides. 105. "Traceability" means the establishment of an unbroken chain of comparisons to the reference of origin. 106. "TS" means thermospray. 107. "TSS" means total suspended solids.

108. "UV" means ultraviolet. 109. "Valid" means that a license, certi ficate, or other form of authorization is in full force and effect and not suspended. 110. "VOC" means volatile organic compound. 111. "VOST" means volatile organic sampling train.

Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Sect ion R9

- 14

- 601 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 601 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006

(Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 602. Exemptions from Applicability**  This Article does not apply to: 1. The laboratories exempted by A.R.S. § 36

- 495.02(A); 2. Compliance testing performed under the Federal Insecticide, Fung icide, and Rodenticide Act, 7 U.S.C. 136

- 136y; or

3. An out

- of

- state laboratory at which only microbiology testing of bottled water is performed and for which the owner holds a current and valid environmental laboratory license or certificate, issued by an other state of the United States, that specifically authorizes drinking water testing.

Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 602 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 602 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4) . Amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006

(Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 603. License Application an**  **d Process; Transferability** A. To obtain an initial or renewal license to operate a laboratory, an applicant shall submit to the Department, within the t ime prescribed in subsection (C), an application completed using a Department

- provided form and includin g:**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 4 of 53 1. The name of the laboratory; 2. The current Arizona license number for the laboratory, if any; 3. The current EPA certification number for the laboratory, if any; 4. The physical and mailing addresses for the laboratory; 5. The telephone number; fax number; and e

- mail address for the laboratory; 6. The name and address of the owner and of each additional person that has an ownership interest in the laboratory; 7. For the owner and each additional business organization with an ownership interest in the laboratory, the name of each officer, principal, and statutory agent; 8. The name of the laboratory director; 9. The type of laboratory: a. Governmental; b. Company, performing internal work only; c. Commercial, for profit; or d. Other, with a description of the type of laboratory operation; 10. The license Level for which the applicant is applying; 11. Whether the applicant is applying to license a single laboratory or multiple laboratories; 12. If the applicant is applying to license a mobile laboratory, the vehicle make, vehicle identification number, and Arizona vehicle license number of the mobile laboratory; 13. If the applicant is applying to license a mobile laboratory that is affiliated with a non

- mobile laboratory, the name of the

non

- mobile labor atory; 14. The name, title, and educational background of each individual authorized to sign final reports for the laboratory; 15. A list of the parameters for which the applicant is requesting to be licensed or, if an applicat ion for a renewal license , an indication that the applicant desires to be licensed for the same parameters as on the current licen se; 16. A list of the instruments and equipment to be used at the laboratory for compliance testing or, if an application for a renewal license, an indicat ion that the applicant is using the same instruments and equipment as used under the current license; 17. A list of the software to be used at the laboratory for instrument control and data reduction in terpretation or, if an application for a renewal licen se, an indication that the applicant is using the same software as used under the current license; 18. If the applicant is applying for an out

- of

- state laboratory, whether the applicant wants to receive technical updates at the laboratory by fax or through the Internet; 19. If an application for an initial license: a. A copy of a proficiency testing report, for the current or most recently completed year, for the state in which the laboratory is located or, if that state does not require proficiency testing , for another state in which the laboratory is licensed or certified, for each of the parameters for which licensure is requested; b. A list of the states in which the laboratory is licensed or certified and the corresponding licen se or certificate number for each state; and c. A copy of a current quality assurance plan for the laboratory; 20. If an application for a renewal license: a. A copy of a current standard operating procedure, limit of detection, and proficiency testing rep ort, if available, for

ea ch parameter newly requested on the application; and b. If the applicant desires to make payments in installments as permitted under R9

- 14

- 608, an indication of this and the monthly, bimonthly, or quarterly schedule for the payments; 21. Except as provided in subsection (J), the fees required under R9

- 14

- 607 and R9

- 14

- 608, payable to the Arizona Department of Health Services by credit card; certified check; business check; or money order; or, i f the owner is an Arizona state agency, purchase order; 22. Attestation, made under oath, that the owner and the laboratory director are aware of all applic able requirements in A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article and that the information provided in the application, including the

information in the do cuments accompanying the application form, is accurate and complete; and 23. The dated and notarized signature of the laboratory director and: a. If the owner is an individual, the individual; b. If the owner is a corporation, an officer of the corporation ; c. If the owner is a partnership, one of the partners; d. If the owner is a limited liability company, a manager or, if the limited liability company does not have a manager, a member of the limited liability company;

e. If the owner is an association or cooperative, a member of the governing board of the association or cooperative; f. If the owner is a joint venture, one of the individuals signing the joint venture agreement; g. If the owner is a governmental agency, the individual in the senior leadersh ip position with the agency or an individual designated in writing by that individual; or h. If the owner is a business organization type other than those described in subsections (A)(23)(b) through (f), an individual who is a member of the business organi zation.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 5 of 53 B. An application may include an agreement between the applicant and the Department that the Departm ent may submit supplemental requests for additional information. C. An applicant shall submit an application:

1. For an initial license for an in

- st ate laboratory, at least 30 days before the applicant intends to begin operating the in

- state laboratory;

2. For an initial license for an out

- of

- state laboratory, at least 60 days before the applicant intends to begin performing Arizona compliance testing ; 3. For a renewal license for an in

- state laboratory, at least 30 days before the expiration date of the current license; and

4. For a renewal license for an out

- of

- state laboratory, at least 60 days before the expiration date of the current license.

D. T he Department may issue a single laboratory license for: 1. A single laboratory; 2. Multiple laboratories that are located on contiguous grounds and have the same owner, if the appl icant submits one application and combined fees for the laboratories; or

3. Multiple laboratories, including mobile laboratories, that have the same owner but are not located o n contiguous grounds,

if: a. The applicant submits a separate application and fees for each laboratory,

b. Each non

- mobile laboratory is located in Arizona , and c. Each mobile laboratory has a current and valid Arizona vehicle registration. E. The Department shall not issue a single laboratory license for multiple laboratories that do not meet the requirements of subsection (D)(2) or (3). F. The Department s hall not consider an applicant to be in compliance with the requirements for licensure, as provided under A.R.S. § 36

- 495.09(A)(5), if the applicant does not pay the appropriate fees required under R9

- 14

- 607 and R9

- 14

- 608. G. The Department shall process a n application as provided in R9

- 14

- 621. H. A laboratory license is valid only for the facility or facilities for which the license is issued and cannot be transferre d to another facility. I. A laboratory license is valid only in the name of the persons to whom it is issued and expires upon a change in laboratory name, laboratory director, or ownership, unless within 20 business days after the change, the Depart ment receives written notice of the change and an application for a new license. J. The Department shall not charge a fee for a license application submitted under subsection (I) and shall issue a ne w license reflecting the change upon determining continued compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and th is Article.

Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 603 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 603 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; Section amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 604. Third Party Accreditation**  A. A laboratory that holds current and valid accred itation issued by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology is exempt from licensure under th is Article, as authorized under A.R.S. § 36

- 495.02, for the term of the accreditat ion. B. If a laboratory's accreditation issued by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program expires or is suspended, revoked, or voluntarily terminated, the laboratory is required to be licensed as provided under A.R. S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3

and this Article.

Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 604 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 604 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; former Sec tion R9

- 14

- 604 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 605; new Section adopted effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Section repealed; new Section made by final

rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 479 8, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 605. Compliance Monitoring**  A. The Department may conduct a laboratory inspection, investigation, or proficiency testing, or any combination of the three , at any time before or during a laboratory's license period. B. The Department shall conduct at least two laboratory inspections before determining whether to co nduct annual laboratory inspections as provided under subsection (C). C. In determining whether to conduct an annual laboratory inspection, the Depa rtment shall consider: 1. The Department's findings at the last two laboratory inspections; 2. The licensee's adherence to any corrective action plans created as a result of the last two labor atory inspections; 3. Whether there has been a change in ownersh ip or laboratory director since the last laboratory inspection; 4. The extent to which the compliance testing performed at the laboratory has changed since the last laboratory inspection or would change as a result of a renewal application; and**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 6 of 53 5. Performa nce on the most recent proficiency testing completed at the laboratory. D. For a laboratory at which drinking water compliance testing is performed, the Department shall co nduct a laboratory inspection at least every three years or as otherwise required by the EPA. E. The Department shall comply with A.R.S. § 41

- 1009 in conducting laboratory inspections and investigations that occur at a laboratory. F. If the Department determines based on a laboratory inspection, investigation, or proficiency test ing, or a ny combination of the three, that a laboratory owner, officer, agent, or employee has engaged in conduct described under A .R.S. § 36

- 495.09(A) the Department shall request that the licensee or applicant submit to the Department a written corre ctive action plan, unless the Department determines one of the following, in which case the Department may take action under A .R.S. § 36

- 495.09: 1. That the deficiencies were committed intentionally; 2. That the deficiencies cannot be corrected within a reasonable peri od of time; 3. That the deficiencies are evidence of a pattern of noncompliance; 4. That the deficiencies are a risk to any person; the public health, safety, or welfare; or the env ironment; or 5. That there is a reasonable belief, as stated in A.R.S. § 36

- 495.09(B), that a violation of A.R.S. § 36

- 495.09(A)(5) has occurred and that the life or safety of the public is immediately affected. G. Within 30 days after receiving a request for a written corrective action plan, a licensee or appl icant shall submit to the Department a written corrective action plan that includes the following for each identified deficien cy: 1. A description of how the deficiency will be corrected, and 2. A date of correction for the deficiency. H. The Department shall accept a writte n corrective action plan if the plan: 1. Describes how each identified deficiency will be corrected, and 2. Includes a date for correcting each deficiency as soon as practicable based upon the actions nece ssary to correct the deficiency. I. If the Departme nt disapproves a corrective action plan, the Department shall send to the licensee or applicant a wr itten notice of disapproval requesting that the licensee or applicant submit to the Department a revised correcti ve action plan for the items that the Depar

tment disapproves. 1. A licensee or applicant shall submit a revised corrective action plan to the Department within 21 days after the date of a written notice of disapproval. 2. If a licensee or applicant does not submit a revised corrective action plan w ithin 21 days after the date of a written notice of disapproval, the Department may take action under A.R.S. § 36

- 495.09. J. A licensee or applicant shall notify the Department when corrective action has been completed. K. Within 30 days after receiving no tice that corrective action has been completed, the Department shall determine whether each deficiency has been corrected and whether the corrective action brings the laboratory operations int o substantial compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and t his Article. L. If the Department determines that a licensee or applicant has not corrected a deficiency or that the licensee or applicant has not corrected a deficiency within a reasonable period of time, the Department may take any enforcement a ction aut horized by law as a result of the deficiency. M. Under A.R.S. § 41

- 1009(G), the Department's decision regarding whether a licensee or applicant may submit a corrective action plan or whether a deficiency has been corrected or has been corrected within a re asonable period of time is not an appealable agency action as defined by A.R.S. § 41

- 1092.

Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 605 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 605 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 9 1

- 4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; former Section R9

- 14

- 605 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 606; new Section R9

- 14

- 605 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 604 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 605 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 606; new Section R9

- 14

- 605 adopted by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 606. Provisional Licensing**  A. The Department may issue a provisional license to a licensee when the Department suspends the licensee's regular licens e because of deficiencies identified in an investigation, laboratory inspection, or proficiency testin g, or any combination of the three, if the licensee a grees to carry out a plan acceptable to the Department to eliminate the deficiencies. B. In determining whether to issue a provisional license, the Department shall consider: 1. The nature of the deficiencies upon which the suspension is based;

2. The lice nsee's history of compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article; 3. The extent to which the public health and safety may be impacted by the continued operation of th e laboratory with a provisional license; and 4. The extent to which the pub lic's interests are served by allowing the licensee the opportunity to correct the deficiencies and continue operating with a provisional license. C. The Department shall issue an amended list of parameters for a provisional license.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 7 of 53 D. A licensee shall re turn its regular license to the Department within 14 days after receiving written notification of li cense suspension. E. A provisional license is valid for a period established by the Department, not to exceed 12 month s. F. A licensee with a provisional li cense who desires to obtain a regular license shall apply for an initial license at least 30 days before the provisional license expires.

G. The Department shall issue a regular license as described in subsection (F) only upon determining that a licensee is in full compliance with the corrective action plan; A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3; and this Article. H. The Department shall not issue a provis ional license to an applicant for an initial license.

Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 606 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 606 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Section citation corrected in p receding historical note; former Section R9

- 14

- 606 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 607; new Section R9

- 14

- 606 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 605 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 606 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 607; new Section R9

- 14

- 606 renumbered from

R9

- 14

- 605 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by

final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 607. Fees**  A. Except as provided in R9

- 14

- 608, an applic ant shall submit the following fees to the Department with each application for an

initial or renewal license: 1. The cumulative method and instrumentation fees for each laboratory, as determined according to Ta bles 1 and 2 in Exhibit I; 2. The following a pplication fees: a. If applying for a single license for a single laboratory, which may include multiple laboratories located on contiguous grounds and having the same owner, the following fee: i. For a Level I license, $1,677;
ii. For a Level II license, $2,130; or iii. For a Level III license, $2,348; or b. If applying for a single license for multiple laboratories not located on contiguous grounds, the following fee for each laboratory: i. For a Level I license, $1,442; ii. For a Level II license, $1,895 ; and iii. For a Level III license, $2,130; 3. An administrative fee of $130 for the proficiency testing to occur during the license period; and 4. If applying for an out

- of

- state laboratory, an annual information update fee of $126. B. The fees paid to th e Department under this Article are nonrefundable, unless A.R.S. § 41

- 1077 applies.

Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 607 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 607 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). S ection citation corrected in preceding historical note; former Section R9

- 14

- 607 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 608; new Section R9

- 14

- 607 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 606 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 607 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 609; ne w Section R9

- 14

- 607 renumbered from

R9

- 14

- 606 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by

final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 608. Installment Payment**  **of Fees by Small Businesses** A. A licensee may, for license renewal, pay the fees calculated under R9

- 14

- 607(A)(1), (3), and (4) to the Department in 12 or fewer installments if the laboratory owner is a small business. B. A licensee who desires to make pay ments in installments as described in subsection (A) shall indicate this on the application for license renewal and shall indicate a monthly, bimonthly, or quarterly schedule for the payments, which shall result in fu ll payment within 12 or fewer months.

C . A licensee making installment payments shall submit the first installment to the Department along with the application for license renewal and the application fee calculated under R9

- 14

- 607(A)(2), and each subsequent installment on a monthly, bimonthly, or quarterly basis, as indicated on the application, or until the fees are paid in full, whichever c omes first. D. A licensee shall ensure that each installment payment is: 1. Paid by the first day of the month in which it is due; and 2. At least equal to the amount calculated by dividing the total fees due under R9

- 14

- 607(A)(1), (3), and (4) by the number of payments indicated on the application for license renewal. E. If a licensee fails to submit an installment within seven days after its due date, the D epartment shall charge a $50 fee for processing the late payment. F. If a licensee fails to submit an installment within 30 days after its due date, the Department ma y initiate action under A .R.S. §

36

- 495.09.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 8 of 53 Historical Note
Adopted effective August 16, 1 985 (Supp. 85

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 608 repealed, new Section R9

- 14

- 608 adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; Section R9

- 14

- 608

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 609; new Section R9

- 14

- 608 renumbere d from R9

- 14

- 607 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 608 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 610; new Section R9

- 14

- 608 adopted by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 609. Proficiency Testing** 

A. At least once in each 12

- month period, and more often if requested by the Department, each licensee or applicant that performs drinking water compliance testing sha ll have at least one laboratory analyst demonstrate proficiency in drinking water compliance testing by participating in proficiency testing provided by the Department, the EPA , or a proficiency testing service. B. Each proficiency testing for drinking wat er compliance testing shall include at least one proficiency testing sample for each parameter for which an initial license or renewal license has been issued or requested. If more than one method is used to test for an analyte, a different lot shall be us ed for each method.

C. At least once in each 12

- month period, and more often if requested by the Department, each licensee or applicant that performs non

- drinking

- water compliance testing shall have at least one laboratory analyst demonstrate proficiency in non

drinking

- water compliance testing by participating in proficiency testing provided by the Department, the EPA , or a proficiency testing service, if proficiency testing is available. D. Each proficiency testing for non

- drinking

- water compliance testi ng shall include at least one proficiency testing sample for each parameter for which an initial license or renewal license has been issued or requested and for which proficiency testing samples are available. E. To demonstrate proficiency for a parameter, test results reported for the parameter shall be within acceptance limits established by: 1. For drinking water inorganic chemistry parameters, the EPA, as provided in 40 CFR 141.23; 2. For drinking water organic chemistry parameters, the EPA, as provide d in 40 CFR 141.24; 3. For lead or copper in drinking water, the EPA, as provided in 40 CFR 141.89; 4. For disinfection byproducts in drinking water, the EPA, as provided in 40 CFR 141.131; and 5. For other parameters, the EPA or the proficiency testing se rvice. F. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that: 1. Each proficiency testing sample accepted at the licensee's or applicant's laboratory is analyzed at the licensee's or applicant's laboratory; 2. Each proficiency testing sample is tested within the ho lding times required for its parameter, using the same procedures and techniques employed for routine sample testing, and calculating the holding time from the time t he sample seal is broken or as indicated in the instructions accompanying the sample;

3. A proficiency testing service provides proficiency testing results directly to the Department; 4. If proficiency testing is provided by the Department, the licensee or applicant submits to the De partment payment for the actual costs of the proficiency testi ng materials; and 5. If proficiency testing is not provided by the Department or the EPA, the licensee or applicant se lects a proficiency testi ng service and contracts with and pays the proficiency testing service directly for proficiency testing

. G. The D epartment may submit blind proficiency testing samples to a licensed laboratory at any time during t he license period.

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 609 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 610; new Section R9

- 14

- 609 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 608 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 609

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 611; new Section R9

- 14

- 609 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 607 and amend ed by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 610. Approved Methods and References**  A. A licensee or applicant shall ensure tha t compliance testing is performed according to an approved method and may use method alterations approved by the Department under subsection (C). B. The approved methods listed by parameter in Exhibit I, Table 1 are found in the following referen ces, which are incorporated by reference with the modifications described below; are on file with the Department; include no fut ure editions or amendments, and are available as provided below.

Key Reference A Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory

- Cincinn ati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 600/4

- 79

- 020, Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes (rev. March 1983), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 9 of 53 A1 Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory

- Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 94/111, Meth ods for the Determination of Metals in Environmental Samples: Supplement I (May 1994), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm. A2 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 93/100, Methods for the Determination of Inorg anic Substances in Environmental Samples (August 1993), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleor d.htm, modified to increase the maximum holding time from 48 hours to 14 days at 4° C for chlorinated, unacidified d rinking water samples

collected for dete rmination of nitrate. A3 Technicon Industrial Systems, Industrial Method No. 380

- 75WE, Fluoride in Water and Wastewater (July 1977), available from Bran & Luebbe Analyzing Inc., 1025 Busch Parkway, Buffalo Grove, IL 60089. A4 Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- R

- 02

- 019, Method 1631, Revision E: Mercury in Water by Oxidation, Purge and Trap, and Cold Vapor Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry (August 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/methods/1631.html. A5 Technicon Industrial Systems, Indus trial Method No. 129

- 71W, Fluoride in Water and Wastewater (December 1972), available from Bran & Luebbe Analyzing Inc., 1025 Busch Pkwy., Buffalo Grove, IL 60089. A6 Herbert P. Wagner et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- B

- 01

- 001, Method 317.0: Determination of Inorganic Oxyhalide Disinfection By

- Products in Drinking Water Using Ion Chromatography with the Addition of a Postcolumn Reagent for Trace Bromate Analysis (rev. 2.0 July 2001), available at www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.htm l. A7 Herbert P. Wagne r et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- R

- 05

- 007, Method 326.0: Determination of Inorganic Oxyhalide Disinfection By

- Products in Drinking Water Using Ion Chromatography Incorporating the Addition of a Suppressor Acidified Postcolumn Reagent for Trace Bromate Analy sis (rev. 1.0 June 2002), available at www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html. A8 Teri A. Dattilio et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- R

- 05

- 008, Method 327.0: Determination of Chlorine Dioxide and Chlorite Ion in Drinking Water Using Lissamine Green B and H orseradish Peroxidase with Detection by Visible Spectrophotometry (rev. 1.1 May 2005), available at www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html. A9 B.B. Potter and J.C. Wimsatt, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 05/055, Method 415.3: Determination of Total Organic C arbon and Specific UV Absorbance at 254 nm in Source and Drinking Water (rev. 1.1 February 2005), available at www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm. B Herman L. Krieger, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 600/4

- 75

- 008, Interim Radiochemical Methodology for Drinking Water (Marc h 1976), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 2 2161. C American Public Health Association et al., Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste water (19th ed. 1995),

available from American P ublic Health Association, 800 I Street, NW, Washington, DC 20001. C1 Hach Company, Hach Water Analysis Handbook (3rd ed. 1997), available from Hach Company, P.O. Box 389, Loveland, CO

80539

- 0389. C2 American Public Health Association et al., Standard Metho ds for the Examination of Water and Wastewater (20th ed. 1998), available from American Public Health Association, 800 I St., NW, Washington, DC 20001, modified to require: a. For drinking water TOC testing: i. That inorganic carbon be removed from each TO C sample before analysis, ii. That each TOC sample not be filtered before analysis, iii. That the pH of each TOC sample be checked and documented before analysis and that the test resu lt be qualified in the final report if the sample pH was >2, and

iv. Tha t each acidified TOC sample be analyzed within 28 days; and b. For drinking water DOC testing: i. That each DOC sample be filtered through a 0.45 um pore

- diameter filter as soon as practical and no later than 48 hours after sampling,

ii. That each DOC sample be acidified after filtration to achieve a pH 2 with minimal addition of the acid specified i n the method or by the instrument manufacturer, iii. That each acidified DOC sample be analyzed within 28 days after sample collection, iv. That inorganic c arbon be removed from each DOC sample before analysis, v. That water passed through the filter before filtration of the DOC sample serve as the filtered bl ank, and vi. That the filtered blank be analyzed using procedures identical to those used for analysi s of the DOC sample and have DOC < 0.5 mg/L; c. For drinking water testing of UV

- absorbing organic constituents: i. That UV absorption be measured at 253.7 nm or 254 nm, ii. That each UV sample be filtered through a 0.45 um pore

- diameter filter before anal ysis, iii. That the pH of UV samples not be adjusted, and iv. That each UV sample be analyzed as soon as practical and no later than 48 hours after sampling; and d. For drinking water disinfection byproducts testing by micro liquid

- liquid extraction/GC

- ECD using method 6251B, that each sample be extracted within 14 days after sample collection. D Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory

- Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4

- 88/039, Methods for the Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water (rev. July 1991), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 10 of 53 D1 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory

- Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4

- 90/020, Methods for the Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water: Supplement I (July 1990), availa ble at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm. D2 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory

- Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 92/129, Methods for the Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water: Supplement II (August 1992), available at http://n epis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm. D3 National Exposure Research Laboratory

- Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 95/131, Methods for the Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water: Supplement III (August 1995), available at http://nepis.epa.gov /pubtitl eord.htm. D4 Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water Technical Support Center, EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- R

- 05

- 004, Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water: Criteria and Procedures Quality Assurance (5 th ed. January 2005),

availa ble at http://www.epa.gov/ogwdw/labcert/labindex.html). D5 J.W. Munch and W.J. Bashe, EPA, Method 549.2: Determination of Diquat and Paraquat in Drinking Wa ter by Liquid

- Solid Extraction and High Performance Liquid Chromatography with Ultraviolet Detection (rev. 1 June 1997), available at http://www.nemi.gov.

D6 Anne M. Pawlecki

- Vonderheide and David J. Munch, EPA, Method 515.3: Determination of Chlorinated Acids in Drinking Water by Liquid

- Liquid Extraction, Derivatization and Gas Chromatography with Elect ron Capture Detection (rev. 1 July 1996), available at http://www.nemi.gov. D7 M.V. Bassett et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- B

- 01

- 002, Method 531.2: Measurement of N

- Methylcarbamoyloximes and N

Methylcarbamates in Water by Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with P ostcolumn Derivatization (rev. 1.0 September 2001), available at http://www.nemi.gov. D8 S.C. Wendelken et al., EPA, Method 515.4: Determination of Chlorinated Acids in Drinking Water by Liquid

- Liquid Microextraction, Derivatization, and Fast Gas Chromatog raphy with Electron Capture Detection (rev. 1.0 April 2000), available at http://www.nemi.gov. D9 Ed K. Price et al., EPA, Pub. No. 815

- R

- 05

- 005, Method 527: Determination of Selected Pesticides and Flame Retardants in Drinking Water by Solid Phase Extract ion and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) (rev. 1.0 April 2005), available at http://www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html. D10 J.W. Munch, EPA, Pub. No. 600/R

- 05/052, Method 529: Determination of Explosives and Related Co mpounds in Drinking Water by Solid Phase Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) (r ev. 1.0 September 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm. D11 J.A. Shoemaker and M.V. Bassett, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/60 0/R

- 05/053, Method 535: Measurement of Chloroacetanilide and Other Acetamide Herbicide Degradates in Drinking Water by Solid Phase Extraction and Liquid Chromato graphy/Tandem Mass Spectrometry (LC/MS/MS) (version 1.1 April 2005), available at http://www.ep a.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm. D12 J.W. Munch and M.V. Bassett, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 05/054, Method 521: Determination of Nitrosamines in Drinking Water by Solid Phase Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography with Large Volume Injection and Chemi cal Ionization Tandem Mass Spectrometry (MS/MS) (version 1.0 September 2004), available at http://www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm. D13 M.M. Domino et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- B

- 03

- 002, Method 552.3: Determination of Haloacetic Acids and Dalapon in

Drink ing Water by Liquid

- Liquid Extraction, Derivatization, and Gas Chromatography with Electron Capture Detection (rev. 1.0 July 2003), available at www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html. E 40 CFR Part 136 app. A (July 2005), available at http://www.acce ss.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr

- table

- search.html). E1 Office of Water Engineering and Analysis Division, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- R

- 93

- 010

- A, Methods for the Determination of Nonconventional Pesticides in Municipal and Industrial Wastewater: Volume I (rev. 1 August 1993), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161. F Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, EPA, Pub. No. SW

- 846, Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods (3rd ed. 1986), as amended by Update I, July 1992; Update IIA, August 1993 ; Update II, September 1994; Update IIB, January 1995; Update III, December 1996; Update IIIA, June 19 99; and Update IIIB, July 2005, available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22 161, and at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/main.htm. F1 Thomas A. Bellar and James J. Lichtenberg, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 60 0/4

- 81

- 045, The Determination of Polychlorinated Biphenyls in Transformer Fluid and Waste Oils (September 1982), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pu btitleord.htm. F2 EPA, Method 5035A: Closed

- System Purge

- and

- Trap and Extraction for Volatile Organics in S oil and Waste Samples (draft rev. 1 July 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm. F3 EPA, Method 4025: Screening for Polychlorinated Dibenzodioxins and Polychlorinated Dibenzofurans (PCDD/Fs) by Immunoassay (rev. 0 Octobe r 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm. F4 EPA, Method 3570: Microscale Solvent Extraction (MSE) (rev. 0 November 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm. F5 EPA, Method 3511: Organic Compounds in Water by Microextraction (rev. 0 November 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm. F6 EPA, Method 5030C: Purge

- and

- Trap for Aqueous Samples (rev. 3 May 2003), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwast e/test/new

- meth.htm. F7 EPA, Method 8015D: Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID (rev. 4 June 2003), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 11 of 53 F8 EPA, Method 5021A: Volatile Organic Compounds in Various Sample Matrices Using Equil ibrium Headspace Analysis (rev. 1 June 2003), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm. F9 EPA, Method 9015: Metal Cyanide Complexes by Anion Exchange Chromatography and UV Detection (rev. 0 November 2004), available at http://ww w.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm. F10 EPA, Method 9013A: Cyanide Extraction Procedure for Solids and Oils (rev. 1 November 2004), avai lable at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm. F11 EPA, Method 7000B: Flame Atomic Absorpti on Spectrophotometry (rev. 2 January 1998), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/up4a.htm#7_series. F12 EPA, Method 7010: Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry (rev. 0 January 1998), av ailable at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer /hazwaste/test/up4a.htm#7_series. G National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Health and Human Service s, Pub. No. 84

- 100, NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods: Volume 1, (3rd ed. February 1984), updated May 1985, August 1987

, and May 1989, available from Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402

- 9325. H Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory

- Research Triangle Park, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 600/M4

- 82

- 020, Interim Method

for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples (December 1982), available at http://www.rti.org/pubs/test

method.pdf. H1 Eric J. Chatfield and M. Jane Dillon, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 600/4

- 83

- 043, Method 100.1: Analytical Method for Determination

of Asbestos Fibers in Wate r (September 1983), available at http://www.nemi.gov. H2 Kim A. Brackett et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 94/134, Method 100.2: Determination of Asbestos Structures over 10 m in Length in Drinking Water (June 1994), available at http://www.nemi.gov.
I ASTM, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vols. 11.01 and 11.02 (1995), available from ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Dr., P.O. Box C700, W. Conshohocken, PA 19428

- 2959. J U.S. Geological Survey, U.S. Department of the Interior, "Methods for Determination of In organic Substances in Water and Fluvial Sediments," published in Techniques of Water

- Resources Investigations of the United States Geological Survey at bk. 5, ch. A1 (3rd ed. 1989), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd. , Springfield, VA

22161. J1 L.L. Thatcher et al., U.S. Department of the Interior, "Methods for Determination of Radioactive Substances in Water and Fluvial Sediments," published in Techniques of Water

- Resources Investigations of the United States Geologic al Survey at bk. 5, ch. A5 (3rd ed. 1989), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA

22161. K Division of State Laboratory Services, Arizona Department of Health Services, Method No. BLS

- 188, Ethylene Glyco l in Waste Water (rev. April 1991); and Bureau of State Laboratory Services, Arizona Department of Health Services, C10

- C32 Hydrocarbons in Soil

- 8015AZ (rev. 1.0 September 1998), available from the Bureau of State Laboratory Services, 250 N. 17th Ave., Phoenix, AZ 85007, and at www.azdhs.gov/lab/license/tech/bls188.pdf and www.azdhs.gov/lab/license/tech/8015azr1.pdf. K1 Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- R

- 98

- 002, Method 1664, Revision A: N

- Hexane Extractable Material (HEM; Oil and Grease) and Silic a Gel Treated N

- Hexane Extractable Material (SGT

- HEM; Non

- polar Material) by Extraction and Gravimetry (February 1999), available at http://www.nemi.gov. K2 Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- B

- 98

- 016, Analytical Methods for the Determination of Pollut ants in Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Industry Wastewater (July 1998), available at http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/guide/pharm/compend1.pdf. L Herman L. Krieger and Earl L. Whittaker, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 600/4

- 80

- 032, Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of Radioactivity in Drinking Water (August 1980), available from National Technical Information Service , 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161. M1 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory

- Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4

- 90/027F, Methods for Measu ring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms (4th ed. August 1993), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161. N1 Environmental Monitoring Systems Labor atory

- Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 600

- 4

- 91

- 002, Short

- Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Water to Freshwater Organisms (3rd ed. Ju ly 1994), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm. O 40 CFR Part 50 (July 2006), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr

- table

- search.html). P EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4

- 84/013, USEPA Manual of Methods for Virology (rev. June 2001), Chapters 1

- 12 and 14

- 16 available at www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/about.htm and Chapter 13 avai lable at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm. P1 Jay Vasconcelos and Stephanie Harris, EPA, Pub. No. EPA 910/9

- 92

- 029, Consensus Method for Determining Groundwaters Under the Direct Influence of Surface Water Using Microscopic Particulate Analysis (MPA) ( October 1992), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161. P2 G. Shay Fout et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R

- 95/178, ICR Microbial Laboratory Manual (April 1996), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm. P3 Charles P. Gerba, University of Arizona, U of A 2000: Ascaris lumbricoides in Water (1999), avail able from the University of Arizona, Microbial Analytical Laboratory, Building No. 90, Rm. 406, Tucson, AZ 85721.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 12 of 53 P4 E PA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- R

- 05

- 001, Method 1622: Cryptosporidium in Water by Filtration/IMS/FA (December 2005), available at http://www.epa.gov/microbes/, modified to require flow cytometer

- counted spiking suspensions for MS samples and ongoing precision and re covery samples. P5 EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- R

- 05

- 002, Method 1623: Cryptosporidium and Giardia in Water by Filtration/IMS/FA (December 2005), available at http://www.epa.gov/microbes/, modified to require flow cytometer

- counted spiking suspensions for MS

samp les and ongoing precision and recovery samples. Q 40 CFR Part 60 app. A (July 2006), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr

- table

- search.html). R Office of Air Quality, ADEQ, Arizona Testing Manual for Air Pollutant Emissions (rev. F March 199 2), available from the Office of Air Quality, ADEQ, 1110 W. Washington St., Phoenix, AZ 85007, and at http://www.azdeq.gov/environ/air/compliance/download/manual.pdf. S 40 CFR Part 61 apps. B and C (July 2006), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/c fr/cfr

- table

- search.html). S1 EPA, Pub. No. EPA/625/R

- 96/010b, Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air (2nd ed. January 1999), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

U Environmental Measurements Lab oratory, U.S. Department of Energy, Pub. No. HASL

- 300, EML Procedures Manual, Vol. I (28th ed. February 1997), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd. , Springfield, VA

22161. V Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility, EP A, Pub. No. EPA 520/5

- 84

- 006, Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility Radiochemistry Procedures Manual (2nd prtg. 1988), available from National Technical Information Ser vice, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161. W Environmental Monitoring and Supp ort Laboratory Las Vegas, EPA, Pub. No. EMSL

- LV

- 0539

- 17, Radiochemical Analytical Procedures for Analysis of Environmental Samples (March 1979), available from National Technical Inf ormation Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

X Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4

- 91/016, Test Methods for Escherichia Coli in Drinking Water: EC Medium with Mug Tube Procedure, Nutrient Agar with Mug Membrane Filter Procedure (July 1991), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitl eord.htm. Y Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- R

- 99

- 013, Method OIA

- 1677: Available Cyanide by Flow Injection, Ligand Exchange, and Amperometry (August 1999), available at http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/methods/cyanid e/. Z EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815

- R

- 00

- 0 14, Volume 1, Methods for the Determination of Organic and Inorganic Compounds in Drinking Water (August 2000), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleOW.htm, modified to require the following when testing for bromate using method 321.8:

a. That each sa mple be analyzed within 28 days after sampling, and b. That the test result be qualified in the final report if the sample was not preserved with 50 mg of ethylenediamine per li ter of sample at the time of sampling. Z1 EPA, Pub. No. EPA 821/R/01/034, EPA M ethod 1605: Aeromonas in Finished Water by Membrane Filtration Using Ampicillin

- Dextrin Agar with Vancomycin (ADA

- V) (October 2001), available at http://www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/pdfs/met1605.pdf. Z2 EPA, Pub. No. EPA 821/R

- 93

- 010

- A, Methods for the De termination of Nonconventional Pesticides in Municipal and Industrial Wastewater, Volume I (rev. 1 August 1993), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161. Z3 EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- R

- 02

- 013, Short

- ter m Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater Organisms (4th ed. October 2002), available at www.epa.gov/ost/wet/disk3/. Z4 IDEXX Laboratories, Inc., IDEXX SimPlate TM HPC Method for Heterotrophs in Water (No vember 2000), available from IDEXX Laboratories, Inc., One IDEXX Dr., Westbrook, ME 04092. Z5 William A. Yanko, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/1

- 87/014, Occurrence of Pathogens in Distribution and Marketing Municipal Sludges (1987), available from National Technica l Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161. Z6 ASTM, Standard Test Methods for Determining Sediment Concentration in Water Samples (reapproved 2 002), available from ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Dr., P.O. Box C700, W. Conshohoc ken, PA 19428

- 2959. Z7 CEM Corporation, Closed Vessel Microwave Digestion of Wastewater Samples for Determination of Met als (April 1992), available from CEM Corporation, P.O. Box 200, Matthews, NC 28106

- 0200. Z8 EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- R

- 02

- 024, Method 1604: Total Coliforms and Escherichia coli in Water by Membrane Filtration Using a Simultaneous Detection Technique (MI Medium) (September 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/pdfs/met1604.pdf. Z9 Lachat Instruments, QuikChem Method 10

- 204

- 0 0

- 1

- X, Digestion and Distillation of Total Cyanide in Drinking and Wastewaters Using MICRO DIST and Determination of Cyanide by Flow Injection Analysis (rev. 2.1 Novem ber 30, 2000), available from Lachat Instruments, 6645 W. Mill Rd., Milwaukee, WI 53218. Z10 OI Analytical/ALPKEM, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Method PAI

- DK01 (Block Digestion, Steam Distillation, Titrimetric Detection) (rev. December 22, 1994), available from OI Analytical/ALPKEM, P.O. Box 9010, College Sta tion, TX 77842. Z11 OI Analytical/ALPK EM, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Method PAI

- DK02 (Block Digestion, Steam Distillation, Colorimetric Detection) (rev. December 22, 1994), available from OI Analytical/ALPKEM, P.O. Box 9010, College Sta tion, TX 77842. Z12 OI Analytical/ALPKEM, Nitrogen, Total K jeldahl, Method PAI

- DK03 (Block Digestion, Automated FIA Gas Diffusion) (rev. December 22, 1994), available from OI Analytical/ALPKEM, P.O. Box 9010, College Station, TX 77 842.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 13 of 53 Z13 EPA, Pub. No. EPA

- 821

- R

- 02

- 012, Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms (5th ed. October 2002), available at www.epa.gov/waterscience/WET/di sk2/. C. If an approved method is not available for a particular parameter, or a different method or metho d alteration is required or authorized to be used for a particular parameter by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food and Drug Administra tion, or 9 A.A.C. 8, a licensee may request approval of an alternate method or method alteration.

1. For an alternate method or method alterati on required or authorized by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8, the request shall include: a. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee submitting the request; b. The name, address, and telephone number of t he laboratory for which approval of the alternate method or method alteration is requested; c. Identification of the parameter for which approval of the alternate method or method alteration i s requested; d. Reference to the EPA, ADEQ, U.S. Food and Drug A dministration, or 9 A.A.C. 8 requirement or authorization for the use of the alternate method or method alteration for which approval is requested; and e. An alternate method or method alteration approval fee of $50 payable to the Arizona Department of Hea lth Services in the form of a certified check, business check, money order, or credit card payment. 2. For an alternate method or method alteration that is not required or authorized by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8, t he request shall include: a. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee submitting the request; b. The name, address, and telephone number of the laboratory for which approval of the alternate met hod or method alteration is requested;

c. Ident ification of the parameter for which approval of the alternate method or method alteration is reques ted; and d. Written justification for using the alternate method or method alteration for which approval is r equested, including the following:

i. A detaile d description of the alternate method or method alteration; ii. References to published or other studies confirming the general applicability of the alternate m ethod or method alteration to the parameter for which its use is intended;

iii. Reference to the EPA, ADEQ, U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8 requirement to test the parameter; and iv. Data that demonstrate the performance of the alternate method or method alteration in terms of a ccuracy, precision, reliability, ruggedness, ease of use , and ability to achieve a detection limit appropriate for the proposed use of the alternate method or method alteration; and e. An alternate method or method alteration approval fee of $50 payable to the Arizona Department of Health Services

in the form o f a certified check, business check, money order, or credit card payment. 3. Before approving an alternate method or method alteration that is not required or authorized by t he EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8, the Department may require that the alternate method or method alteration be performed by a laboratory at a designated by the Department to verify that, using the parameter for which its use is intended, the alternate method or method alteration produces data that compl y with subsection (C)(2)(d)(iv). 4. The Department may approve an alternate method or method alteration if the Department determines: a. One of the following: i. Use of the alternate method or method alteration is required or authorized by the EPA, ADEQ, t he U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8; or ii. Use of the alternate method or method alteration is justified as described in subsection (C)(2)( d); and b. If the alternate method or method alteration pertains to drinking water compliance testin g, the EPA concurs that the alternate method or method alteration may be used.

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 610 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 611; new Section R9

- 14

- 610 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 609 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 610

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 612; new Section R9

- 14

- 610 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 608 and amend ed by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 10 A.A.R. 1687, effective April 6, 2004 (Supp. 04

- 2). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R 9** 

**- 14** 

**- 611. Drinking Water Compliance Testing**  A licensee for a laboratory at which drinking water compliance testing is performed shall ensure tha t: 1. The laboratory is operated in compliance with the guidelines in Key Reference D4, excluding the r equiremen ts for laboratory personnel education and experience; 2. Each drinking water sample for Arizona compliance testing is analyzed using an approved method: a. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section A, Drinking Water Parameters; or b. Approved for drinking w ater compliance testing under R9

- 14

- 610(C); and 3. If the licensee desires to be licensed to perform testing for vinyl chloride, the licensee also o btains licensure to perfo rm testing for each of the analytes listed in 40 CFR 141.61(a)(2)

- (21).**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 14 of 53 Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 611 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 612; new Section R9

- 14

- 611 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 610 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 611

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 613; new Section R9

- 14

- 611 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 609 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 612. Wastewater Compliance**  **Testing** A licensee for a laboratory at which wastewater compliance testing is performed shall ensure that ea ch wastewater sample for Arizona compliance testing is analyzed using an approved method: 1. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section B, Wastewater Parameters; or 2. Approved for wastewater compliance testing under R9

- 14

- 610(C).

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 612 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 613; new Section R9

- 14

- 612 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 611 and amende d effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 612

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 614; new Section R9

- 14

- 612 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 610 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 613. Solid Waste Compliance Testing**  A. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste compliance testing is performed shall ensure tha t each solid waste sample for Arizona compliance test ing is analyzed using an approved method: 1. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section C, Solid Waste Parameters; or 2. Approved by the Department for solid waste compliance testing under R9

- 14

- 610(C). B. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste com pliance testing is performed using an 8000 series method from Key

Reference F shall: 1. If the method includes specific quality control requirements, follow the specific quality control requirements in the method; 2. If the method does not include specific quality control requirements, follow all requirements in EPA, Method 8000C: Determinative Chromatographic Separations (rev. 3 March 2003), incorporated by reference, on file wi th the Department, including no future editions or amendments, and available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new

- meth.htm; and 3. If the method does not include specific sample extraction procedures, follow the procedures in th e following from Key Reference F, as applicable: a. Method 3500B, b. Method 3600C, and

c. Method 5000. C. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste compliance testing is performed using a non

- 8000 series method from Key Reference F shall comply with the following from Key Reference F, as applicable according to the req uirements of the

sp ecific method: 1. Method 4000, and

2. Method 7000A. D. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste compliance testing is performed using a method f rom Key Reference F shall comply with Chapters 1 through 8 of Key Reference F, as applicable according t o the requirements of the specific method.

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 613 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 614; new Section R9

- 14

- 613 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 612 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 613

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 615; new Section R9

- 14

- 613 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 611 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 614. Air and Stack Compliance Testing**  A licensee for a laboratory at which air or stack compliance testing is performed shall ensure that each air or stack sample for Arizona compliance testing is analyzed using an approved meth od: 1. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section D, Air and Stack Parameters; or 2. Approved by the Department for air or stack compliance testing under R9

- 14

- 610(C).

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 614 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 615; new Section R9

- 14

- 614 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 613 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 614

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 616; new Section R9

- 14

- 614 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 612 and amended by final rulemaking at 7**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 15 of 53 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 615. Quality Assurance**  A. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that the analytical data produced at the l icensee's or applicant's laboratory are of known and acceptable precision and accuracy, as prescribed by the approved method for each analysis or as prescribed by the limits described under subsection (C)(9), and are scientifically valid and defensible.

B. A licensee or applicant shall have, implement, and comply with a written quality assurance plan that contains the following and is available at the laboratory for Department review: 1. A title page identifying the laboratory and date of review and includi ng the laboratory director's signature of approval; 2. A table of contents; 3. An organization chart or list of the laboratory personnel, including names, line of authority, an d identification of princ ipal quality assurance personnel; 4. A copy of the curr ent laboratory license and a list of licensed parameters; 5. A statement of quality assurance objectives, including data quality objectives with precision and accuracy goals and the criteria for determining the acceptability of each testing; 6. Specificati ons for: a. Sample containers, b. Preparation of sample containers, c. Preservation of samples, and d. Maximum allowable holding times; 7. A procedure for documenting laboratory receipt of samples and tracking of samples during laborato ry testing;

8. A procedure for analytical instrument calibration, including frequency of calibration and complying wi th the requirements for calibration in subsection (C); 9. A procedure for compliance testing data reduction and validation and reporting of final results, i ncluding the identification and treatment of data outliers, the determination of the accuracy of data transcripti on, and all calculations; 10. A statement of the frequency of all quality control checks; 11. A statement of the acceptance criteria for all q uality control checks; 12. Preventive maintenance procedures and schedules; 13. Assessment procedures for data acceptability; 14. Corrective action procedures to be taken when results from analytical quality control checks are unacceptable, including

steps to demonstrate the presence of any interference if the precision, accuracy, or limit of quantitation the reported compliance testing result is affected by the interference; and

15. Procedures for chain

- of

- custody documentation, including procedures for th e documentation and reporting of any deviation from the sample handling or preservation requirements listed in this Section. C. A licensee or applicant shall: 1. Have available at the laboratory all methods, equipment, reagents, and glassware necessary for the compliance testing for which the licensee or applicant is licensed or is requesting a license; 2. Use and document the use of only reagents of a grade equal to or greater than that required by th e approved methods; 3. Maintain and require each analys t to comply with a complete and current standard operating procedure for each licensed method, which shall include at least: a. A requirement that the method be performed in compliance with the requirements in the approved me thod; b. A description of all p rocedures to be followed when the method is performed; c. A list of the concentrations for calibration standards, check standards, and spikes; d. Requirements for instrumental conditions and set up; e. A requirement for frequency of calibration;

f. Calcula tions for the quantitation of the final concentration of samples, with the actual sample dilution fa ctors and the calibration algorithm used, which reflect the procedures followed; and g. Requirements for preventative maintenance;

4. Calibrate each instrum ent as required by each approved method for which the equipment is used, as follows: a. If a calibration model is specified in the method, using the specified calibration model or, if a nother calibration model has been approved by the Department as a metho d alteration, using the calibration model approved as a method alteration; b. If multiple calibration models are included as options in the method, using one of the included c alibration models or, if another calibration model has been approved by the Depar tment as a method alteration, using the calibration model approved as a method alteration; or c. If the method does not include a calibration model, using the manufacturer's specifications for c alibration; 5. Maintain calibration documentation, including d ocumentation that demonstrates the calculations performed using each calibration model; 6. Develop, document, and maintain a current limit of detection and limit of quantitation for each c ompliance parameter for each instrument; 7. Develop each limit of detection using:**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 16 of 53 a. The protocol in the applicable test method; b. The protocol in the applicable federal regulation; or c. A process that complies with the guidelines in Section D.1.2 of Chapter 5, Appendix D

-- Essential Quality Control Requirements, in Na tional Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference, EPA Pub. No. EPA/600/R

04/003, 2003 NELAC Standard (June 5, 2003), including no future editions or amendments, which is inc orporated by reference, on file with the Department, and available from the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference, US EPA ORD/NERL, Mailcode E243

- 05, RTP, NC 27711, or at www.epa.gov/nelac/; 8. Maintain all compliance testing equipment in proper operating condition; 9. For each parameter tested at the laborat ory for which quality control acceptance criteria are not specified in the approved method or by EPA or ADEQ: a. Use default limits provided in Exhibit II; or b. Statistically develop limits from historical data by: i. Determining the mean and standard dev iation for a minimum of 20 data points not invalidated for cause, excluding statistical outliers; ii. Setting the limits no more than three standard deviations from the mean and in the detectable ra nge, using as the lower end of the detectable range the li mit of quantitation or the lowest standard value represented in the initial calibration; and iii. Explaining the origin of the lower end of the detectable range in the laboratory's standard ope rating procedure; 10. Discard or segregate all expired standard s or reagents; 11. Maintain a record showing the traceability of reagents; and 12. Ensure that a calibration model is not used or changed to avoid necessary instrument maintenance

. D. A licensee or applicant may submit a written request to the Department f or an exemption from subsection (C)(1) for a specific parameter if the licensee or applicant: 1. Documents that the approved method has been performed at the laboratory and that the analytical d ata generated were scientifically valid and defensible and of known and acceptable precision and accuracy; and 2. Documents the licensee's or applicant's ability to obtain the equipment, reagent, or glassware ne cessary to perform the approved method. E. The written request for an exemption under subsection (D) shall include: 1. The name, address, and main telephone number of the laboratory; 2. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee or applicant submitting the request; 3. Identification of the parameter and the equipment, reagent, or glassware for whic h the licensee or applicant is requesting an exemption; and 4. The documentation described in subsections (D)(1) and (2). F. The Department may approve a request for an exemption under subsection (D) if it determines: 1. That the approved method has been p erformed at the laboratory; 2. That the analytical data generated were scientifically valid and defensible and of known and acce ptable precision and accuracy; and 3. That the license or applicant is able to obtain the equipment, reagent, or glassware neces sary to perform the approved

method. G. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that a laboratory's written quality assurance plan is a sepa rate document available a t the laboratory and includes all of the components required in subsection (B), but a licensee or applicant may satisfy the components required in subsections (B)(3) through (15) through incorporating by reference provisions in separate documents such as standard operating procedures. H. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that each laboratory standard operating procedure is a separate document available at the laboratory and includes all of the components required in subsection (C)(3), but a licensee or appli cant may satisfy the components required in subsections (C)(3)(f) and (g) through incor porating by reference provisions in separate documents such as other standard operating procedures.

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 615 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 616; new Section R9

- 14

- 615 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 614 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 615

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 617; new Section R9

- 14

- 615 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 613 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended b y final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 616. Operation** 

A licensee shall ensure that: 1. A compliance testing sample accepted at the licensee's laboratory is analyzed: a. At the licensee's laboratory,

b. At anoth er laboratory licensed under this Article, or c. At a laboratory exempted under A.R.S. § 36

- 495.02(A) or R9

- 14

- 602; 2. The facility and utilities required to operate equipment and perform compliance testing are maint ained;**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 17 of 53 3. Environmental controls are mai ntained within the laboratory to ensure that laboratory environmental conditions do not affect analytical results beyond quality control limits established for the methods performed at the laboratory; 4. Storage, handling, and disposal of hazardous materia ls at the laboratory are in accordance with all state and federal regulations; 5. The following information is maintained for all supervisory, quality assurance, and analytical pe rsonnel: a. A summary of each individual's education and professional experie nce; b. Documentation of each individual's review of the quality assurance plan required under R9

- 14

- 615(B) and the approved methods and laboratory standard operating procedures for each area of testing performed by the

individual or for which the individu al has supervisory or quality assurance responsibility; c. Documentation of each analyst's completion of training on the use of equipment and of proper labo ratory technique, including the name of the analyst, the name of the instructor, the duration of the training, and the date of completion of the training; d. Documentation of each analyst's completion of training classes, continuing education courses, sem inars, and conferences that relate to the testing procedures used by the analyst for compliance testi ng; e. Documentation of each analyst's completion of Initial Demonstration of Capability as required by each approved method performed by the analyst, as applicable; f. Documentation of each analyst's performance of proficiency testing, as applicable; g. D ocumentation of each analyst's completion of training related to instrument calibration that include s: i. Instruction on each calibration model that the analyst will use or for which the analyst will rev iew data;

ii. For each calibration model described in subsection (5)(g)(i), the specific aspects of the calibration model that might compromise the data quality, such as detector saturation, lack of detector sensitivity, the ca libration model's not accurately reflecting the calibration points, inappropriate extension of the calibration range, weighting factors, and dropping of mid

- level calibration points without justification; and iii. Instruction that a calibration model shall not be used or changed to avoid necessary instrument maintenance;

and

h. Document ation of each individual's applicable certifications and specialized training; and 6. The licensee complies with all applicable federal, state, and local occupational safety and healt h regulations.

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 616 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 617; new Section R9

- 14

- 616 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 615 effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 616 repealed; new

Section R9

- 14

- 616 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 614 and amended by final rulemaki ng at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp.

06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 617. Laboratory Records and Reports**  A licensee or applicant shall ensure that:

1. Each record and re port required to be maintained by this Article is available for inspection and copying by the Department during normal business hours; 2. The Department is permitted to remove copied records and reports from a laboratory; 3. The licensee or applicant maint ains records and reports of compliance testing for at least five years after the date of compliance testing, with: a. All records and reports for at least the most current two years maintained onsite at the laborato ry and the remaining records and reports stored in a secure storage facility; b. Each hard copy document containing data either maintained as a hard copy document or scanned into a PDF file or another electronic file format that preserves an exact copy of the hard copy data; and

c. All instrument

- generated electronic data maintained in a reproducible format from which reports can be produced and printed; 4. No portion of a record or report of compliance testing is altered or deleted to hide or misrepres ent any part of the data;

5. The licensee or applicant produces all records and reports requested by the Department within 24 hours after the req uest or, if the licensee or applicant requests a period longer than 24 hours, a longer period of time agr eed upon by the Department; 6. Upon Department requ est, the licensee or applicant makes available for inspection and copying the requested data from

non

- Arizona compliance samples; 7. A compliance testing record contains: a. Sample information, including the following: i. A unique sample identification ass igned at the laboratory, ii. The location or location code of sample collection, iii. The sample collection date and time, iv. The type of testing to be performed, and v. The name of the individual who collected the sample;

b. The name and address of t he client submitting the sample to the laboratory;**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 18 of 53 c. The name of the individual who submitted the sample to the laboratory; d. The date and time of receipt of the sample at the laboratory; e. The name of the individual who received the sample at the labor atory; f. The dates and times of testing, including the date and time of each critical step; g. The actual results of compliance testing, including all raw data, work sheets, and calculations p erformed; h. The actual results of quality control data validating the test results, including the calibration and calculations performed; i. The name of each analyst or who performed the testing; and j. A copy of the final report; 8. A final report of compliance testing contains: a. The name, address, and tele phone number of the laboratory; b. The license number assigned to the laboratory by the Department; c. Actual scientifically valid and defensible results of compliance testing in appropriate units of measure, obtained in accordance with an approved method and quality assurance plan; d. Qualified results of compliance testing not obtained in accordance with an approved method and qu ality assurance plan; e. A list of each approved method used to obtain the reported results; f. Sample information, including th e following: i. The unique sample identification assigned at the laboratory, ii. The location or location code of sample collection, iii. The sample collection date and time, iv. The name of the individual who collected the sample,

v. The name of the c lient that submitted the sample to the laboratory, and vi. The name of the individual who submitted the sample to the laboratory; g. The date of analysis for each parameter reported; h. The date of the final report; and i. The laboratory director's or desi gnee's signature.

Historical Note
Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91

- 4). Former Section R9

- 14

- 617 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 618; new Section R9

- 14

- 617 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 616 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 617

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 618; new Section R9

- 14

- 617 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 615 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 618. Mobile Laboratories**  A. An applicant shall obtain a license for each mobile laboratory, unless the applicant chooses the single license option for multiple laboratories as described in R9

- 14

- 603(D). B. A licensee or applicant for a mobile laboratory shall ensure that the mobile laboratory is operated in compliance with all of the requirements of this Article. C. Upon Department request, a licensee or applicant for a mobile laboratory shall provide to the Dep artment the mobile laboratory's location an d a list of the parameters for which testing is performed at the mobile laboratory.

Historical Note

R9

- 14

- 618 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 617 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97

- 2). Former Section R9

- 14

- 618

renumbered to R9

- 14

- 619; new Section R9

- 14

- 61 8 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 617 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 619. Out** 

**- of** 

**- State Environmental Laboratory**  **Licensing** A. A licensee or applicant for an out

- of

- state laboratory at which Arizona compliance testing is performed shall comply with the requirements of A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article. B. A licensee or applicant for an out

- of

- state laborat ory shall pay all actual expenses incurred by the Department as a result of the laboratory's location, including: 1. The estimated costs of each laboratory inspection or investigation at the laboratory; 2. The amount by which the actual costs of each labor atory inspection or investigation at a laboratory exceed the estimated

costs; 3. Additional expenses incurred by the Department for each investigation at the laboratory; and 4. A zone fee for each Department representative required to appear at the laborat ory to perform the laboratory inspection or investigation, as follows: a. For zone 1, including California, Nevada, Utah, Colorado, and New Mexico: $114; b. For zone 2, including all states west of the Mississippi River not listed in subsection (B)(4)(a) : $179; c. For zone 3, including all states east of the Mississippi River and Alaska and Hawaii: $290; and**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 19 of 53 d. For zone 4, including all countries outside of the United States: $516. C. The Department shall:

1. Determine the estimated costs and zone fees for a laboratory inspection or investigation after making travel arrangements

to visit an out

- of

- state laboratory; 2. Send the licensee or applicant for an out

- of

- state laboratory a bill for the estimated costs and zone fees, with instructions

to submit the am ount billed to the Department within 20 days after the date that the Department sends the bill; and 3. After a laboratory inspection or investigation is completed, determine the actual costs for the i nspection or investigatio n and any additional expenses i ncurred for an investigation and: a. If the actual costs and additional expenses exceed the estimated costs and zone fees already paid , send a bill to the licensee or applicant for the out

- of

- state laboratory for the amount by which the actual costs and ex penses exceed the estimated costs and zone fees paid, with instructions to submit the amount billed to the Departm ent within 20 days after the date that the Department sends the bill; or b. If the actual costs and expenses are less than the estimated costs and zone fees already paid, notify the licensee or applicant, determine whether the licensee or applicant desires a refund or a credit, and send a refu nd or issue a credit within 45 days after the date that the licensee or applicant specifies the desired form of payment.

Historical Note

New Section R9

- 14

- 619 renumbered from R9

- 14

- 618 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp.

06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 620. Changes to a License**  A. During the term of a license, a licensee may request to have one or more parameters added to the license. B. To request to have one or more parameters added to a license, a licensee shall submit to the Depa rtment:
1. A written request that includes: a. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee submitting the request; b. The name, address, and telephone number of the laboratory for which the addition is requested; an d c. Identification of each parameter re quested to be added; 2. The applicable method and instrumentation fees, as determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in Exhi bit I, payable to the Arizona Department of Health Services by credit card; certified check; business check; or money orde r; or, if the owner is an Arizona state agency, purchase order; 3. If the addition results in a different Level of license, the difference between the application f ee paid with the most rec ent application and the application fee for the new Level of license required u nder R9

- 14

- 607(A)(2), payable to the Arizona Department of Health Services as provided in subsection (B)(2); and 4. The following for each parameter requested to be added: a. The limit of detection, if applicable; b. A copy of a proficiency testing report; and c. A copy of the standard operating procedure. C. The Department may conduct a laboratory inspection during the substantive review period for a req uest to have one or more parameters added to a license. D. The Department shall process a request to hav e one or more parameters added to a license as provided in R9

- 14

- 621. E. A licensee may request deletion of parameters at no charge three times during a license period, b ut shall pay $17 per para meter for the fourth and each subsequent deletion requested d uring a license period.

Historical Note

Former R9

- 14

- 620 renumbered to R9

- 14

- 621; new R9

- 14

- 620 made by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**R9**

**- 14** 

**- 621. Time** 

**- frames** 

A. The overall time

- frame described in A.R.S. § 41

- 1 072 for each type of approval granted by the Department under this Article

is set forth in Table 1. 1. An applicant and the Department may agree in writing to extend the substantive review time

- frame and the overall time

frame.

2. An extension of the sub stantive review time

- frame and the overall time

- frame may not exceed 25% of the overall time

frame. B. The administrative completeness review time

- frame described in A.R.S. § 41

- 1072 for each type of approval granted by the Department under this Article is set forth in Table 1 and begins on the date that the Department receives an application or request for approval. 1. The Department shall send a notice of administrative completeness or deficiencies to an applicant within the administrative completeness re view time

- frame. a. A notice of deficiencies shall list each deficiency and the information or items needed to comple te the application or request for approval.**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 20 of 53 b. The administrative completeness review time

- frame and the overall time

- frame are suspended f rom the date that a notice of deficiencies is sent until the date that the Department receives all of the missing inform ation or items from an applicant. 2. If an applicant fails to submit to the Department all of the information and items listed in a no ti ce of deficiencies within 60 days after the date that the Department sent the notice of deficiencies, the Department shall con sider the application or request for approval withdrawn and deny the license or other approval requested. 3. If the Department issues a license or other approval to an applicant during the administrative completeness review tim e

frame, the Department shall not issue a separate written notice of administrative completeness.

C. The substantive review time

- frame described in A.R.S. § 41

- 1072 is set forth in Table 1 and begins on the date of a notice of administrative completeness. 1. As part of the substantive review for an initial license application, the Department may conduct a laboratory inspection, investigation, or proficiency t esting, or a combination of the three, as described in R9

- 14

- 605. a. The Department shall commence a laboratory inspection, investigation, or proficiency testing, or combination of the three, no more than 30 days after notice of administrative completeness has been mailed for an in

- state laboratory or no more than 60 days after notice of administrative completeness has been mailed for an out

- of

- state laboratory. b. The Department and an applicant may mutually agree in writing to schedule a laboratory inspec tion, proficiency testing, or investigation later than the date required under subsection (C)(1)(a). 2. The Department shall send written notification of approval or denial of a license or other approv al to an applicant within

the substantive review time

- f rame. 3. During the substantive review time

- frame, the Department may make one comprehensive written request for additional information, unless the Department and applicant have agreed in writing to allow the Department to s ubmit supplemental requests for information. 4. If the Department issues a comprehensive written request or a supplemental request for informatio n, the substantive

review time

- frame and the overall time

- frame are suspended from the date that the Department issues the request until

the da te that the Department receives all of the information requested. 5. If an applicant fails to submit to the Department all of the information and items listed in a co mprehensive written reque st or a supplemental request for information within 60 days after the date that the Department sent the comprehensive written request or supplemental request for information, the Department shall deny the license or ot her approval requested. 6. The Department shall grant a license or other approval unless: a. An applica nt fails to submit requested information or a requested item as described in subsection (B)(2) or (C )(5); b. For an initial license application or a regular license renewal application where the regular lic ense is not suspended, the Department determines t hat grounds to deny the license exist under A.R.S. § 36

- 495.09; c. For a regular license renewal application where the regular license is suspended, the Department determines that the licensee is not in full compliance with the corrective action plan; A.R. S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3; or this Article; d. For a request for approval of an alternate method or method alteration, the Department determines that the alternate method or method alteration does not meet the standard for approval under R9

- 14

- 610(C)(4); or e. For a request for approval of an exemption under R9

- 14

- 615(D), the Department determines that the request does not meet the standard for approval under R9

- 14

- 615(F). 7. If the Department denies a license or other approval, the Department shall send to the applicant a written notice of denial setting forth the reasons for denial and all other information required by A.R.S. § 41

- 1076.

Historical Note
New Section adopted by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Section R9

- 14

- 621

renumbered from R9

- 14

- 620 and amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp.

06

- 4).

**Table 1. Time**

**- frames (in days)** 

Type of Approval Statutory Authority Overall

Time

frame Administrative

Completeness

Review Time

- frame Substantive

Review

Time

- frame

Initial License

- In

- State Laboratory A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07 201 21 180

Initial License

- Out

- of

- State Laboratory A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07 231 21 210

Regular License

Renewal

- In

- State A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07 37 14 23**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 21 of 53 Laboratory

Regular License

Renewal

- Out

- of

- State Laboratory A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07, 36

- 495.14 67 14 53

Regular License

Renewal

- In

- State Laboratory with

Provisional License A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.05, 36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07 70 21 49

Regular License

Renewal

- Out

- of

- State Laboratory with

Provisional License A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.05, 36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07, 36

- 495.14 100 21 79

Request for Approval of an Alternate

Method

or Method Alteration

- Required or

Authorized by EPA/ADEQ A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.06 105 15 90

Request for Approval of an Alternate

Method

or Method Alteration

- Not Required or Authorized

b y EPA/ADEQ A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.06 210 30 180

Request for Approval of an Exemption

under

R9

- 14

- 615(D) A.R.S. § 36

- 495.01 60 15 45

Request to Have One or More Parameters

Added to a License under R9

- 14

- 620

- In

State Laboratory A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07 91 21 70

Request to Have One or More Parameters

Added to a License under R9

- 14

- 620

- Out

of

- State Laboratory A.R.S. §§ 36

- 495.01, 36

- 495.03,

36

- 495.06, 36

- 495.07 121 21 100

Historical Note
New Table adopted by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00

- 4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**EXHIBIT I. APPROVED METHODS; METHOD FEES; INSTRUMENTATION FEES**

**Table 1. Approved Methods; Method Fees** 

SECTION A. DRINKING WATER PARAMETERS

1. Microbiology of Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Aeromonas Z1 1605 $228

Coliforms, Fecal C2 9221E $228

9222D $228

C1 Hach 8001 $228

Coliforms, Total, by Colilert (ONPG

- MUG) C2 9223B $152

Coliforms, Total, by Colisure C2 9223B $152

Coliforms, Total, by Membrane Filtration C2 9222B $228

9222C $228

Coliforms, Total and E. coli, by Membrane Filtration Z8 1604 $228**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 22 of 53 Coliforms, Total, by Multiple Tube Fermentation C2 9221B and C $228

C1 Hach 8001 $228

Coliforms, Total, by Presence/Absence C2 9221D $228

Escherichia coli X Tube Procedure $228

Membrane Filter Procedure $228

Cryptosporidium P4 1622 $381

Giardia and Cryptosporidium P5 1623 $381

Heterotrophic Plate Count C2 9215B $152

Z4 SimPlate $152

Microscopic Particulate Analysis P1 910/9

- 92

- 029 $228

Viruses P2 600/R

- 95/178 $381

2. Inorganic Chemistry and Physical Properties of Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Alkalinity C2 2320B $19

Asbestos H1 100.1 $503

H2 100.2 $503

Bromate A6 317.0 $76

A7 326.0 $76

Z 300.1 $26

321.8 $152

Bromide A2 300.0 $26

A6 317.0 $76

A7 326.0 $76

Z 300.1 $26

Calcium A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

3500

- Ca D $76

Carbon, Dissolved Organic A9 415.3 $76

C2 5310B $39

5310C $39

5310D $39

Carbon, Total Organic A9 415.3 $76

C2 5310B $39

5310C $39

5310D $39

Chloride A2 300.0 $26

C2 4500

- Cl B $39

4500

- Cl D $39

4110B $26

Chloramine C2 4500

- Cl D $39

4500

- Cl F $39

4500

- Cl G $76**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 23 of 53 Chlorine C2 4500

- Cl D $39

4500

- Cl E $39

4500

- Cl F $39

4500

- Cl G $39

4500

- Cl H $39

4500

- Cl I $39

C1 Hach 8168 $39

Hach 8167 $39

Hach 8370 $39

Hach 8021 $39

Chlorine Dioxide A8 327.0 $76

C2 4500

- ClO2 C $39

4500

- ClO2 D $76

4500

- ClO2 E $39

Chlorite A2 300.0 $26

A6 317.0 $76

A7 326.0 $76

A8 327.0 $76

Z 300.1 $26

Color C2 2120B $32

Corrosivity C2 2330B $39

Cyanide A2 335.4 $76

C2 4500

- CN B $7

4500

- CN C $13

4500

- CN E $76

4500

- CN F $76

Z9 QuikChem 10

- 204

- 00

- 1

- X $76

Cyanide, Amenable C2 4500

- CN G $76

Fluoride A2 300.0 $26

A3 380

- 75WE $39

C2 4500

- F B $39

4500

- F C $26

4500

- F D $39

4500

- F E $39

4110B $26

C1 Hach 8029 $39

Hardness A1 200.7, Sum of Ca and Mg as their

carbonates $10

C2 2340 B, Sum of Ca and Mg as their

carbonates $10

2340 C $39

Magnesium A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 24 of 53 Methylene Blue Active Substances C2 5540 C $39

Nitrate A2 353.2 $76

300.0 $26

C2 4500

- NO3 D $39

4500

- NO3 E $76

4500

- NO3 F $76

4110B $26

Nitrite A2 353.2 $76

300.0 $26

C2 4500

- NO2 B $76

4500

- NO3 E $76

4500

- NO3 F $76

4110B $26

Odor C2 2150B $32

Orthophosphate A2 365.1 $76

300.0 $26

C2 4500

- P E $76

4500

- P F $76

4110B $26

Ozone C 4500

- O3 B $39

Perchlorate Z 314.0 $76

314.1 $76

331 $152

332 $152

pH (Hydrogen Ion) A 150.1 $39

150.2 $39

C2 4500

- H B $39

C1 Hach 8156 $39

Residue, Filterable (TDS) C2 2540 C $39

Sediment Concentration Z6 D 3977

- 979 $13

Silica A1 200.7 $10

C2 4500

- Si C $76

4500

- Si D $76

4500

- Si E $76

Sodium A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

Specific Conductance C2 2510B $39

C1 Hach 8160 $39

Sulfate A2 300.0 $26

375.2 $76

C2 4500

- SO4 C $76

4500

- SO4 D $76

4500

- SO4 E $76**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 25 of 53 4500

- SO4 F $76

4110B $26

Temperature, Degrees Celsius C2 2550 $13

Turbidity, Nephelometric (NTU) A2 180.1 $39

C2 2130B $39

UV

- Absorbing Organic Constituents C2 5910B $76

3. Metals in Drinking Water

a. Sample Preparation for Metals in Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Acid Extractable Metals C 3030C $7

Microwave Assisted Digestion C 3030K $7

Nitric Acid C 3030E $7

Nitric Acid/Hydrochloric Acid C 3030F $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid C 3030H $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid/Hydrofluoric Acid C 3030I $7

Nitric Acid/Sulfuric Acid C 3030G $7

Preliminary Filtration C 3030B $7

b. Methods to Analyze Metals in Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Aluminum A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111D $26

3113B $26

Antimony A1 200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Arsenic A1 200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

3114B $76

Barium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C 3111D $26

3113B $26

Beryllium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Cadmium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 26 of 53 200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Chromium, Total A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Copper A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

Iron A1 200.7 $10

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

Lead A1 200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Manganese A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

Mercury A 245.2 $52

A1 245.1 $52

200.8 $26

C 3112B $52

Nickel A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

Selenium A1 200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

3114B $76

Silver A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

Strontium A1 200.7 $10

C 3500

- Sr B $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 27 of 53 3500

- Sr C $20

3500

- Sr D $26

Thallium A1 200.8 $26

200.9 $26

Uranium A1 200.8 $26

Zinc A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C 3111B $26

4. Organic Chemistry of Drinking Water

a. Methods to Comply with National Primary Drinking Water Regulations

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Disinfectant Byproducts, Solvents and Pesticides:

Alachlor

Atrazine Dibromochloropropane

Endrin Ethylene dibromide Heptachlor Heptachlorepoxide

Hexachlorobenzene Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane Methoxychlor

Simazine 1,1,2

- Trichloroethane Trichloroethylene 1,1,1

- Trichloroethane Tetrachloroethylene

Carbontetrachloride

Chloroform

Bromodichloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

Bromoform

Total Trihalomethanes D3 551.1 (1.0) $116

VOCs by GC:

Benzene

Carbon Tetrachloride (mono) Chlorobenzene

o

- Dichlorobenzene

para

- Dichlorobenzene
1,2

- Dichloroethane

cis

- 1,2

- Dichloroethylene

Trans

- 1,2

- Dichloroethylene

Dichloromethane 1,2

- Dichloropropane Ethylbenzene Styrene Tetrachloroethylene
1,1,1

- Trichlorothane Trichloroethylene

Toluene 1,2,4

- Trichlorobenzene 1,1

- Dichloroethylene 1,1,2

- Trichloroethane Vinyl chloride D3 502.2 (2.1) $152**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 28 of 53 Xylenes, Total

Chloroform

Bromodichloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

Bromoform

Total Trihalomethanes

VOCs by GC

- MS:

Benzene

Carbon Tetrachloride (mono) Chlorobenzene

o

- Dichlorobenzene

para

- Dichlorobenzene 1,2

- Dichloroethane

cis

- 1,2

- Dichloroethylene

Trans

- 1,2

- Dichloroethylene

Dichloromethane 1,2

- Dichloropropane Ethylbenzene Styrene Tetrachloroethylene 1,1,1

- Trichlorothane Trichloroethylene

Toluene 1,2,4

- Trichlorobenzene 1,1 Dichloroethylene 1,1,2

- Trichloroethane Vinyl Chloride Xylenes, Total

Chloroform

Bromodichloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

Bromoform

Total Trihalomethanes D3 524.2 (4.1) $152

EDB/DBCP D3 504.1 (1.1) $116

Pesticides and PCBs by GC (Microextraction):

Alachlor

Atrazine

Chlorodane

Endrin Heptachlor Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

Aroclor 1260

Simazine Toxaphene D3 505 (2.1) $152

Phthalate and Adipate Esters by GC

- PID: Di (2

- ethylhexyl)adipate Di (2

- ethylhexyl)phthalate D3 506 (1.1) $116

Pesticides by GC

- NPD

Atrazine D3 507 (2.1) $116**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 29 of 53 Alachlor

Simazine

Chlorinated Pesticides by GC

- ECD:

Chlordane

Endrin Heptachlor Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

Aroclor 1260 Toxaphene D3 508 (3.1) $152

Chlorinated Pesticides, Herbicides, Organohalides by GC

- ECD:

Alachlor

Atrazine

Chlorodane

Endrin Heptachlor Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

Aroclor 1260

Simazine Toxaphene D3 508.1(2.0) $152

Organics by GC

- MS:

Alachlor

Atrazine Benzo(a)pyrene

Chlorodane Di (2

- ethylhexyl)adipate Di (2

- ethylhexyl)phthalate

Endrin Heptachlor Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254 D3 525.2 (2.0) $152**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 30 of 53 Aroclor 1260 Pentachlorophenol

Simazine Toxaphene

Carbamates by HPLC/Post Column:

Carbofuran Oxamyl D3 531.1 (3.1) $116

D7 531.2 $116

Chlorinated Acids and Dalapon by GC

- ECD: 2,4

- D Dalapon

Dinoseb Pentachlorophenol

Picloram Silvex (2,4,5

- TP) D 515.1 (4.0) $116

D6 515.3 (1.0) $116

D8 515.4 (1.0) $116

Chlorinated Acids By GC

- ECD 2,4

- D

Dinoseb Pentachlorophenol

Picloram Silvex (2,4,5

- TP) D3 515.2 (1.1) $116

PAHs By HPLC/UV/FL: Benzo(a)pyrene D1 550 $116

550.1 $116

Haloacetic Acids and Dalapon by GC

- ECD: Dalapon

Monochloracetic Acid

Dichloracetic Acid

Trichloroacetic Acid

Monobromoacetic Acid

Dibromoacetic Acid

HAA5 D2 552.1 (1.0) $116

D3 552.2 (1.0) $116

Haloacetic Acids:

Monochloroacetic Acid

Dichloroacetic Acid

Trichloroacetic Acid

Monobromoacetic Acid

Dibromoacetic Acid

HAA5 D13 552.3 $116

Disinfection Byproducts by Micro Liquid

- Liquid

Extraction/GC

- ECD C2 6251B $116

Chlorinated Acids By HPLC/PDA/UV: 2,4

- D

Dinoseb Pentachlorophenol

Picloram Silvex (2,4,5

- TP) D2 555 (1.0) $116

Dioxin E 1613 $258

Diquat D5 549.2 (1.0) $116

Endothall D2 548.1 (1.0) $116

Glyphosate D1 547 $116

PCBs (as decachlorobiphenyl) D 508A (1.0) $152

b. Additional Methods and Compounds Required by Other Programs

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Disinfectant Byproducts, Solvents and D3 551.1 (1.0) $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 31 of 53 Pesticides

VOCs by GC D3 502.2 (2.1) $26

VOCs by GC

- MS D3 524.2 (4.1) $26

EDB/DBCP D3 504.1 (1.1) $26

Pesticides and PCBs by GC (Microextraction) D3 505 (2.1) $26

Phthalate and Adipate Esters by GC

- PID D3 506 (1.1) $26

Pesticides by GC

- NPD D3 507 (2.1) $26

Chlorinated Pesticides by GC

- ECD D3 508 (3.1) $26

Chlorinated Pesticides, Herbicides, Organohalides by GC

ECD D3 508.1(2.0) $26

Organics by GC

- MS D3 525.2 (2.0) $26

Carbamates by HPLC/Post Column D3 531.1 (3.1) $26

D7 531.2 $26

Chlorinated Acids and Dalapon by GC

- ECD D 515.1 (4.0) $26

D6 515.3 (1.0) $26

D8 515.4 (1.0) $26

Chlorinated Acids By GC

- ECD D3 515.2 (1.1) $26

PAHs By HPLC/UV/FL D1 550 $26

550.1 $26

Haloacetic Acids and Dalapon by GC

- ECD D2 552.1 (1.0) $26

D3 552.2 (1.0) $26

Chlorinated Acids By HPLC/PDA/UV D2 555 (1.0) $26

Dioxins and Furans E 1613 $65

Diquat and Paraquat D5 549.2 (1.0) $26

Benzidines and Nitrogen Compounds D2 553 (1.1) $116

Carbonyl Compounds D2 554 (1.0) $116

Phenols Z 528 $152

Phenylurea Compounds Z 532 $116

Selected Semivolatiles Z 526 $152

Pesticides and Flame Retardants by GCMS D9 527 $152

Explosives and Related Compounds D10 529 $152

Acetanilide Degradation Products D11 535 (1.1) $194

Acetanilide Parent Compound D3 525.2 (2.0) $26

Nitrosamines by MS/MS D12 521 $194

5. Radiochemistry of Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Cesium B Cesium

- 134 $206

C2 7500

- Cs B $206

7120 $206

J1 R

- 1110

- 76 $206

R

- 1111

- 76 $206

L 901 $206**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 32 of 53 901.1 $206

U 4.5.2.3 $206

W Gamma Spectra $206

Gamma Emitting Isotopes C2 7500

- Cs B $206

7500

- I B $206

7120 $206

L 901.1 $206

901 $206

902 $206

W Gamma Spectra $206

Gross Alpha B Gross Alpha $206

C2 7110B $206

7110C $206

J1 R

- 1120

- 76 $206

L 900 $206

V 00

- 01 $206

00

- 02 $206

W Gross Alpha $206

Gross Beta B Gross Beta $206

C2 7110B $206

J1 R

- 1120

- 76 $206

L 900 $206

V 00

- 01 $206

W Gross Beta $206

Iodine B Precipitation Method, Distillation Method $206

C2 7500

- I B $206

7500

- I C $206

7500

- I D $206

7120 $206

L 902 $206

901.1 $206

U 4.5.2.3 $206

W Gamma Spectra $206

Radium 226 B Radon Emanation, Precipitation Method $206

C2 7500

- Ra B $206

7500

- Ra C $206

J1 R

- 1140

- 76 $206

R

- 1141

- 76 $206

L 903 $206

903.1 $206

U Ra

- 05 $206

V Ra

- 03 $206

Ra

- 04 $206**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 33 of 53 W Radium 226 $206

Radium 228 B Radium 228 $206

C2 7500

- Ra D $206

J1 R

- 1142

- 76 $206

L 904 $206

V Ra

- 05 $206

W Radium 228 $206

Strontium B Strontium $206

C2 7500

- Sr B $206

J1 R

- 1160

- 76 $206

L 905 $206

U Sr

- 01 $206

Sr

- 02 $206

V Sr

- 04 $206

W Strontium $206

Tritium B Tritium $206

C2 7500

- 3H B $206

J1 R

- 1171

- 76 $206

L 906 $206

V H

- 02 $206

W Tritium $206

Uranium C2 7500

- U B $206

I D5174

- 91 $206

J1 R

- 1180

- 76 $206

R

- 1181

- 76 $206

R

- 1182

- 76 $206

L 908 $206

908.1 $206

U U

- 02 $206

U

- 04 $206

V 00

- 07 $206

W Uranium $206

SECTION B. WASTEWATER PARAMETERS

1. Microbiology of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Ascaris lumbricoides C2 10550 $228

P3 UofA2000 $228

Coliforms, Fecal, by Membrane Filter C2 9222D $228

Coliforms, Fecal, by Multiple Tube Fermentation (may be used for sludge) C2 9221E $228

Coliforms, Total, by Membrane Filter C2 9222B $228

Coliforms, Total, by Multiple Tube Fermentation C2 9221B $228**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 34 of 53 Entamoeba histolytica C2 10550 $228

C 9711C $228

Enteric viruses I D4994

- 89 $381

Escherichia coli (NPDES) by Colilert MPN, in conjunction

with SM 9221B and 9221C C2 9223B $152

Escherichia coli (NPDES) in conjunction with SM 9221B

and 9221C C2 9221F $152

Giardia and Cryptosporidium C2 9711B $381

P2 600/R

- 95/178 $381

Helminth Ova in sludge Z5 600/1

- 87

- 014 $381

Salmonella in sludge C2 9260D $228

Streptococcus, Fecal, by Membrane Filter C2 9230C $194

Streptococcus, Fecal, by Multiple Tube Fermentation C2 9230B $194

Tapeworm, Common C2 10550 $228

Viruses C2 9510 $381

P Methods for Virology $381

P2 600/R

- 95/178 $381

2. Wastewater Inorganic Chemistry, Nutrients and Demand

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Acidity C2 2310B $39

C1 Hach 8010 $39

Alkalinity, Total A 310.2 $19

C2 2320B $19

Ammonia A2 350.1 $39

C2 4500

- NH3 B $39

4500

- NH3 C $39

4500

- NH3 D $39

4500

- NH3 E $39

4500

- NH3 G $39

C1 Hach 8038 $39

Biochemical Oxygen Demand C2 5210B $152

C1 Hach 8043 $152

Boron A1 200.7 $10

C2 4500

- B B $76

Bromide A2 300.0 $26

Calcium A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

3500

- Ca D $39

C1 Hach 8222 $39

Carbon, Total Organic (TOC) C2 5310 B $39

5310 C $39

5310D $39

Chemical Oxygen Demand A 410.3 $39**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 35 of 53 A2 410.4 $76

C2 5220 C $39

5220 D $76

C1 Hach 8000 $39

Hach 8230 $39

Chloride A2 300.0 $26

C2 4500

- Cl B $39

4500

- Cl C $39

4500

- Cl E $39

C1 Hach 8225 $39

Chlorine, Free C1 Hach 8021 $39

Chlorine, Total Residual C2 4500

- Cl B $39

4500

- Cl C $39

4500

- Cl D $39

4500

- Cl F $39

4500

- Cl G $39

C1 Hach 8167 $39

Hach 8168 $39

Hach 10014 $39

Color C2 2120 B $32

2120 C $32

2120 E $32

Cyanide, Amenable to Chlorination A 335.1 $76

C2 4500

- CN G $76

Cyanide, Available Y OIA

- 1677 $76

Cyanide, Total A 335.3 $76

C2 4500

- CN B and

either (a) 4500

- CN C, (b) 4500

- CN D, or (c) 4500

- CN E $89

Fluoride A2 300.0 $26

C2 4500

- F B $39

4500

- F C $39

4500

- F D $39

4500

- F E $39

C1 Hach 8029 $39

Hardness A 130.1 $10

A1 200.7 $10

C2 2340B $39

2340C $39

C1 Hach 8226 $39

Kjeldahl, Total Nitrogen A 351.1 $76

351.4 $76

A2 351.2 $76**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 36 of 53 C2 Combination of 4500

- NH3 B and either

(a) 4500

- Norg B or (b) 4500

- N org C $115

4500

- NH3 C $39

Z10 PAI

- DK01 $76

Z11 PAI

- DK02 $76

Z12 PAI

- DK03 $76

Methylene Blue Active Substances C2 5540C $39

Nitrate (as N) A 352.1 $76

A2 300.0 $26

Nitrate

- Nitrite (as N) A2 300.0 $26

353.2 $76

C2 4500

- NO3 E $76

4500

- NO3 F $76

4500

- NO3 H $76

Nitrite (as N) A 354.1 $76

A2 300.0 $26

C2 4500

- NO2 B $76

C1 Hach 8507 $76

Oil and Grease and Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons C2 5520B $76

K1 1664A $76

Orthophosphate A 365.3 $76

A2 300.0 $26

365.1 $76

C2 4500

- P E $76

4500

- P F $76

C1 Hach 8048 $39

Oxygen

- consumption Rate (SOUR) C2 2710B $39

Oxygen, Dissolved C2 4500

- O C $26

4500

- O G $26

C1 Hach 8229 $26

pH (Hydrogen Ion) A 150.1 $39

C2 4500

- H B $39

C1 Hach 8156 $39

Phenols A 420.1 $116

C1 Hach 8047 $116

Phosphorus, Total A 365.3 $76

365.4 $76

A2 365.1 $76

C2 4500

- P B $76

4500

- P E $76

4500

- P F $76

C1 Hach 8190 $76

Potassium A 258.1 $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 37 of 53 A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

3500

- K D $26

Residue, Filterable (TDS) C2 2540C $39

Residue, Nonfilterable (TSS) C2 2540D $39

C1 Hach 8158 $39

Residue, Settleable Solids A 160.5 $39

C2 2540F $39

Residue, Total A 160.3 $39

C2 2540B $39

Residue, Volatile A 160.4 $39

Silica, Dissolved A 370.1 $76

A1 200.7 $10

C 4500

- Si D $76

C2 4500

- SiO2 C $76

Sodium A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

Sodium Azide C2 4110C $76

Specific Conductance A 120.1 $39

C2 2510B $39

C1 Hach 8160 $39

Sulfate A 375.1 $76

A2 300.0 $26

C2 4500

- SO4 C $76

4500

- SO4 D $76

C1 Hach 8051 $39

Sulfide (includes total and soluble) C2 4500

- S D $76

4500

- S F $39

C1 Hach 8131 $39

Sulfite C2 4500

- SO3 B $76

C1 Hach 8071 $39

Temperature, Degrees Celsius C2 2550B $13

Total, Fixed and Volatile Solids in Solid and Semisolid Samples in Sludge C2 2540G $39

Turbidity, NTU A2 180.1 $39

C2 2130B $39

3. Metals in Wastewater

a. Sample Preparation for Metals in Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Acid Extractable Metals C 3030C $7

Microwave Digestion Z7 CEM Microwave Digestion $7

Nitric Acid C 3030E $7**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 38 of 53 Nitric Acid/Hydrochloric Acid C 3030F $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid C 3030H $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid/Hydrofluoric Acid C 3030I $7

Nitric Acid/Sulfuric Acid C 3030G $7

Preliminary Filtration C 3030B $7

b. Methods to Analyze Metals in Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Aluminum A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

3111D $26

Antimony A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

Arsenic A 206.5 $39

A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

3500

- As C $76

C1 Hach 8013 $39

Barium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C 3111D $26

3113B $26

Beryllium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111D $26

3113B $26

3500

- Be D $76

Cadmium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500

- Cd D $76

Chromium (VI) Hexavalent A 218.4 $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 39 of 53 C 3500

- Cr D $39

3111C $26

C1 Hach 8023 $39

Chromium, Total A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500

- Cr D $76

C1 Hach 8023 $39

Cobalt A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

Copper A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500

- Cu D $76

C1 Hach 8506 $39

Gold A 231.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Iridium A 235.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Iron A1 200.7 $10

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500

- Fe D $76

C1 Hach 8008 $39

Lead A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500

- Pb D $76**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 40 of 53 C1 Hach 8033 $39

Lithium A1 200.7 $10

Magnesium A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

3500

- Mg D $76

Manganese A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

3500

- Mn D $76

C1 Hach 8034 $39

Mercury A 245.2 $52

A1 245.1 $52

A4 1631E $152

C 3112B $52

Molybdenum A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C 3111D $26

3113B $26

Nickel A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

C1 Hach 8037 $39

Osmium A 252.2 $26

C 3111D $26

Palladium A 253.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Platinum A 255.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Rhodium A 265.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Ruthenium A 267.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Selenium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

3114B $76

Silver A1 200.7 $10**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 41 of 53 200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

Strontium A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

3500

- Sr B $26

3500

- Sr C $20

3500

- Sr D $26

Thallium A 279.2 $26

A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

Tin A1 200.7 $10

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3113B $26

Titanium A 283.2 $26

C 3111D $26

Vanadium A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C 3111D $26

3500

- V D $76

Zinc A 289.2 $26

A1 200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

3111C $26

3500

- Zn E $76

3500

- Zn F $76

C1 Hach 8009 $39

4. Aquatic Toxicity Bioassay of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Toxicity, Acute M1 EPA/600/4

- 90/027F $194

Z13 821

- R

- 02

- 012 $194

Toxicity, Chronic N1 EPA/600/4

- 91/002 $194

Z3 821

- R

- 02

- 013 $194

5. Organic Chemicals of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 42 of 53 Method

Volatile Organics for Pharmaceuticals D3 524.2 (4.1) $152

Purgeable Hydrocarbons E 601 $76

Purgeable Aromatics E 602 $76

Acrolein and Acrylonitrile E 603 $76

624 (Approved for screening only, not for quantification) $152

1624B $152

Phenols E 604 $116

Phthalate ester E 606 $116

Nitrosamines E 607 $116

Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs E 608 $152

Nitroaromatics and Isophorone E 609 $116

PAHs E 610 $116

Haloethers E 611 $116

Chlorinated Hydrocarbons E 612 $116

2, 3, 7, 8

- Tetrachlorodibenzo

- p

- Dioxin E 613 $457

Carbon

- , Hydrogen

- , and Oxygen

- Containing Pesticides Z2 616 $116

Purgeables E 624 $152

Base/Neutrals and Acids (all analytes excluding pesticides) E 625 $152

Base/Neutrals and Acids (pesticides only) E 625 $152

Tetra

- through Octa

- Chlorinated Dioxins and Furans E 1613B $258

VOCs by Isotope Dilution GC/MS E 1624B $152

Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Isotope Dilution

GC/MS E 1625B $152

Organophosphorus Pesticides E 1657 $116

VOCs Specific to the Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Industry by Isotope Dilution GC/MS K2 1666 (A) $152

Herbicides C2 6640B $116

Ethylene Glycol K BLS

- 188 $152

6. Radiochemistry of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Gross Alpha C2 7110B $206

L 900 $206

Gross Beta C2 7110B $206

L 900.0 $206

Radium, Total C2 7500

- Ra B $206

L 903.0 $206

Radium 226 C2 7500

- Ra C $206

L 903.1 $206

SECTION C. SOLID WASTE PARAMETERS

1. Microbiology of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 43 of 53 Method

Coliforms, Total, by Membrane Filter F 9132 $228

Coliforms, Total, by Multiple Tube Fermentation F 9131 $228

2. Physical Properties Testing of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Corrosive to Steel F 1110A $63

Corrosivity

-- pH Determination F 9040C $63

EP Toxicity F 1310B $76

Ignitability (Flashpoint Determination) F 1010A $32

1020B $32

Paint Filter Liquids Test F 9095B $19

TCLP F 1311 $303

3. Sample Preparation for Metals in Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Dissolved in Water F 3005A $7

Microwave Assisted Digestions F 3015A $7

3051 $7

3052 $7

Oils, Greases, and Waxes F 3040A $7

3031 $7

Sediments, Sludges, and Soils F 3050B $7

Total Metals F 3010A $7

3020A $7

Total Recoverable in Water F 3005A $7

4. Inorganic Chemistry and Metals of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Aluminum F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

Ammonia A 350.3 $39

Antimony F 6010B $10

6020 $26

7062 $76

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Arsenic F 6010B $10

7061A $76

7062 $76

7063 $76

6020 $26

F12 7010 $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 44 of 53 Barium F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Beryllium F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Bomb Preparation Method for Solid Waste F 5050 $7

Boron F 6010B $10

Bromide F 9056 $26

9211 $39

Cadmium F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Calcium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Cation

- Exchange Capacity of Soils F 9080 $34

9081 $34

Chloride F 9056 $26

9057 $76

9212 $39

9250 $76

9251 $76

9253 $39

Chlorine, Total, in New and Used Petroleum Products F 9075 $76

9076 $39

9077 $39

Chromium, Hexavalent F 7195 $26

7196A $76

7197 $26

7198 $40

7199 $76

Chromium, Total F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Cobalt F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Compatibility Test for Wastes and Membranes F 9090A $152**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 45 of 53 Liners

Copper F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Cyanide F 9010C $13

9012B $76

9213 $76

9014 $76

F9 9015 $76

Cyanide Extraction for Solids and Oils F10 9013A $39

Dermal Corrosion F 1120 $63

EP for Oily Wastes F 1330A $76

Flashpoint Determination F 1030 $32

Fluoride F 9056 $26

9214 $39

Iron F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Kjeldahl Total, Nitrogen A 351.4 $76

Lead F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Liquid Release Test Procedure F 9096 $39

Lithium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Magnesium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Manganese F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Mercury F 7470A $52

7471A $52

7472 $152

Molybdenum F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Multiple EP F 1320 $152

Nickel F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 46 of 53 F12 7010 $26

Nitrate F 9210 $39

9056 $26

Nitrite F 9056 $26

Oil and Grease and Petroleum Hydrocarbons K1 1664A $76

O

- Phosphate

- P F 9056 $26

Osmium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Paint Filter Liquids Test F 9095B $19

Perchlorate Z 314.0 $76

pH (Hydrogen Ion) F 9041A $39

9045D $39

Phosphorus F 6010B $10

Phosphorus, Total A 365.3 $76

Potassium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Saturated Hydraulic and Leachate Conductivity and Intrinsic Permeability F 9100 $152

Selenium F 6010B $10

7741A $26

7742 $76

F12 7010 $26

Silica F 6010B $10

Silver F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Sodium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Sodium Azide C2 4110C $76

Specific Conductance F 9050A $39

SPLP F 1312 $303

Strontium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Sulfate F 9035 $76

9036 $76

9038 $76

9056 $26

Sulfides F 9030B $76

9031 $76

9215 $76

9034 $76

Thallium F 6010B $10**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 47 of 53 6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Tin F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Titanium F 6010B $10

Vanadium F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

White Phosphorus by GC F 7580 $116

Zinc F 6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

5. Organics Procedures in Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Separatory Funnel Liquid

- Liquid Extraction F 3510C $13

Organic Compounds in Water by Microextraction F5 3511 $13

Continuous Liquid

- Liquid Extraction F 3520C $13

SPE F 3535 $13

Soxhlet Extraction F 3540C $13

Automated Soxhlet Extraction F 3541 $13

Pressurized Fluid Extraction F 3545 $13

Ultrasonic Extraction F 3550B $13

Supercritical Fluid Extraction of Total Recoverable Petroleum Hydrocarbons F 3560 $13

Supercritical Fluid Extraction of PAHs F 3561 $13

MSE F4 3570 $13

Waste Dilution F 3580A $13

Waste Dilution for Volatile Organics F 3585 $13

Alumina Cleanup F 3610B $13

Alumina Column Cleanup and Separation of Petroleum

Wastes F 3611B $13

Florisil Cleanup F 3620B $13

Silica Gel Cleanup F 3630C $13

Gel

- Permeation Cleanup F 3640A $13

Acid

- Base Partition Cleanup F 3650B $13

Sulfur Cleanup F 3660B $13

Sulfuric Acid/Permanganate Cleanup F 3665A $13

Screening for Pentachlorophenol by Immunoassay F 4010A $76

Screening for 2,4

- Dichlorophenoxyacetic Acid by Immunoassay F 4015 $76

Screening for PCBs by Immunoassay F 4020 $76**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 48 of 53 Screening for PCDDs and PCDFs by Immunoassay F3 4025 $76

Soil Screening for Petroleum Hydrocarbons by Immunoassay F 4030 $76

Soil Screening for PAHs by Immunoassay F 4035 $76

Soil Screening for Toxaphene by Immunoassay F 4040 $76

Soil Screening for Chlordane by Immunoassay F 4041 $76

Soil Screening for DDT by Immunoassay F 4042 $76

TNT Explosives in Soil by Immunoassay F 4050 $76

RDX in Soil by Immunoassay F 4051 $76

VOCs in Various Sample Matrices Using Equilibrium Headspace Analysis F8 5021A $13

Purge

- and

- Trap for Aqueous Samples F6 5030C $13

Volatile, Nonpurgeable , Water

- Soluble Compounds by Azeotropic Distillation F 5031 $13

VOCs by Vacuum Distillation F 5032 $13

Closed

- System Purge

- and

- Trap and Extraction for Volatile Organics in Soil and Waste Samples F2 5035A $13

Analysis for Desorption of Sorbent Cartridges from VOST F 5041A $13

EDB and DBCP by Microextraction and GC F 8011 $116

C10

- C32 Hydrocarbons K 8015AZ 1 $116

Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID F7 8015D $116

Aromatic and Halogenated Volatiles by GC Using Photoionization and/or Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors F 8021B $152

Acrylonitrile by GC F 8031 $76

Acrylamide by GC F 8032A $76

Acetonitrile by GC with Nitrogen

- Phosphorus Detection F 8033 $76

Phenols by GC F 8041 $116

Phthalate Esters by GC/ECD F 8061A $116

Nitrosamines by GC F 8070A $116

Organochlorine Pesticides by GC F 8081A $152

PCBs by GC F 8082 $152

Nitroaromatics and Cyclic Ketones by GC F 8091 $116

PAHs F 8100 $116

Haloethers by GC F 8111 $116

Chlorinated Hydrocarbons by GC: Capillary Column Technique F 8121 $116

Aniline and Selected Derivatives by GC F 8131 $116

Organophosphorus Compounds by GC F 8141A $152

Chlorinated Herbicides by GC Using Methylation or Pentafluorobenzylation Derivatization F 8151A $152

VOCs by GC/MS F 8260B $152

Semivolatile Organic Compounds by GC/MS F 8270C $152

Semivolatile Organic Compounds (PAHs and PCBs) in Soils/Sludges and Solid Wastes Using TE/GC/MS F 8275A $152

8280A: Polychlorinated Dibenzo

- p

- Dioxins and PCDFs by

HRGC/LRMS F 8280A $258**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 49 of 53 PCDDs and PCDFs by HRGC/HRMS F 8290 $258

PAHs F 8310 $116

Determination of Carbonyl Compounds by HPLC F 8315A $116

Acrylamide, Acrylonitrile, and Acrolein by HPLC F 8316 $116

N

- Methylcarbamates by HPLC F 8318 $116

Solvent

- Extractable Nonvolatile Compounds by

HPLC/TS/MS or UV Detection F 8321A $152

Solvent Extractable Nonvolatile Compounds by

HPLC/PB/MS F 8325 $152

Nitroaromatics and Nitramines by HPLC F 8330 $116

Tetrazene by Reverse Phase HPLC F 8331 $116

Nitroglycerine by HPLC F 8332 $116

GC/FT

- IR Spectrometry for Semivolatile Organics: Capillary

Column F 8410 $116

Analysis of Bis (2

- chloroethyl) Ether and Hydrolysis Products by Direct Aqueous Injection GC/FT

- IR F 8430 $116

Total Recoverable Petroleum Hydrocarbons by Infrared Spectrophotometry F 8440 $116

Colorimetric Screening Method for TNT in Soil F 8515 $76

TOX F 9020B $76

POX F 9021 $76

TOX by Neutron Activation Analysis F 9022 $114

EOX in Solids F 9023 $114

TOCs F 9060A $76

Phenolics F 9065 $152

9066 $152

9067 $152

HEM for Aqueous Samples F 9070A $76

HEM for Sludge, Sediment, and Solid Samples F 9071B $76

PCBs in Waste Oil F1 600/4

- 81

- 045 $152

6. Bulk Asbestos Analysis of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Bulk Asbestos Analysis G 9002 $228

H Bulk Asbestos $228

Fiber Counting G 7400 $228

7402 $228

7. Radiochemistry of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Alpha

- Emitting Radium Isotopes F 9315 $206

Gross Alpha and Beta F 9310 $206

Radium

- 228 F 9320 $206

SECTION D. AIR AND STACK PARAMETERS

1. Ambient Air Primary and Secondary Pollutants**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 50 of 53 Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Carbon Monoxide O Appendix C $393

Formaldehyde F 8520 $393

Hydrocarbons O Appendix E $393

Lead O Appendix G $393

Nitrogen Dioxide O Appendix F $393

Ozone O Appendix D $393

Appendix H $393

Particulate Matter O Appendix B $393

Appendix J $393

Appendix K $393

Sulfur Oxides O Appendix A $393

2. Stationary and Stack Sources

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Carbon Dioxide, Oxygen, and Excess Air Q Method 3 $393

Carbon Monoxide Q Method 10 $393

Method 10A $393

Method 10B $393

Carbonyl Sulfide, Hydrogen Sulfide, and Carbon Disulfide Q Method 15 $393

Fluoride Q Method 13A $393

Method 13B $393

Method 14 $393

Fugitive Emissions Q Method 22 $393

Gaseous Organic Compounds Q Method 18 $393

Method 25 $393

Method 25A $393

Method 25B $393

Hydrogen Sulfide Q Method 11 $393

Inorganic Lead Q Method 12 $393

Moisture Content Q Method 4 $393

Nitrogen Oxide Q Method 7 $393

Method 7A $393

Method 7B $393

Method 7C $393

Method 7D $393

Method 7E $393

Method 19 $393

Method 20 $393

Particulate Emissions by Asphalt Processing Q Method 5A $152

Particulate Emissions by Fiberglass Insulation Q Method 5E $152

Particulate Emissions by Nonsulfate Q Method 5F $152**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 51 of 53 Particulate Emissions by Nonsulfuric Acid Q Method 5B $152

Particulate Emissions by Pressure Filters Q Method 5D $152

Particulate Emissions by Stationary Sources Q Method 5 $152

Method 17 $152

Particulate Emissions by Sulfur Dioxide Q Method 19 $152

Particulate Emissions by Wood Heaters Q Method 5G $152

Method 5H $152

Petroleum Products, Heat of Combustion I D240

- 92 $76

D240

- 87 $76

Petroleum Products, Hydrometer Method I D287

- 92 $76

Petroleum Products, Sulfur I D4294

- 90 $152

Sulfur and Total Reduced Sulfur Q Method 15A $393

Method 16 $393

Method 16A $393

Method 16B $393

Sulfur Dioxide Q Method 6 $393

Method 6A $393

Method 6B $393

Method 6C $393

Method 8 $393

Method19 $393

Method 20 $393

Sulfuric Acid Mist Q Method 8 $393

Vapor Tightness, Gasoline Delivery Tank Q Method 27 $393

Volatile Matter Density, Solids and Water Q Method 24 $393

Method 24A $393

VOCs Q Method 21 $393

S1 TO

- 15 $152

Wood Heaters, Certification and Burn Rates Q Method 28 $393

Method 28A $393

3. ADEQ Emission Test

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Particulate Emissions, Dry Matter R Method A2 $393

Particulate Emissions, Sulfuric Acid Mist/Sulfur Oxides R Method A1 $393

4. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Arsenic S Method 108 $393

Method 108A $393

Method 108B $393

Method 108C $393

Beryllium S Method 103 $393**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 52 of 53 Method 104 $393

Mercury S Method 101 $393

Method 101A $393

Method 102 $393

Method 105 $393

Polonium 210 S Method 111 $393

Vinyl Chloride S Method 106 $393

Method 107 $393

Method 107A $393

SECTION E. METHODS DIRECTOR APPROVED UNDER R9

- 14

- 610(C)

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per

Method

Chromatographic Method

- Any $116

Mass Spectrometric Method

- Any $152

Toxicity Method

- Any $194

Other Method

- Any $75

**Table 2. Instrumentation Fees**

Description Subtype, if any Fee Per Instrument

Atomic Absorption Cold Vapor $76

Flame Burner $76

Graphite Furnace $76

Hydride Generator $76

Other $76

Counters for Radioactivity

- $76

Gas Chromatograph Electron Capture $76

Flame Ionization $76

Flame Photometric $76

Halide Specific $76

Nitrogen/Phosphorus $76

Photoionization $76

Other $76

Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer High Resolution $194

Other than High Resolution $152

High Pressure Liquid Chromatograph Ultraviolet $76

Fluorescence $76

Other $76

High Pressure Liquid Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer

- $152

Inductively Coupled Plasma

- $76

Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometer

- $152

Ion Chromatograph

- $76

Automated Autoanalyzer

- $76

Mercury Analyzer

- $76**APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCH**  **APTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES**

**LABORATORIES**

5

- 15

- 12 53 of 53 Organic Halide, Total

- $76

Transmission Electron Microscope

- $396

X

- Ray Diffraction Unit

- $76

Historical Note
Exhibit I made by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).

**EXHIBIT II. ALTERNATE DEFAULT LIMITS**

**Table 1. Default Limits**

QUALITY CONTROL PARAMETERS

WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

SPECIFIED IN THE METHOD DEFAULT LIMITS

Matrix Spike/LFM (processed or non

- processed) LCS/LFB

LCS/LFB (processed or non

- processed)/Second source reference standard CCV/continuing IPC

LOQ/MRL (non

- processed) CCV/continuing IPC or ± 50%

LOQ/MRL (processed) LCS/LFB or ± 50%

QCS (non

- processed) ICV/continuing IPC/manufacturer's limits

QCS (processed) LCS/LFB/manufacturer's limits

IDOC limits LFB/LCS

LFB/LCS/LFM/duplicate RPD IDOC limits/ ≤20%

Non

- CCC compounds CCC limits

ICV/CCV ± 10%

A. For 8000 methods that do not specify the QC limits for Matrix Spike/LCS, a licensee may use the default limit of ±30%. B. For 500, 600, 1600, and 8000 series methods that do not specify surrogates or acceptance limits f or surrogates, a licensee may use the default limits of 70

- 130%.

C . For 500, 600, 1600, and 8000 series methods that do not specify internal standards or acceptance l imits for internal standa rds, a licensee may use the default limits of 70

- 130%. D. For methods that do not list a precision measurement, a licensee may use 20% RPD. E. For methods that do not specify the LOQ/MRL, a licensee may use the default limit of ± 50%.

Historical Note
Exhibit II made by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06

- 4).Attachment L

PCWRL EQL-0510-191 SOPAttachment M

PCWRL Lead Audit Strip SOPAttachment N

ERG QAPP 2012

# SUPPORT FOR THE EPA NATIONAL

MONITORING PROGRAMS

(UATMP, NATTS, CSATAM, PAMS, and NMOC Support)

Contract No. EP-D-09-048

2012

Quality Assurance Project Plan Category 1

Eastern Research Group, Inc. 601 Keystone Park Drive, Suite 700 Morrisville, NC 27560Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page iii of xvi

DISCLAIMER

This Category 1 Quality Assurance Project Plan has been prepared specifically to address the operation and management of the U.S. EPA National Monitoring Programs (UATMP, NATTS, CSATAM, PAMS and NMOC). The contents have been prepared in accordance with Level I Specifications of the EPA Guidance for Quality Assurance Project Plans, EPA QA/G-5.Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page iv of xvi

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section

A PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1 Project/Task Organization ....................................................................................... 1 of 8 1.1 Assignment of Program Personnel .............................................................. 1 of 8 1.1.1 Program Manager ............................................................................ 2 of 8 1.1.2 Deputy Program Manager ............................................................... 2 of 8 1.1.3 Program Technical Adviser ............................................................. 3 of 8 1.1.4 Program QA Coordinator ................................................................ 3 of 8

1.1.5 Task Leaders ................................................................................... 3 of 8

1.1.6 Final Data Reviewer ........................................................................ 4 of 8 2 Problem Definition/Background ............................................................................. 1 of 3 3 Project/Task Description ....................................................................................... 1 of 15

3.1 NMOC and SNMOC ................................................................................. 1 of 15

3.2 UATMP ..................................................................................................... 6 of 15

3.3 PAMS ...................................................................................................... 10 of 15

3.4 CSATAM and NATTS ............................................................................ 13 of 15 3.5 PT Sample Preparation (VOCs, Ca rbonyls, PAHs, Metals, Hexavalent Chromium) .............................................................................................. 14 of 15 4 Data Quality Objectives and Criteria for Measurement Data ............................... 1 of 19 5 Special Training Requirement s/Certification .......................................................... 1 of 2 5.1 Field Activities Training Personnel ............................................................ 1 of 2 5.2 Analytical Laboratory Personnel ................................................................. 2 of 2

6 Documentation and Records ................................................................................... 1 of 4 6.1 Information Included in the Reporting Package ......................................... 1 of 4 6.1.1 Data Management ........................................................................... 1 of 4 6.1.2 Annual Summary Reports Submitted to EPA ................................. 1 of 4 6.2 Data Reporting Package Format and Document Control ............................ 2 of 4

6.2.1 Notebooks ........................................................................................ 3 of 4

6.2.2 Electronic Data Collection .............................................................. 3 of 4 6.3 Data Reporting Package Archiving and Retrieval ...................................... 4 of 4

B MEASUREMENT DATA ACQUISITION 7 Sampling Process Design ........................................................................................ 1 of 9 7.1 NMOC and SNMOC Sampling ................................................................... 1 of 9 7.1.1 Air Toxics Compounds Sampling ................................................... 4 of 9 7.1.2 Carbonyl Compounds Sampling ..................................................... 4 of 9 7.2 UATMP Sampling ....................................................................................... 4 of 9 7.2.1 Carbonyl Compounds Sampling ..................................................... 6 of 9 7.3 PAMS Sampling .......................................................................................... 8 of 9 7.4 HAPs Sampling ........................................................................................... 8 of 9

7.4.1 Hexavalent Chromium .................................................................... 8 of 9 8 Sampling Method Requirements ............................................................................. 1 of 1Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page v of xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

9 Sample Handling and Custody Requirements ....................................................... 1 of 15 9.1 NMOC, SNMOC, and UATMP Sample Custody ..................................... 1 of 15 9.1.1 Canister Sampling Chain of Custody Forms ................................. 1 of 15 9.1.2 Invalid Canister Sample ................................................................ 5 of 15 9.1.3 NMOC Sample Analysis Forms .................................................... 6 of 15 9.1.4 Canister Cleanup Log .................................................................... 8 of 15 9.1.5 Canister Analytical Routing Schedule .......................................... 8 of 15 9.2 Carbonyl Sample Custody ......................................................................... 8 of 15 9.3 HAPs Sample Custody ............................................................................ 11 of 15 9.4 Analytical Laboratory Data ..................................................................... 11 of 15 9.5 Sampling Monitoring Data ...................................................................... 15 of 15 10 Analytical Methods Requirements ........................................................................ 1 of 12 10.1 Canister Cleanup System .......................................................................... 1 of 12 10.2 NMOC Analytical Systems ....................................................................... 4 of 12 10.3 SNMOC Analytical Systems ..................................................................... 4 of 12 10.4 UATMP and Concurrent Analytical System ............................................. 6 of 12 10.5 PAMS Analytical Systems ........................................................................ 6 of 12 10.6 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons Analytical Systems ........................ 10 of 12 10.7 Metals Using an Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Mass Spectrometry Analytical System ............................................................. 11 of 12 10.8 Hexavalent Chromium Analytical System .............................................. 11 of 12 11 Quality Control Requirements .............................................................................. 1 of 17 11.1 Sample Canister Cleanup Studies ............................................................. 1 of 17 11.2 Standard Traceability ................................................................................ 1 of 17 11.3 Accuracy and Acceptance ......................................................................... 2 of 17

11.3.1 NMOC Instrument Calibration ...................................................... 2 of 17

11.3.2 SNMOC Instrument Calibration ................................................... 2 of 17

11.3.3 UATMP Instrument Calibration .................................................... 3 of 17 11.3.4 PAMS VOC Analysis .................................................................... 4 of 17 11.3.5 Carbonyl Compounds Analysis ..................................................... 5 of 17 11.3.6 Analysis of Semivolatile Organic Compounds (PAHs) Using EPA Compendium TO-13A and ASTM D 6209 ................................... 5 of 17 11.3.7 Quality Control Measures for Analysis of Airborne Metals Collected on Filter Using EPA Method IO-3.5 ............................. 8 of 17

11.4 Precision .................................................................................................... 9 of 17 11.5 Completeness ............................................................................................ 9 of 17 11.6 Representativeness .................................................................................. 10 of 17

11.7 Method Detection Limits ........................................................................ 10 of 17 12 Instrument/Equipment Testing, Inspection, and Maintenance Requirements ........ 1 of 3

12.1 NMOC ......................................................................................................... 1 of 3 12.2 SNMOC, UATMP, and PAMS ................................................................... 1 of 3

12.3 PAMS .......................................................................................................... 3 of 3

12.4 HAPs ........................................................................................................... 3 of 3Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page vi of xvi
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

13 Instrument Calibration and Frequency .................................................................... 1 of 9

13.1 NMOC Calibration ...................................................................................... 1 of 9

13.2 SNMOC Calibration .................................................................................... 3 of 9

13.3 UATMP Calibration .................................................................................... 4 of 9

13.4 PAMS Calibration ....................................................................................... 6 of 9

13.5 HAPs Calibration ........................................................................................ 7 of 9 14 Inspection/Acceptance for Supplies and Consumables ........................................... 1 of 4 14.1 Purpose ........................................................................................................ 1 of 4 14.2 Critical Supplies and Consumables ............................................................. 1 of 4 14.3 Acceptance Criteria ..................................................................................... 1 of 4 14.4 Tracking and Quality Verification of Supplies and Consumables .............. 3 of 4 15 Data Management ................................................................................................... 1 of 8 15.1 Purpose ........................................................................................................ 1 of 8 15.2 Data Recording ............................................................................................ 3 of 8

15.3 Data Validation ........................................................................................... 3 of 8

15.4 Data Transformation ................................................................................... 4 of 8

15.5 Data Transmittal .......................................................................................... 4 of 8

15.6 Data Reduction ............................................................................................ 5 of 8 15.7 Data Summary ............................................................................................. 5 of 8 15.8 Data Tracking .............................................................................................. 6 of 8 15.9 Data Storage and Retrieval .......................................................................... 7 of 8

C ASSESSMENT/OVERSIGHT 16 Assessments and Response Actions ...................................................................... 1 of 17 16.1 Assessment Activities and Project Planning ............................................. 1 of 17 16.1.1 Internal Technical Systems Audits ................................................ 1 of 17 16.1.2 Technical System Audits ............................................................... 2 of 17

16.1.3 Performance Audit ........................................................................ 3 of 17 16.1.4 Data Quality Assessments ............................................................. 3 of 17 16.1.5 Proficiency Testing ....................................................................... 4 of 17

16.2 Documentation of Assessments ................................................................ 5 of 17 17 Reports to Management .......................................................................................... 1 of 3 17.1 Frequency, Content, and Distribution of Reports ....................................... 1 of 3 17.1.1 Annual Report ................................................................................. 1 of 3 17.1.2 Internal Technical System Audit Reports ....................................... 2 of 3 17.1.3 Corrective Action Reports ............................................................... 2 of 3

D DATA VALIDATION AND USABILITY 18 Data Review, Validation, and Ve rification Requirements .................................... 1 of 12 18.1 Data Review Design .................................................................................. 1 of 12

18.2 Data Verification ....................................................................................... 2 of 12 18.3 NMOC, SNMOC, UATMP, and NATTS Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting ......................................................................... 3 of 12Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page vii of xvi
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

18.4 PAMS Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting .................................. 5 of 12

18.4.1 VOC Data ...................................................................................... 5 of 12 18.4.2 Carbonyl Compounds Data ........................................................... 5 of 12 18.5 HAPs Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting .................................... 6 of 12 18.6 Air Quality System .................................................................................... 7 of 12 18.6.1 AQS Flagging and Reporting ........................................................ 8 of 12 19 Data Validation, Verification and Analysis ............................................................ 1 of 3 19.1 Process for Validating and Verifying Data ................................................. 1 of 3

19.1.1 Verification of Data ......................................................................... 1 of 3

19.1.2 Validation ........................................................................................ 1 of 3

19.1.3 Validation of Measurement Values ................................................. 2 of 3 19.2 Data Analysis .............................................................................................. 2 of 3 19.2.1 Analytical Tests ............................................................................... 2 of 3 20 Reconciliation with Data Quality Objectives .......................................................... 1 of 2 20.1 Conduct Preliminary Data Review .............................................................. 2 of 2

20.2 Draw Conclusions from the Data ................................................................ 2 of 2

21 References ............................................................................................................... 1 of 4

APPENDICES

A Glossary (terms used throughout the document)

B 2012 Sampling Schedule

C ERG Standard Operating Procedures

ERG-MOR-003 Field Procedure for Co llecting Ambient Air Toxics and Carbonyl Compounds Samples Using the ERG:AT/C Sampling System

ERG-MOR-005 Standard Operating Procedure for the Concurrent GC/FID/MS Analysis of Canister Air Toxic Samples using EPA Compendium Method TO-15 and EPA Ozone Precursor

Method

ERG-MOR-013 Field Procedure for Co llecting Ambient Air Hexavalent Chromium Samples Using the ERG:CR6 Sampling System

ERG-MOR-017 Standard Operating Pro cedure for Developing, Documenting, and Evaluating the Accuracy of Spreadsheet Data

ERG-MOR-024 Standard Operating Pro cedure for Preparing, Extracting, and Analyzing DNPH Carbonyl Ca rtridges by Method TO-11AProject No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page viii of xvi
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

ERG-MOR-030 Standard Operating Proce dure for Canister Sampling System

Certification Procedures

ERG-MOR-039 Standard Operating Pro cedure for Maintaining Laboratory

Notebooks

ERG-MOR-044 Standard Operating Procedure for Method 8270C

B GC/MS Analysis of Semivolatile Organics

ERG-MOR-045 Standard Operating Proce dure for Sample Receipt at the ERG Chemistry Laboratory

ERG-MOR-046 Field Procedure for Co llecting Speciated and/or Total Nonmethane Organic Compounds Ambient Air Samples Using the ERG:S/NMOC Sampling System

ERG-MOR-047 Field Procedure for Co llecting Ambient Carbonyl Compounds Samples Using the ERG:C Sampling System

ERG-MOR-049 Standard Operating Procedure for analysis of Semivolatile Organic Compounds (Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons) Using EPA Compendium Method TO-13A & ASTM D

6209-98

ERG-MOR-057 Standard Operating Pro cedure for Project Peer Review

ERG-MOR-060 Standard Operating Proce dure for PDFID Sample Analysis by

Method TO-12

ERG-MOR-061 Standard Operating Proce dure for Standard Preparation Using Dynamic Flow Dilution System

ERG-MOR-062 Standard Operating Proce dure for Sample Canister Cleaning

ERG-MOR-063 Standard Operating Procedur e for the Preparation and Analysis of Ambient Air for Hexavalent Chromium by Ion Chromatography

ERG-MOR-079 Standard Operating Procedure for Sample Login to the Laboratory Information Management System

ERG-MOR-084 Standard Operating Procedur e for the Preparation and Analysis of PM10 or TSP Filters for Metals by ICP-MSProject No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page ix of xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

ERG-MOR-085 Standard Operating Procedur e for the Preparation and Analysis of 47mm Filters for Metals by ICP-MS

ERG-MOR-097 Standard Operating Procedure for Manual Integration of Chromatographic Peaks

ERG-MOR-098 Standard Operating Procedur e for the Preparation of Monitoring Data for AQS Upload

D Subcontractor QAPPs will be added if they are initiatedProject No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page x of xvi

LIST OF TABLES

Table

1-1 Program Organization ...................................................................................................... ... 5 of 8

1-2 QC Responsibilities and Review Functions ........................................................................ 7 of 8

3-1 SNMOC Target Compounds ............................................................................................. 4 of 15

3-2 UATMP Compendium Method TO-15 Target Compounds ............................................. 8 of 15

3-3 PAMS SNMOC Volatile Hydrocarbon Target Compounds ........................................... 12 of 15

3-4 Carbonyl Target Compounds .......................................................................................... 13 of 15

3-5 List of Analytical and Support Services .......................................................................... 15 of 15

4-1 Measurement Quality Objectives for the National Program ............................................. 3 of 19

4-2 Summary of NMOC Quality Control Procedures ............................................................. 5 of 19

4-3 Summary of SNMOC Quality Control Procedures ........................................................... 6 of 19

4-4 Summary of Air Toxics TO-15 Quality Control Procedures ............................................ 7 of 19

4-5 Summary of Carbonyl Quality Control Procedures ........................................................ 10 of 19

4-6 Summary of Quality Control Procedures for Analysis of Semivolatile Organic Samples for PAHs (EPA Compendium Method TO-13A and ASTM D 6209) ............. 14 of 19

4-7 Summary of Quality Control Procedures for Metals Analysis (Method IO-3.5) ............ 16 of 19

4-8 Summary of Quality Control Procedures for Hexavalent Chromium (EPA Method) .... 19 of 19

8-1 EPA Methods and ERG SOPs for each Sampling System .................................................. 1 of 1

10-1 UATMP GC/FID/MS Operating Conditions ...................................................................... 7 of 12

11-1 BFB Key Ion Abundance Criteria ...................................................................................... 4 of 17

11-2 DFTPP Key Ions and Ion Abundance Criteria (EPA Compendium Method TO-13A and ASTM D 6209) ............................................................................................................ 6 of 17

11-3 Relative Response Factor Criteria for Initial Calibration of Common Semivolatile Compounds ..................................................................................................................... .... 7 of 17

11-4 2012 SNMOC Method Detection Limits .......................................................................... 12 of 17

11-5 2012 Air Toxics Method Detection Limits ....................................................................... 14 of 17Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page xi of xvi LIST OF TABLES (Continued)

Table

11-6 2012 Carbonyl Method Detection Limits (U nderivatized Concentration) ....................... 15 of 17

11-7 2012 PAH Method Detection Limits ................................................................................ 16 of 17

11-8 2012 Metals Method Detection Limit for Spiked Filter Strips ......................................... 17 of 17

12-1 Preventive Maintenance in ERG Laboratories ..................................................................... 2 of 3

13-1 HAP Analytical Equipment Calibration Requirements ........................................................ 7 of 9

14-1 Critical Field and Laboratory S upplies and Consumables ................................................... 2 of 4

15-1 Report Equations ......................................................................................................... ......... 6 of 8

15-2 Data Archive Policies .................................................................................................... ....... 8 of 8

16-1 Air Toxics TO-15 Quality Control Review Checklist ........................................................ 6 of 17

16-2 Carbonyl TO-11A Quality Control Review Checklist ....................................................... 8 of 17

16-3 Semivolatile TO-13A Quality Control Review Checklist ................................................ 11 of 17

16-4 Metals IO-3.5 Quality Control Review Checklist – 47mm Teflon & 8x10” Quartz

Filters ....................................................................................................................... ......... 13 of 17

16-5 Hexavalent Chromium Quality Control Review Checklist .............................................. 15 of 17

18-1 Summary of Quantitation and Detection Limit Flags and Applications ............................ 9 of 12

18-2 Laboratory Generated Flags ............................................................................................. 1 0 of 12

18-3 Chain of Custody Flags.................................................................................................... . 11 of 12

18-4 Field Operations and Maintenance Flags ......................................................................... 12 of 12Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page xii of xvi

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure

1-1 National Monitoring Programs Organizational Chart ......................................................... 6 of 8

7-1 NMOC, SNMOC, and 3-Hour Air Toxics Sampling System Components ........................ 2 of 9

7-2 Example Sampler Training Form ........................................................................................ 3 of 9

7-3 Carbonyl Sampling System Components ............................................................................ 5 of 9

7-4 24-Hour Integrated Air Toxics Sampling System Components .......................................... 7 of 9

7-5 Hexavalent Chromium Sampling System Components ...................................................... 9 of 9

9-1 Example NMOC Chain of Custody................................................................................... 2 of 15

9-2 Example Toxics/SNMOC Chain of Custody .................................................................... 3 of 15

9-3 Example ERG LIMS Login Page ...................................................................................... 4 of 15

9-4 Canister Tag .............................................................................................................. ........ 5 of 15

9-5 NMOC Calibration Form .................................................................................................. 7 of 15

9-6 Example Canister Cleanup Log ......................................................................................... 9 of 15

9-7 Example Carbonyl Compounds Chain of Custody ......................................................... 10 of 15

9-8 Example SVOC Sample Chain of Custody ..................................................................... 12 of 15

9-9 Example Ambient Hexavalent Chromium Chain of Custody ......................................... 13 of 15

9-10 Example Metals Chain of Custody .................................................................................. 14 of 1 5

10-1 Canister Cleanup System Schematic ................................................................................. 2 of 1 2

10-2 NMOC Analytical Systems ............................................................................................... 5 of 12

10-3 Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer/FID System ...................................................... 8 of 12

10-4 HPLC System .............................................................................................................. ...... 9 of 12

13-1 Dynamic Flow Dilution Apparatus ............................................................................................. 5 of 9

15-1 Data Management and Sample Flow Diagram.................................................................... 2 of 8

17-1 ERG Response/Corrective Action Form ............................................................................. 3 of 3Project No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page xiii of xvi

SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

AC Area Counts

AQS Air Quality Subsystem (of the Aerometric Information and Retrieval System)

BFB 4-Bromofluorobenzene

BLK Blank

BS/BSD Blank Spike/Bland Spike Duplicate

CAR Corrective Action Report

CCB Continuing calibration blank

CCV Continuing calibration verification

CD Compact Disk

cm Centimeter

CSATAM Community Scale Air Toxics Ambient Monitoring

CV Coefficient of Variation, precision

DFTPP Decafluorotriphenylphosphine

DL Detection Limit

DNPH 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine

DPC Daily Observed Propane Concentration

DPR Daily Performance Report

DQA Data Quality Assessment

DQOs Data Quality Objective(s)

DUP Duplicate

DVD Digital Versatile Disk

EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

ERG Eastern Research Group, Inc.

FB Field Blank

FIDs Flame Ionization Detector

GC Gas Chromatograph

GPRA Government Performance and Results Act

HAPs Hazardous Air Pollutant(s)

HPLC High Performance Liquid Chromatography

HSV High standard verificationProject No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page xiv of xvi
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (Continued)

IC Ion Chromatography

ICB Initial Calibration Blank

ICPMS Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometer

ICSA/IFA Interference Check Standard A

ICSAB/IFB Interference Check Standard B

ICV Initial calibration verification

ID Inner Diameter

ID Identification

IS Internal Standard

LCS Laboratory Control Standard

LIMS Laboratory Inventory Management System

LRB Laboratory Reagent Blank

MB Method Blank

MDL Method Detection Limit

mL Milliliter

mm Millimeter

MQOs Measurement Quality Objective

MS Mass Spectrometer

MS/MSD Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicate

μ g Micrograms

μ L Microliters

N 2 Nitrogen gas

NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality Standard

NATTS National Ambient Toxics Trends Station

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

nm Nanometer

NMOC Nonmethane Organic Compounds

NO

x Oxides of Nitrogen

OAQPS Office of Air Quality Planning and StandardsProject No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page xv of xvi
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (Continued)

OPR Ongoing Precision and Recovery

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

P&A Precision & Accuracy

PAHs Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons

PAMS Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations

PC Personal computer

PDFID Preconcentration Direct Flame Ionization Detection

PDS Post digestion spike

PE Perkin Elmer

POC Parameter Occurrence Code

ppbC Parts per Billion as Carbon

ppbV Parts per Billion (by volume)

ppmC Parts per Million as Carbon

PT Proficiency Testing

PUF Polyurethane Foam

QA Quality Assurance

QAPP Quality Assurance Project Plan

QC Quality Control

QL Quantitation Limit

RB Raw Blank

RD Raw Data

RE Relative Error

RF Response Factor

RP Raw Precision

RPD Relative Percent Difference

RRTs Relative Retention Times

RSD Relative Standard Deviation

RT Retention Time

RTP Research Triangle Park

SIP State Implementation PlanProject No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page xvi of xvi
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (Continued)

SOPs Standard Operating Procedure

SQL Sample Quantitation Limit

SRD Serial dilution

SSQC Second Source Quality Control

STI Sonoma Technology, Inc.

SVOC Semivolatile Organic Compounds

TAD Technical Assistance Document. Also a NATTS TAD

TPC Theoretical Propane Concentration

TSA Technical System Audits

UAM Urban Airshed Model

UATMP Urban Air Toxics Monitoring Program

UPS United Postal Service of America

UV Ultraviolet

VOC Volatile Organic CompoundProject No. 0269.00

Element No. A2

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page xvii of xvi

DISTRIBUTION LIST

Copies of this plan and all revisions will be provided to:

 Margaret Dougherty, Work Assignment Manager, U.S. EPA, C304-02, RTP, NC

 Michael Jones, Delivery Order Manager, U.S. EPA, C339-02, RTP, NC

 Dennis Mikel, AT QA Coordinator, U.S. EPA, C339-02, RTP, NC

U.S. EPA Regional contacts may obtain a copy of the QAPP by contacting the Delivery Order

Manager. It is the responsibility of each Regional contact to make copies of the plan for appropriate

State personnel or to refer them to the ERG website: http://www.ergweb2.com/uatmp/index.htm

.Project No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 1 - A4

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 1 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx PROJECT MANAGEMENT

SECTION 1

PROJECT/TASK ORGANIZATION

1.1 Assignment of Program Personnel

Table 1-1 presents the program organizat ion listing the program assignment and

responsible person for each aspect of the E nvironmental Protection Agency (EPA) National

Monitoring Programs. The program organiza tional chart is presented in Figure 1-1.

Eastern Research Group’s (ERG) primary s upport on this contract include Nonmethane

Organic Compounds (NMOC), Speciated Nonm ethane Organic Compound(s) (SNMOC),

Volatile Organic Compound(s) (VOC), Polycy clic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAH), Metals,

Hexavalent Chromium, and other Hazardous Air Po llutants (HAPs). Subcontracting services are

extended by ChromIan for onsite technical assi stance for Photochemical Assessment Monitoring

Stations (PAMS) analysis, Sono ma Technology, Inc. (STI) for data validation, RTI Laboratories,

Inc. for VOCs by cartridge, pesticides/PCBs, ani ons, diisocyanates, and 4,4’-methylenedianiline,

and RTI International for metals analysis, in the event of a large workload.

ERG is responsible to the client for th e work of the subcontractor, and choosing

subcontractors that meet the applicable requirements for the methods. The subcontractor should

meet the DQO requirements for the appropriate method. ERG shall maintain a record of

subcontractor compliance, including documentati on of subcontractor’s MDLs, QAPPs, etc. The

subcontractor will be overseen by annual PT samp les and/or TSAs as they are available through

OAQPS. If such measures are not available, ER G will request audit reports performed with the

subcontract lab and will supply PT audits. Samples will not be taken and/or submitted to a

subcontract until current MDLs and QAPPs are appr oved for required analyses. Sample analysis

will not begin with the subcontractor until MDLs , QAPPs, etc., have been approved by the EPA

and ERG.Project No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 1 - A4

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 2 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 1.1.1 Program Manager

Ms. Julie Swift, an ERG Senior Program Ma nager serves as the Program Manager for

EPA’s National Monitoring Programs. In this role, she has the primary responsibility for

understanding EPA’s and their clients’ (i.e., Stat e, local, and tribal agencies) needs at the

program level. Ms. Swift is ultimately accounta ble for providing timely, cost effective, and high

quality services that meet the needs of th e National Monitoring Program efforts. Her

responsibility is ensuring the EP A client satisfaction by verifyi ng that all components necessary

for effective management are in place and active at all times during the contract performance

period. Ms. Swift coordinates with the ERG Quality Assurance (QA) Officer, and task leaders to

provide EPA client perspective and communicate tech nical issues and needs, and to ensure that

these program staff facilitate management decisi ons appropriate to their roles on Contract EP-D09-048. She prepares budgetary and schedule in formation, and prepares all information for

presentation to EPA at scheduled program meeti ngs. As the Program Manager, Ms. Julie Swift

is responsible for the technical operation and the quality of the program on a day-to-day basis.

She leads the analytical tasks and provides tec hnical direction and support. She assists in the

resolution of technical issues a nd serves as a resource for Task Leaders regarding any project

issues.

1.1.2 Deputy Program Manager

As the Deputy Program Manager, Ms. Laura Van Enwyck assists the Program Manager

for EPA’s National Monitoring Programs. She assi sts the Program Manager in all aspects of the

technical operation and the quality of the program on a day-to-day basis. She assists the

analytical task leaders and provi des technical direction and support. She assists in the resolution

of technical issues and serves as a resource for Task Leaders re garding project issues. Ms. Van

Enwyck is also the HAPS support Task Leader.Project No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 1 - A4

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 3 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 1.1.3 Program Technical Adviser

The Program Technical Adviser, Mr. Dave Da yton, assists in the resolution of technical

issues. He communicates with ERG management, a nd the technical staff fo r discussion of real

and potential technical problems. He will also peer review all Quality Assurance Project Plans

(QAPPs), draft and final program report products and provide oversight of efforts to evaluate and

characterize data.

1.1.4 Program QA Coordinator

Ms. Donna Tedder, the Program and Laborat ory QA Coordinator, is responsible for

ensuring the overall integrity and quality of project results. Ms. Tedder, or her designee, will do

a 10 percent QA review for all sample analyses de livered for reporting to the Program Manager.

In the case of subcontracted work, 20% percent of data from subcontractor will be reviewed.

The lines of communication between management , the Program QA Officer , and the technical

staff are formally established and allow for disc ussion of real and potential problems, preventive

actions, and corrective procedures. The major Qu ality Control (QC) resp onsibilities and QC

review functions are summarized in Table 1-2. On quality issues, Ms. Tedder reports

independently to Ms. Mary Wille tt, ERG’s corporate QA Officer.

1.1.5 Task Leaders

ERG Task Leaders are responsible for mee ting the project objectives, meeting report

schedules, and directing the technica l staff in execution of the technical effort for their respective

task(s). The Task Leaders will review 100 perc ent of all sample analyses and will deliver a

requested 10 percent of all samp le analyses to the QA Coordina tor for review prior to data

reporting by the Program Manager. The Task Lead ers manage the day-to-day technical activities

on delivery orders for this program. They assess and report on the project’s progress and results

(e.g., recordkeeping, data valida tion procedures, sample turnaround time) and ensure timely,

high-quality services that meet the requirements in this QAPP.Project No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 1 - A4

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 4 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 1.1.6 Final Data Reviewer

ERG Final Data Reviewers are responsible for making sure the data meets the project

objectives and meets the reporting schedules. The Final Data Revi ewer is responsible for the

data being generated and directs a ny technical issues with the Task Lead that is responsible for

that analysis, the Program Manager, and/or the Program QA Coordinator.Project No. 0269.00Element No. Section 1 - A4Revision No. 2Date January 2012Page 5 of 8L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docxTable 1-1Program OrganizationProgram AssignmentProgram PersonnelAssigned Phone Number Email AddressProgram Manager Julie Swift (919) 468-7924julie.swift@erg.comDeputy Program Manager Laura Van Enwyck (919) 468-7930laura.vanenwyck@erg.comTask Leader - Network Site Coordination Scott Sholar (919) 468-7951scott.sholar@erg.comTask Leader – Shipping and ReceivingChris Kopp(919) 468-7945chris.kopp@erg.comTask Leader - Air Toxicsand Hexavalent Chromium Randy Bower (919) 468-7928randy.bower@erg.comTask Leader - Carbonyl Analysis Laura Van Enwyck (919) 468-7930laura.vanenwyck@erg.comTask Leader - PAMS Support * Donna Tedder (919) 468-7921donna.tedder@erg.comTask Leader - HAPs Support **Laura Van Enwyck(919) 468-7930laura.vanenwyck@erg.comTask Leader – Metals Jennifer Colby (919) 468-7881jennifer.colby@erg.comTask Leader - SemivolatilesScott Sholar (919) 468-7951scott.sholar@erg.comTask Leader - Data Characterization Regi Oommen (919) 468-7829regi.oommen@erg.comTask Leader – Annual Report/AQSEntry Jaime Hauser (919) 468-7813jaime.hauser@erg.comTask Leader - NMOC AnalysisScott Sholar (919) 468-7951scott.sholar@erg.comFinal Data Reviewer -SNMOC Analysis Thomas McKenzie (919) 468-7920Thomas.mckenzie@erg.comProgram Technical Adviser Dave Dayton (919) 468-7883dave.dayton@erg.comProgram QA Coordinator Donna Tedder (919) 468-7921donna.tedder@erg.comProject AdministratorKerry Fountain(919) 468-7962kerry.fountain@erg.com* Subcontracting support when requestedfrom Chromian and Sonoma Technology, Inc.** Subcontracting support when requested from RTI Laboratories (miscellaneous HAPs).Project No. 0269.00Element No. Section 1 - A4Revision No. 2Date January 2012Page 6 of 8L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docxEPA Project OfficerMargaret DoughertyEPA Delivery Order ManagerMichael Jonesor OAQPS designeeProgram ManagerJulie SwiftProject AdministratorKerry FountainProgram Technical AdvisorDave DaytonProgram QA CoordinatorDonna TedderContracts ManagerLinda TaylorEPA QA OfficerDennis MikelMetals AnalysisTask LeadJennifer ColbyCarbonyl AnalysisTask LeadLaura Van EnwyckHexavalent ChromiumAnalysisTask LeadRandy BowerSubcontractedHAPS & MetalsTask LeadLaura Van EnwyckSubcontractorsRTI InternationalRTI LaboratoriesSanoma TechnologiesSNMOC Data AnalysisFinal Data ReviewerThomas McKenzieAir Toxics AnalysisTask LeadRandy BowerSemivolatile (PAH) AnalysisTask LeadScott SholarSubcontractorsChromianSonoma Technologies, Inc.QA Audit &PAMS SupportTask LeadDonna TedderNetwork Site CoordinationTask LeadScott SholarAnnual Report/AQS EntryTask LeadJaime HauserShipping & ReceivingTask LeadChris KoppNMOC AnalysisFinal Data ReviewerScott SholarDeputy Program ManagerLaura Van EnwyckData CharacterizationTask LeadRegi OommenFigure 1-1. National MonitoringPrograms Organizational ChartProject No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 1 - A4

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 7 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

### Table 1-2 QC Responsibilities and Review Functions

Responsible Person Major Responsibilities

Ms. Julie Swift, Program Manager  Ensure overall timely performance of high quality technical services

 Communicate technical issues and needs

 Assist in the resolution of technical problems

 Track all management systems and tools

 Track deliverables and budget performance

 Ensure appropriate level of staffing and committed resources exist to perform

work

 Communicate daily with the EPA/State/local/tribal agencies

 Ensure data quality

 Check information completeness

 Review data completeness and quality before reporting to client

 Review all reports

 Report project performance (budget and deliverables) to EPA at scheduled meetings and in monthly progress reports

 Day-to-day management of task leaders

Ms. Laura Van Enwyck, Deputy Program Manager  Ensure overall timely performance of high quality technical services

 Communicate technical issues and needs

 Assist in the resolution of technical problems

 Ensure appropriate level of staffing and committed resources exist to perform

work

 Communicate with the EPA/State/local/tribal agencies

 Ensure data quality

 Check information completeness

 Review data completeness and quality before reporting to client

 Day-to-day management of task leaders

 Task Leader on HAPS support

Mr. Dave Dayton, Program Technical

Adviser  Assist in the resolution of technical problems

 Communicate potential technical issues and needs

Ms. Donna Tedder, Program QA Coordinator  Make QA recommendations

 Write and/or review QAPP

 Audit laboratory

 Review QA reports

 Evaluate the effect of technical issues on data quality

 Review 10% of all QC data for monthly reports

 Review documentation (data, reports, etc.)Project No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 1 - A4

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 8 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

### Table 1-2 QC Responsibilities and Re view Functions Continued

Responsible Person Major Responsibilities

Task Leader, listed in

Table 1-1  Review documentation

 Develop analytical procedures

 Propose procedural changes

 Review and validate data

 Train and supervise analysts

 Meet task report schedules

 Manage day-to-day technical activities

 Check information completeness

 Review instrument and maintenance log books

 Review calibration factor drift

 Perform preventive maintenanceProject No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 2 - A5

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 1 of 3

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect2 12.docx SECTION 2

PROBLEM DEFINITION/BACKGROUND

The Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 re quired the EPA’s Office of Air Quality

Planning and Standards (OAQPS) to set National Ambient Air Quality Standard (NAAQS) for

the “criteria” pollutant, ozone. In areas of the country where the NAAQS for ozone is being

exceeded, additional measurements of the ambient NMOC (1) concentration are needed to assist

the affected States in developi ng revised ozone control strategi es. Measurements of ambient

NMOC are important to the control of VOCs that are precursors to atmospheric ozone. Because

of previous difficulty in obtai ning accurate NMOC concentrati on measurements, EPA started a

monitoring and analytical progr am in 1984 to provide support to the States. ERG has

continuously supported EPA for the NMOC programs since 1984.

Studies indicate that a potential for elevated cancer risk is associated with certain toxic

compounds often found in ambient urban air. (2) In 1987, EPA developed the Urban Air Toxics

Monitoring Program (UATMP) to help State, local and tribal air monitoring agencies

characterize the nature and exte nt of potentially toxic air po llution in urban areas. Since 1987,

several State and local agencies have particip ated in the UATMP by implementing ambient air

monitoring programs. These efforts have helped to identify the toxic compounds most prevalent

in the ambient air and indicate emissions sources th at are likely to be contributing to elevated

concentrations. As a screening program the UATMP also provides data input for models used by

EPA, State, local and risk assessment personnel to assess risks posed by the presence of toxic

compounds in urban areas. The UATMP program is a year-round sampling program, collecting

24-hour integrated ambient air samp les at urban sites in the conti guous United States every six or

12 days, and is also supported by ERG.

The SNMOC program was initiated in 1991 in response to requests by State agencies for

more detailed speciated hydrocarbon data for use in ozone control strategies and Urban Airshed

Model (UAM) input.Project No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 2 - A5

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 2 of 3

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect2 12.docx Title I, Section 182 of the Clean Air Act Amen dments of 1990 requires States to establish

PAMS as part of their State implementation plan (SIP) for ozone nonattainment areas. The rule

revises the ambient air quality su rveillance regulations to include enhanced monitoring of ozone

and its precursors. The regulations promulgate d in 1993 require monitoring of ozone, oxides of

nitrogen (NO

x ), selected carbonyl compounds , and VOCs. The required monitoring is complex

and requires considerable lead time for the agenci es to acquire the equipment and expertise to

implement their PAMS network. Under the PAMS program, each site may require a different

level of support with respect to sampling fre quency, sampling equipment, analyses, and report

preparation. Presampling, sampling, and analytic al activities are performed according to the

guidance provided in the Techni cal Assistance Document (TAD) (3) , for Sampling and Analysis

of Ozone Precursors, 1998 revision. The specific methodology applicable to the PAMS program

will be discussed in this QAPP.

In 1999, the EPA expanded this program to pr ovide for the measurement of additional

Clean Air Act HAPs to support the Government Performance and Results Act (GPRA). As

required under the GPRA, the EPA developed a Strate gic Plan that includes a goal for Clean Air.

Under this goal, there is an objective to improve air quality and reduce air toxics emissions to

levels 75 percent below 1993 levels by 2010 in orde r to reduce the risk to Americans of cancer

and other serious adverse health e ffects caused by airborne toxics.

In 2001 the United States EPA designed a nati onal network for monitoring air toxics

compounds present in ambient air entitled th e National Ambient Toxics Trends Station

(NATTS). The intent of this network is to de velop an extensive air toxics database from actual

field measurements (rather than calculated emission rates) in order to detect selected air toxics

compounds and track the trends in the concentrations with the ultimate goal of assessing specific

related health risks.

The data obtained by following this QAPP will be used by EPA, State, local, and risk

assessment personnel to determine prevalent ozone precursors and air toxics in the urban air.

The data collected from the continuous yearly sites gives data analyst consistent analyticalProject No. 0269.00

Element No. Section 2 - A5

Revision No. 2 Date January 2012 Page 3 of 3

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect2 12.docx results. Sampling and analytical uncertain ties are determined through this program by

performing 10% sampling duplicate (or collocated) and analytical replicate samples for each of

the urban air sites.

This combined QAPP defines the preparati on, sampling, laboratory analyses and QA/QC

procedures conducted by ERG for the EPA Nati onal Monitoring Programs to deliver data of

sufficient quality to meet the program’s objectives . Many of these procedur es described in this

QAPP are based on experiences obtained dur ing previous National Program Studies.Project No. 0260.00

Element No. Section 3 - A6

Revision 2 Date January 2012 Page 1 of 15

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect3 12.docx SECTION 3

PROJECT/TASK DESCRIPTION

This section describes the activities perf ormed under each of the major EPA National

Monitoring Programs components (NMOC, SNMO C, UATMP, PAMS, Community Scale Air

Toxics Ambient Monitoring (CSATAM), and NATTS ). ERG dedicates passivated canisters,

sampling equipment and provides expendable samp ling media to the program to maintain known

quality of the sample collection that meets the program objectives. Sampling and analysis

schedules are prepared in the project instructions when the delivery orders are provided by EPA.

3.1 NMOC and SNMOC

The NMOC and SNMOC programs require seve ral activities for a successful monitoring

program. The monitoring program begins with ac tivities prior to sample collection. The NMOC

and SNMOC sample collection systems are de signed to collect ambient air samples in

SUMMA ® -treated stainless steel cani sters over a 3-hour period. Th is sample collection period

occurs from 6:00 - 9:00 a.m. local time to cap ture mobile source pollu tants during the morning

“rush hour” simultaneously with sunrise, wh ich provides the energy necessary for many

photochemical reactions. Weekday sampling will be the responsibility of the individual States

involved in this program. ERG provides the sa mpler, training, and a ny technical assistance

needed throughout the monitoring program.

A selected number of canisters from State- and EPA-directed sites are analyzed for

additional air toxics compounds; these sites and ca nisters are identified at the beginning of the

program to ensure sample completeness. Some s ites also collect carbonyl samples for analysis.

The analytical methods and procedures are di scussed later in the UAT MP and PAMS project

descriptions (Section 10).